Agenda packet, first session — Santa Monica City Council, September 30, 2025 (part 6 of 14)

PAY ON FOOT STATION

PRODUCT NAME UNIT PRICE QUANTITY EXTENDED TOTAL PRICE

FULL SERVICE EASY CASH POF WITH HID
• 1. License, SQL 2008 SRV-CAL/V2, MS SQL
• 2. SFTW MS XP Embedded - Order with SKIDATA PC's only • 3. POF Easy.Cash Rack
• 4. POF-EC Bank Note Reader & Recycler
• 5. POF-EC Coder Unlimited
• 6. POF-EC Coder Unlimited Feeder+
• 7. POF-EC Crosswise Barcode
• 8. POF-EC Easy Cash Basic Unit (3-Color) - Order with 946010324
• 9. POF-EC Mag Stripe Reader (1 way)
• 10. Hardware LVPs
• 11. Weigand converter board for SKIDATA
• 12. ProxPoint Reader, Wiegand Output (Beige)
• 13. Hopperset for US
• 14. WEB KEY Unmanaged Setup Kit (Incl: 1 Grand Master Key, 2 User Keys, Configuration/Setup)
• 15. USB Keyboard w/ Mouse
$ 42,077 8 $ 336,616

CREDIT CARD ONLY POF
• 1. Basic Unit Credit.Cash V3
• 2. POF-CC Coder Unlimited
• 3. POF-CC Coder Feeder+
• 4. POF-CC Mag Stripe Reader (1 way)
• 5. POF-CC Crosswise Barcode
• 6. POF Credit.Cash Rack
• 7. License, SQL 2008 SRV-CAL/V2, MS SQL
• 8. SFTW MS XP Embedded - Order with SKIDATA PC's only • 9. Software Module LVPs
• 10. WEB KEY Unmanaged Setup Kit (Incl: 1 Grand Master Key, 2 User Keys, Configuration/Setup)
• 11. USB Keyboard w/ Mouse
$ 22,348 4 $ 89,392

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 827 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

Page 3 of 10 ends

LANE EQUIPMENT

PRODUCT NAME UNIT PRICE QUANTITY EXTENDED TOTAL PRICE
EXIT POWER.GATE COLUMN UNLIMITED, HID
• 1. Power.Gate-EXIT
• 2. CO UNLIMITED BU
• 3. CO UNLIMITED FEED+
• 4. CO UNLIMITED BC C
• 5. CO UNLIMITED 1x2 MAG
• 6. Power.Gate/ Lite.Gate Touchscreen 7"
• 7. Hardware LVPs
• 8. Power.Gate User Interface Illuminated
• 9. Power.Gate /Lite.Gate contour stripe illuminated
• 10. Power.Gate Interface extension large
• 11. Power.Gate Intercom analog
• 12. Power.Gate/Lite.Gate lock keyed the same
• 13. Power.Gate Ticket Tray - Small
• 14. HID Proxpoint Plus
• 15. 12vdc, 1 amp, Reg. Adapter
$ 17,351 19 $ 329,676
EXIT POWER.GATE COLUMN UNLIMITED, HID (HOUSING ONLY)
• 1. Power.Gate-EXIT
• 2 Power.Gate/ Lite.Gate Touchscreen 7"
• 3. Power.Gate User Interface Illuminated
• 4. Power.Gate /Lite.Gate contour stripe illuminated
• 5. Power.Gate Interface extension large
• 6. Power.Gate Intercom analog
• 7. Power.Gate/Lite.Gate lock keyed the same
• 8. Power.Gate Ticket Tray - Small
• 9. HID Proxpoint Plus
• 10. 12vdc, 1 amp, Reg. Adapter
$ 8,195 12 $ 98,340
ENTRY POWER.GATE COLUMN UNLIMITED, HID
• 1. Power.Gate-ENTRY
• 2. Power.Gate Ticket Tray - Small
• 3. CO UNLIMITED BU
• 4. CO UNLIMITED FEED
• 5. CO UNLIMITED BC C
• 6. CO UNLIMITED 1x2 MAG
• 7. Power.Gate/ Lite.Gate Graphic Display 7"
• 8. Hardware LVPs
• 9. Power.Gate User Interface Illuminated
• 10. Power.Gate /Lite.Gate contour stripe illuminated
• 11. Power.Gate Interface extension large
• 12. Power.Gate Intercom analog
• 13. Power.Gate/Lite.Gate lock keyed the same
• 14. HID Proxpoint Plus
• 15. 12vdc, 1 amp, Reg. Adapter
$ 15,871 12 $ 190,456
ENTRY POWER.GATE COLUMN UNLIMITED, HID (HOUSING ONLY)
• 1. Power.Gate-ENTRY
• 2. Power.Gate Ticket Tray - Small
• 3. Power.Gate/ Lite.Gate Graphic Display 7"
• 4. Power.Gate User Interface Illuminated
• 5. Power.Gate /Lite.Gate contour stripe illuminated
• 6. Power.Gate Interface extension large
• 7. Power.Gate Intercom analog
• 8. Power.Gate/Lite.Gate lock keyed the same
• 9. HID Proxpoint Plus
• 10. 12vdc, 1 amp, Reg. Adapter
$ 7,472 8 $ 59,776
POWER.GATE PRINT@HOME $ 1,597 51 $ 81,447

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 828 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

Page 4 of 10 ends

Corporate HQ: Mid-Atlantic Office:
6611 Odessa Ave 21580 Beaumeade Circle, Suite 210
Van Nuys CA, 91406 Ashburn VA, 20147
Phone: (800) 246-6662 Phone: (202) 448-8954
Fax: (818) 786-2910
www.sentrycontrol.com
BARRIER.GATE-ADA NON-ILLUMINATED
• 1 AC-Barrier.Gate-BASIC-US x (1)
• 2 AC-Barrier.Gate-CABLE-LOOPDE x (1)
• 3 AC-Barrier.Gate-DET x (1)
• 4 AC-Barrier.Gate-F-BOOM 2.5-2.34 x (1)
$ 4,028 40 $ 161,108
BARRIER.GATE-STANDARD ILLUMINATED 10'
• 1 AC-Barrier.Gate-BASIC-US x (1)
• 2 AC-Barrier.Gate-CABLE-LOOPDE x (1)
• 3 AC-Barrier.Gate-DET x (1)
• 4 AC-Barrier.Gate-BOOM YELLOW 3.0 x (1)
$ 3,734 11 $ 41,071
RDR DOOR READER W/ INTERCOM $ 3,169 8 $ 25,352

MOUNTING PLATE FOR COLUMNS & GATES
• 1. Mounting Plate - Lane Equipment x (1.00)
$ 231 102 $ 23,562
CO UNLIMITED BC C $ 207 45 $ 9,315

POINT-OF-SALE

PRODUCT NAME UNIT PRICE QUANTITY EXTENDED TOTAL PRICE
REPLACEMENT SKIDATA PAY ON FOOT BASEBOARD $ 3,267 35 $ 114,345

SKIDATA DESKTOP CODER UNLIMITED
• 1. DT Desktop Coder Unlimited x (1.00)
• 2. DT Crosswise Barcode x (1.00)
• 3. DT Mag Stripe Reader (1 way) x (1.00)
• 4. Hardware LVPs x (5.00)
$ 11,640 4 $ 46,560

EMV CREDIT CARD ACCEPTANCE

PRODUCT NAME UNIT PRICE QUANTITY EXTENDED TOTAL PRICE

PAYMENT EXPRESS UNATTENDED EMV READER - CARD INSERT
SCR200 BUNDLE
• 1. Payment Express SCR 200
• 2. Payment Express UPT200 -Linux converter
• 3. Payment Express Activation Fee per terminal for Secure Card Reader 200
$ 658 78 $ 51,324
PAYMENT EXPRESS ATTENDED EMV READER WITH PINPAD (IPP350) • 1. Payment Express Ingenico iPP350 Series PINpad
• 2. Payment Express Activation Fee per terminal for IPP350 Terminal
$ 592 7 $ 4,144

ACCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT

PRODUCT NAME UNIT PRICE QUANTITY EXTENDED TOTAL PRICE
PINHOLE CAMERA $ 330 98 $ 32,340

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 829 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

Page 5 of 10 ends

SERVER/NETWORK EQUIPMENT

PRODUCT NAME UNIT PRICE QUANTITY EXTENDED TOTAL PRICE
HP 5810 PC BUNDLE
• 1. HP5810 I5-4570S
• 2. Hard Drive , HP 500GB, SATA-600
• 3. 4GB Memory for HP5810
• 4. Microsoft Windows 7 Professional
$ 1,628 24 $ 39,060
APC RACK MOUNT -UPS 1500VA USB 2U $ 924 18 $ 16,632

KEYBOARD, MONITOR, MOUSE
• 1. MON Flat Screen Monitor 17" x (1.00)
• 2. USB Keyboard w/ Mouse x (1.00)
$ 158 8 $ 1,262
CABLE, BELDEN 4PR/CAT5/PL/BLUE $ 1 210 $ 107
CABLE, BELDEN 4PR/CAT5/PL/BLUE $ 1 200 $ 102
LICENSE, SYMANTEC ENDPOINT, 1YR, (1-24) $ 53 70 $ 3,710 LASER PRINTER $ 203 1 $ 203

ACCESS CARDS AND TAGS

PRODUCT NAME UNIT PRICE QUANTITY EXTENDED TOTAL PRICE
RS2 HID PROXCARD II $ 3 2000 $ 6,000

ACCESSORIES / OTHER

PRODUCT NAME UNIT PRICE QUANTITY EXTENDED TOTAL PRICE
SCAN OF DECK (NON-DESTRUCTIVE) $ 792 3 $ 2,376

SOFTWARE

PRODUCT NAME UNIT PRICE QUANTITY EXTENDED TOTAL PRICE
HARDWARE LVPS CREDIT FOR EXISTING EQUIPMENT $ 289 -80 -$ 23,120 OPTIONAL ITEMS: INTERCOM

SENTRY PLANS TO USE THE EXISTING INTERCOMS

PRICING IS LUMPSUM & INCLUDES APPLICABLE TAXES, LABOR, & FREIGHT

PRODUCT NAME UNIT PRICE QUANTITY TOTAL PRICE
Commend GE300 5-8 Subscribers with Tel Card
• 1. G3 GE 300 IP-Intercom Server x (1.00)
• 2. G3 - Intercom subscriber card G3-GET-4B x (2.00)
• 3. G3 - License upgrade G3 GET-4B to G3-GET-4P x (1.00) • 4. Desk Station, Handset 6 Digit alphanumeric Display x (1.00)
• 5. G3 Telephone Interface Card x (1.00)
10 $ 85,269
Commend GE300 9-12 Subscribers with Tel Card
• 1. G3 GE 300 IP-Intercom Server x (1.00)
• 2. G3 - Intercom subscriber card G3-GET-4B x (3.00)
• 3. G3 - License upgrade G3 GET-4B to G3-GET-4P x (1.00) • 4. Desk Station, Handset 6 Digit alphanumeric Display x (1.00)
• 5. G3 Telephone Interface Card x (1.00)
4 $ 39,451

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 830 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

Page 6 of 10 ends

PRICING IS LUMPSUM & INCLUDES APPLICABLE TAXES, LABOR, & FREIGHT

PRODUCT NAME UNIT PRICE QUANTITY TOTAL PRICE
Payment Express BRF210 Contactless Antenna 85 $ 33,406
OPTIONAL ITEMS: SERVER/NETWORK EQUIPMENT

CITY TO PROVIDE SERVERS BASED ON SENTRY SPEC

PRICING IS LUMPSUM & INCLUDES APPLICABLE TAXES, LABOR, & FREIGHT

PRODUCT NAME UNIT PRICE QUANTITY TOTAL PRICE
HP DL380 large scale Server with VM ware 2 $ 25,495

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 831 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

Page 7 of 10 ends

SCOPE OF WORK & RESPONSIBILITIES FOR SUB-CONTRACTORS SENTRY WILL HIRE & MANAGE SUB-CONTRACTOR NAME:

SENTRY CONTROL SYSTEMS

SUB-CONTRACTOR TRADES SCOPE RESPONSIBILITY SUBTOTAL
PROJECT MANAGEMENT $ 120,000
PERFORMANCE BOND $ 11,250
SENTRY CONTROL SYSTEMS’ SCOPE OF WORK & RESPONSIBILITIES

SCOPE DESCRIPTION SCOPE RESPONSIBILITY

1. LABOR TO RE-INSTALL THE NEW EXISTING COLUMNS AND PAY ON FOOT STATIONS SENTRY

2. CUSTOM SCOPE ITEM SENTRY

3. ALL 115 VAC POWER AT SENTRY SPECIFIED LOCATIONS AND CONNECTION OF SAME. SENTRY

4. ALL FINAL WIRING TERMINATIONS OF LOW VOLTAGE COMMUNICATIONS OR CONTROL CABLE ON SENTRY PROVIDED EQUIPMENT.

SENTRY

5. ALL NEW CONDUIT WITH PULL STRING AND JUNCTION BOXES AS SPECIFIED BY SENTRY. SENTRY

6. ALL REQUIRED LOW VOLTAGE COMMUNICATION OR CONTROL CABLE AND INSTALLATION OF SAME. SENTRY

7. THIS PROPOSAL ASSUME THAT THE EXISTING POF STATIONS, ENTRY AND EXIT COLUMNS ARE IN GOOD WORKING ORDER. ANY PARTS OR REPAIRS NEEDED IS NOT INCLUDED IN THIS PROPOSAL.

SENTRY

8. FINAL SYSTEM TESTING AND CHECKOUT. ALL OPERATIONAL TESTING. SENTRY

9. ON-SITE TRAINING OF THE OWNER OR OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE TO PROPERLY OPERATE THE INSTALLED SYSTEM.

SENTRY

10. SENTRY WILL REINSTALL THE EXISTING PAY ON FOOT STATIONS (29 FULL SERVICE AND 6 CREDIT

CARD ONLY) SENTRY ASSUMES THEY ARE IN GOOD WORKING ORDER, ANY REPAIRS NEEDED ARE NOT

INCLUDED IN THE PROPOSAL
SENTRY

11. SENTRY WILL REINSTALL THE EXISTING 460 UNLIMITED CODERS INTO THE NEW HOUSINGS SENTRY

ASSUMES THEY ARE IN GOOD WORKING ORDER, ANY REPAIRS NEEDED ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THE

PROPOSAL
SENTRY

PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK & CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES

SCOPE DESCRIPTION SCOPE RESPONSIBILITY

1. EXISTING CONDUIT IS USABLE. CRUSHED, DAMAGED, OR UNUSABLE CONDUIT WILL RESULT IN A CHANGE ORDER BILLED AT TIME & MATERIALS, OR SUB-CONTRACTOR COST PLUS 20%, WHICHEVER IS LESS.

CUSTOMER

2. INTERNET ACCESS AT SERVER LOCATION CUSTOMER

3. NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS AND ALL SWITCHES BETWEEN THE SERVER AND ALL CAR PARKS CUSTOMER

EXCLUSIONS FROM PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK & RESPONSIBILITIES

SCOPE DESCRIPTION SCOPE RESPONSIBILITY

1. OBTAINING REQUIRED PERMITS. (FEES ASSOCIATED WITH THE PERMITS ARE EXTRA). EXCLUSIONS

2. SENTRY WILL PULL NEW COMMUNICATIONS CABLE THROUGH THE EXISTING CONDUIT. IF THE CONDUIT

PATH IS CRUSHED, DAMAGED OR FULL AND NEW CABLE CANNOT BE PULLED A CHANGE ORDER FOR NEW CONDUIT WILL BE PROVIDED TO THE CITY.

EXCLUSIONS

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 832 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

Page 8 of 10 ends

ON-GOING SERVICES PURCHASE AGREEMENT
This Purchase Agreement shall be governed by the terms and conditions of a certain Terms of Service Agreement by and between Sentry Control Systems LLC, a California corporation with its principal office located at 6611 Odessa Ave. Van Nuys, CA 91406-5746 (“Primary Service Provider”), and ___________________ “End-User” with its office located at __________________________.

Capitalized terms used in this Purchase Order and not otherwise defined shall have the same meaning as set forth in the body of the Terms of Service Agreement.

A. AUTHORIZED FACILITY

1. Authorized Facilities: ___________________, located at _____________________________ (“the end-user”). Other facilities are not authorized users under this Purchase Agreement.

2. The Operator, whom the approval to operate the facility was granted, and is responsible for paying the fees of the Services is ________________________.

3. Facility Manager:

Company:

Email:

Phone:

4. Supported Browser(s): Current releases of (i) Mozilla Firefox (ii) Microsoft® Internet Explorer (iii) Apple® Safari (iv) Google Chrome ® B. SUBSCRIPTION LICENSE TERM AND FEES; RATE STRUCTURE

1. Subscription License Term and Fees.

1.1 The periodic service/license fees shall be payable annually, in advance, based on the Rates below for the payment period applicable to the authorized facility described above. Fees are payable upon receipt of invoice from Sentry Control Systems LLC, except for the initial payment which is due upon the execution of this Purchase Order. Fees are payable periodically until this Purchase Agreement is terminated by Sentry Control Systems LLC in accordance with the Terms of Service Agreement or by Licensee for convenience as provided below.

1.2 All fees are non-refundable.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 833 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

Page 9 of 10 ends

Rate
RECURRING ITEMS: E:VAL(R)

SERVICE START DATE QUANTITY UNIT PRICE ANNUAL TOTAL PRICE E:VAL SUBSCRIPTION ANNUAL
LICENSE TIER 3 11/23/2016 1 $ 10,000 $ 10,000
TOTAL $10,000
RECURRING ITEMS: SKIDATA

SERVICE START DATE QUANTITY UNIT PRICE ANNUAL TOTAL PRICE SW-EPI/LICENSE 11/23/2016 105 $ 300 $ 31,500
TOTAL $31,500
Invoices will be mailed on the 1st of the month prior to the beginning month of coverage.
*Go-Live Date is based on 1st operational day. Billing to start the following month of Go Live Date.

2. Termination for Convenience by Licensee; Guaranteed Payment. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Terms of Service Agreement or this Purchase Agreement, Licensee may terminate this Agreement and Purchase Order at any time for convenience, by providing at least thirty (30) days prior written notice to Sentry Control Systems LLC; provided, however, that except for termination by Licensee for cause, in the event of any termination of this Agreement for any reason prior to the first anniversary of the Effective Date of this Purchase Agreement, none of the annual fee shall be refunded. In subsequent years, Licensee may terminate this Agreement and Purchase Order at any time for any reason, by providing at least thirty (30) days prior written notice to Sentry Control Systems, LLC, and Licensee shall be entitled to a pro rata refund for services paid for but not delivered.

3. Taxes. Fees do not include taxes or duties. If Sentry Control Systems LLC is required to pay or collect any federal, state, local, value added, tax or duty on any fees charged under this Agreement, or any other similar taxes or duties levied by any governmental authority, excluding taxes levied on Sentry Control Systems LLC's net income, then such taxes and/or duties shall be billed to and paid by Licensee immediately upon receipt of Sentry Control Systems’ invoice and supporting documentation for the taxes or duties charged.

4. Late Charges. If Licensee does not make timely payment to Sentry Control Systems LLC of any amount payable hereunder, in addition to the remedies available to Sentry Control Systems LLC at law or equity, Sentry Control Systems LLC may collect interest on the sum then owing at the rate of 1.5% per month from the due date until payment by Licensee; provided, however, that in no event shall the aggregate interest charges exceed the maximum rate of interest which could be charged under applicable law.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 834 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

Page 10 of 10 ends

C. CONSULTING, TRAINING, AND PROFESSIONAL SERVICES
Upon request, Sentry Control Systems LLC shall provide to Licensee consulting and/or training and/or professional services for the Service on a time and materials ("T&M") basis; that is, (i) Licensee shall pay Sentry Control Systems LLC for all the time spent performing such services, plus materials, taxes, and reimbursable expenses; and (ii) the rates for such services shall be Sentry Control Systems LLC's then-current standard rates when such services are provided, the current rates as of the Effective Date being $190. Charges shall be payable thirty (30) days from receipt of invoice.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have caused this On-Going Services Purchase Agreement to be duly executed below.
___________________________ Sentry Control Systems, Inc.

By: ______________________________ By: ____________________________ (Signature) (Signature) Name: _____________________________ Name: _____________________________ Title: _______________________________ Title: ______________________________

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 835 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) Commerci
SENTR
2016

SERVICE
Welcome
Sentry pro
Maximize
contract o
together b
Illustrated
the Exten
are includ
ial in Confidenc
RY SERVIC

PROGRAM
to the SKIDA
ovides a rang
your “up tim
options of Bas
based on mo
d below is a g
ded, the Basi
ded.

BASI
Preventativ
SFTW Main
Anti‐Virus
Refresher
ce Sentry SKID
CE.CARE W

OVERVIEW
TA Service.Ca
ge of choices t
me” and exten
sic, Extended,
re than 15 ye
global overvie
ic service mod
C
ve.Care T
nt.Care
s.Care
r.Care
DATA Group –
WARRAN
are services p
to enable cus
nd the lifecyc
d, Premium an
ears of experie
ew of the serv
dules are incl

EXTENDED
Training.Care
Service.Care

2016
TY AND S
rogram, we a
stomers to se
cle of your inv
nd Premium P
ence support
vice activities
uded, and if y
PR
e Help
Secu
PCI Su
Opera

SUPPORT
are at your se
lect the level
vestment, se
Plus, these se
ting existing c
by agreemen
you elect Prem
EMIUM
Desk.Care
urity.Care
upport.Care
ations.Care
T PROGRA
ervice!
of service th
lect from fou
rvice activitie
customer’s ne
nt type, note
mium, all Bas
PREMIU
Wear Part
Upgrade
Response

P
AMS
at works for y
ur standard
es are groupe
eeds.
that if you el
sic and Extend
UM +
ts.Care
.Care
e.Care

Page 1 ends

you.
d
ect
ded

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 836 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) Commerci
SERVICE P
☒ B
 P
Ke
w
sy
cl
M
(“
co
te
re
d
ti
(“
u
to
 SO
Ke
so
A
su
is
 A
Ke
up
R
ac
u
 R
Ke
so
A
in
p
lis
co
Se
ial in Confidenc
PROGRAM M
BASIC SERV

REVENTATIV
eep your syst
will extend usa
ystem, our ro
leaning, lubric
Monthly, Quar
“Maintenance
orrection and
ests, measure
eplace parts o
uring regular
me, Monday
“Regular Wor
nder this Serv
o manufactur
OFTWARE M
eeping you cu
oftware intra
pplicable bia
upported rele
ssues, offer ap
ANTI‐VIRUS.CA
eeping you pr
pdates are ap
eview anti‐vi
ctive and fun
pdates are ap
EFRESHER.CA
eeping you up
oftware and h
nnual (one‐ti
n Sentry’s ons
reventative m
sting Sentry’s
onfirmation o
entry’s sched
ce Sentry SKID
MODULE DETA
VICE AGREE
E.CARE
tem in tip‐top
able life. Don’
utine mainten
cating, and re
rterly and Ann
e”). Systemat
d prevention o
ements, adjus
of the Equipm
working hou
through Frid
rking Hours”).
vices Agreem
rer’s recomm

AINTENANCE
urrent—We’ll
‐release upda
nnual (semia
eases and as r
pplicable feat
ARE
rotected—We
pplied.
rus server an
ctioning. Man
pplied.

ARE
p to speed—W
hardware refr
me) Software
site Training C
maintenance
s available Re
of attendance
uled offering
DATA Group –
AILS
EMENT MO
p shape— Pre
’t let neglect b
nance include
eplacement o
nual preventa
tic inspection,
of incipient fa
stments, lubr
ment as sched
rs of 8:00 a.m
ay, excluding
. At a minimu
ment will be m
endations.

E.CARE
l come and in
ates and hotfi
nnual) SKIDAT
released by th
ture enhance
e’ll come and
d antivirus ag
nage and regu
We’ll teach yo
resher trainin
e and Hardwa
Center locate
and SKIDATA
fresher Train
e will be prov
gs.
2016
ODULES
ventative me
breakdown yo
es inspection,
of the equipm
ative mainten
, detection,
ailures, includ
ication and la
duled by Sent
m. to 5:00 p.m
g public holida
um, all Equipm
maintained acc
nstall all the la
fixes provided
TA software i
he manufactu
ments or offe
d verify that y
gents to ensu
ularly verify t
ou how to use
ng for the term
are Refresher
d at a Sentry
reporting. A
ings offered o
ided by Custo
asures
our
ment.
nance
ding
abor to
ry
m. local
ays
ment
cording
atest and gre
d by the manu
intra‐release
urer) which a
er improved f
our anti‐virus
re signatures
that anti‐virus
e the new pro
m of your con
r training for C
facility. Topi
A predetermin
on a quarterly
omer four (4)
atest bi‐annu
ufacturer.
updates and
ddress report
functionality
s is active, run
s are up to da
s is active, run
ograms with o
ntract.

Customer for
ics include PA
ned schedule
y basis. Adva
to six (6) wee
P
ual SKIDATA
hotfixes (for
ted technical
may be provi
nning, and lat
te and agent
nning and lat
our annual
r term of cont
ARCS equipme
will be provid
nced notifica
eks prior to

Page 2 ends

ded.
test
s are
est
tract,
ent,
ded
tion /

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 837 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) Commerci
☒ EX
BASIC MO
 SE
G
re
La
w
 TR
Pr
eq
yo
U
Tr
m
C
at
fif
ial in Confidenc
XTENDED S
ODULES PLUS
ERVICE.CARE
Guaranteed se
egular hours.
abor to respo
wear and tear)
RAINING.CAR
roviding just
quipment to r
our exact syst
nlimited cust
raining Cente
maintenance a
ustomer four
ttendees per
fteen (15) bu
ce Sentry SKID
SERVICE AG
S THE FOLLOW
E
ervice—We’ll
ond to unsche
) performed i
RE
what you nee
reporting (SK
tem.
tomized train
er located at T
and SKIDATA
r (4) to six (6)
scheduled tr
siness days p
DATA Group –

GREEMENT
WING:
provide reme
eduled service
in response to
ed to know—S
KIDATA), unlim
ing for Custo
Training Site.
reporting. Re
weeks prior t
aining is requ
prior to the da
2016
T MODULE
edial mainten
e calls for rem
o Customer’s
Select the cou
mited for the t
mer for the t
Topics includ
equests to sch
to requested
uired. Training
ate and will b
ES
nance for all u
medial mainte
request duri
urse you need
term of your c
erm of the ag
de PARCS equ
hedule trainin
training date
g agenda will
e mutually ag
unscheduled s
enance (as a r
ng Regular W
d at any time,
contract. Full
greement, in
uipment, prev
ng will be pro
e. Minimum o
be establishe
greed upon b
P
service calls d
result of norm
Working Hours
, from PARCS
ly customizab
Sentry’s onsi
ventative
vided by
of four (4)
ed no less tha
by the parties.

Page 3 ends

during
mal
s.

S
ble to
te
an
.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 838 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) Commerci
☐ PR

EXTENDE
 PC
Pl
as
da
ch
ar
sk
Sc
da
pa
m
in
o
fo
 O
M
to
lo
re
as
A
pa
se
re
 SE
A
In
 H
N
on
ex
O
se
ial in Confidenc
REMIUM S
D MODULES
CI SUPPORT.
lay your cards
ssist you with
ata encryptio
hanges. Then
re working an
kimmers exist
cheduling and
ata key encry
assword chan
minimum com
nspection to e
rder, no cred
or signs of tam
OPERATIONS.C
Making it easy
o rate change
ockout, article
eporting and
ssist you with
ssist with rat
assword lock
etup, softwar
eporting.

ECURITY.CAR
n extra meas
nstall and ma
ELPDESK.CAR
Need help, com
nline in real t
xperiencing.

Online, real‐tim
essions to ass
ce Sentry SKID
SERVICE AG
PLUS THE FO
CARE
s right—We’l
h the annual c
on changes an
we’ll check t
nd that no cre
t.
d assisting wi
yption change
nges. All pass
mplexity requi
ensure all lock
it card skimm
mpering of eq
CARE
y to operate—
es, validation
e and user gro
software cha
h every step.
e changes, va
out, article an
re setup chan
RE
sure of securit
nage quarter
RE
me to us—Wh
time during re
me access to
sist with comm
DATA Group –

GREEMEN
OLLOWING:
ll schedule an
credit card ke
nd OS passwo
to see if all loc
edit card
th credit card
es and OS
words will m
rements. Visu
ks are in work
mers exist, and
quipment.
—When it com
setup, passw
oup setup,
anges—we’ll
alidation setu
nd user group
ges and ad ho
ty—We’ll inst
ly OS updates
hen you can’t
egular busine
remote Servi
mon technica
2016
T MODULE
nd
ey
ord
cks
d
eet
ual
king
d
mes
word
p,
p
oc
tall and mana
s, firmware u
t figure somet
ss hours to re
ce Engineers
al issues.

ES
age your quar
pdates and s
thing out, cha
emotely troub
who are able
rterly Window
ecurity patch
at with our Se
bleshoot any i
e to launch re
P
ws OS updates
hes.
ervice Help De
issues you ma
emote service

Page 4 ends

s.
esk
ay be
e

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 839 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) Commerci
☐ PRE

PREMIUM
 W
W
U
Th
re
 U
O
ar
SK
m
W
ti
 R
Ex
Th
P
ial in Confidenc
EMIUM + M
M MODULES
WEAR PARTS.C
We’ll pick‐up t
UPS batteries,
hermal print
eplacement a
UPGRADE.CAR
On the upgrad
re operating
KIDATA softw
month interva
Windows licen
me and mate
ESPONSE.CA
xpedited resp
here are four
riority‐4 (the
ce Sentry SKID

MODULES AG
S PLUS THE
CARE
the parts—No
and locking a
heads, shear
as a result of n
RE
de—From upg
the most rece
ware upgrade
ls during the
nsing associat
erials basis.

RE
ponse to a ser
r priority leve
lowest priori
DATA Group –

GREEMENT

FOLLOWING
o charge for p
assemblies in
bolts, UPS ba
normal wear
grades to upd
ent versions a
licenses are i
term of the S
ted with Softw
rvice call plac
ls for service
ity). Each prio
2016
T —CUSTOM
G:
parts or instal
need of repa
atteries and lo
and tear.
dates for SKIDA
available, kee
included and
Services Agre
ware upgrade
ed by an auth
requests ran
ority level wil
MIZED PER CU
llation of ther
air or replacem
ocking assem
ATA software
eping you up t
provided at s
ement. Labor
es is not inclu
horized repres
ging from Pri
ll have a requ
USTOMER R
rmal print hea
ment.
mblies in need
e, we’ll make
to date.
sixteen (16) t
r and any req
ded and will
sentative.
ority‐1 (the h
uired respons
P

REQUIREMEN
ads, shear bo
d of repair or
sure your sys
o eighteen (1
uired hardwa
be quoted on
highest priorit
e time.

Page 5 ends

NTS
lts,
stems
18)
are or
n a
ty) to

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 840 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) Commerci
☒ A
Se
co
Fo
ye
co
ei
N
☒ A
Fo
su
 EX
Tw
 EX
8  EX
Tw
ial in Confidenc
DD EXTEN
entry offers P
omponent rep
ollowing the
ear two (Y2) t
omponents, s
ither by manu
NOT REQUIRE
DD ADDIT
or certain cus
upport is not
XTENDED.CO
wenty‐four (2
XTENDED.CO
:00 a.m. to 5:

XTENDED.CO
wenty-four (2
ce Sentry SKID
DED WAR
PARTS.CARE w
placement.

Manufacture
through year
software and
ufacturer def
D DURING ST
IONAL COV
stomers, 24/7
essential. Se
OVERAGE ONE
24) hours per
OVERAGE TWO
:00 p.m. on Sa
OVERAGE THR
24) hours per
DATA Group –
RANTY
when paired w
r Warranty P
five (Y5) (“Ex
hardware fo
fect or norma
TANDARD WA
VERAGE
7 availability o
ntry offers th
E when paired
r day basis Mo
O when paire
aturday throu
REE when pair
r day basis thr
2016
with Extended
eriod, Sentry
xtended Warr
r covered com
al wear and te
ARRANTY PE
of support is c
hree options:
d with an Ext
onday throug
ed with an Ext
ugh Sunday.
red with an E
roughout the
d Service.Care
y will supply a
ranty Period”
mponents are
ear (“Extende
RIOD.
critical, for ot
ended Service
gh Friday, exc
tended Servic
Extended Serv
year includin
e for full cove
n Extended W
). All PARCS e
e warrantied
ed Warranty”)
thers, the pre
e Agreement
luding public
ce Agreement
vice Agreemen
ng holidays.

P
erage of
Warranty cov
equipment
against failur
).
mium of stan
holidays.
t
nt

Page 6 ends

ering
re
ndby

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 841 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) Commerci
ANNUA
The below
Extended
Additiona

YE
1 1
1 For full te
We look f
ability to
will delive
ial in Confidenc
AL SERVICE
w agreement
d Warranty
al Coverage
EAR
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
erms and con
forward to for
have a predi
er the extens
ce Sentry SKID
E FEE BREA
options are c
☒
1☐ 2☐
BASIC
Pricing upo
request
ditions, pleas
rmalizing you
ctable range
sive operation
DATA Group –
AKDOWN
calculated wi
☐ 3☒
EX
on
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
se request th
ur service agr
of expenditu
nal life you se
2016
th:

XTENDED
247,190
457,302
469,662
482,021
494,381
506,740
519,100
531,459
543,819
556,178
e contract th
reement, allo
ure for budge
eek from you
PREM
Pricing
requ
hat interests y
owing you the
ting for the m
r SKIDATA sys
MIUM
g upon
uest
you.
e uptime you
many required
stem.

PREMIUM
Pricing upo
request

seek and the
d activities th

Page 7 ends

+
on
e
hat

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 842 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) Picture may vary from actual product
The universal multi-talent among parking
columns offers comprehensive possibilities for
the ticketing sector with the most modern and
diverse ticket technology. Expand your business
models; become part of urban solutions. Power.

Gate will support you at its best!
Marketing Terminal with Ticketing
• Comprehensive Advertising Opportunities
Get your equipment financed.
• Professional Image
A back-glowing, bright and high-resolution
display effectively draws attention to
logos, images and promo videos.

Save Money and Protect the
Environment
• Minimize Your Power Usage
Situational energy saving modes and no heating above
–20 °C (–4 °F) stand for a high energy effeiciency.
• Recyclable Materials
Ressource-efficient due to a high degree of reusability.

Optimize Your Investment
• Suitable for Every Budget
A customized solution for every application.
• Protect Your Investment
Future-proof due to flexible options for
expansions and installations.
• Save Money on Your Expenditures
Smooth investment expansion and renewals thanks to
the random miscibility of SKIDATA parking columns.

Efficiency Increase with Quality
• Optimized Service Planning
Great capacities and intelligent systems
reduce your service efforts.
• Elaborated Technology
Touch-free RFID and barcode technology guarantee
the highest level of reliability and low follow-up costs.

Your Business Card
• High-Quality Design
High-class materials and glowing features
blend elegantly into all types of architecture.
• Professional Image
Bi-directional video communicatin provides your
company with a face.
• Make a Lasting Impression
Expert-optimized operational guidance for look
and sound provide positive user experiences.

Power.Gate

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 843 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 456
347
1345
340
354
122
363
844
556
125°
354 143° 1577
90°
456
677
48 1000
©2015 SKIDATA AG. All rights reserved.

The content provided herein is subject to change and possible editorial errors. Country-specific versions may vary. SKIDATA® is a registered trademark of SKIDATA AG in the USA, the European Union and other countries. Terms and conditions of the authorized SKIDATA distributor apply. The operator is fully responsible for compliance with any legal provisions applicable to the operation of the products. • Large ticket collecting box (holds approx. 3000 tickets) • Print@Home scanner with special optical array for paper tickets and Smartphones; supports various formats
• Receipt printer for entire credit card solution
• Barcode ticket insert reader for ‘classic’ ticketing Communication
• Analog intercom
• Integrated digital intercom (Ethernet or 2-Wire)
• Bi-directional (i. e., duplex) video communication
(solution includes camera hardware)
Display
• Bright high-resolution graphics display ensures good readability under any light conditions; supports clear, vivid display of commercials and videos (with automatic brightness adjustment);
800 × 480 pixels
• Outdoor capable touch screen for additional Parking Column control functions (can be operated while wearing protective gloves) • Sophisticated display modes support various applications and design options
• Illuminated control elements
• Visual and acoustic feedback provides additional user support Accessories
• Locking system with mechanical or electronic locks, supports configurable access permissions
• Various contact and interface extensions to suit a wide range of requirements
• Heating and cooling for extreme ambient temperatures • Infofield in the front
• AFILS Acoustic support for clear intelligibility
• Advertising panel
• Lane signal
Features
Design/Construction
• Unique design based on aluminum and high-grade synthetics, complemented by optional, stylish light elements
• Modular, easy to maintain construction
• Flexible extension options ensure maximum investment protection
• Weather-proof, thanks to use of durable high-grade materials, such as aluminum
• Ethernet interface for efficient system integration
• Large installation space for add-on modules
(e.g., PIN pad, credit card reader, etc.)
Operation
• Intuitive user interaction helps to ensure very high processing rates
Green Efficiency
• Optimised for low power consumption; without Coder no heating required down to −20 °C (−4 °F)
• Materials provide high degree of re-usability
Options
Design/Construction
• LED light bar serves as a stylish, illuminated eye-catcher • Housing available in custom colors
Ticket Processing
• Coder Unlimited ensures flexible ticket processing
• Coder Basic enables cross-wise bar code ticket processing and punch-hole validation
• RFID module for reading and encoding 13 MHz keycards • Double ticket intake (up to 2×7000 tickets, depending on ticket material and coder type) with automatic data carrier management
Te c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Dimensions 354 mm × 1345 mm × 456 mm (B × H × T) without options Weight approx. 30 kg
Operating voltage 100-240 V ±10 % / 50-60 Hz
Coding units Coder Unlimited or Coder Basic
Operating temperature with Coder 0 °C (32 °F) to + 50 °C (122 °F) in shade; + 40 °C (104 °F) under sun exposure Operating temperature without Coder –20 °C (–4 °F) to + 50 °C (122 °F) in shade; + 40 °C (104 °F) under sun exposure Operating temperature with additional cooling up to + 50 °C (122 °F) under sun exposure Operating temperature with additional heater down to –30 °C (–22 °F) Operating temperature with additional heater big down to –40 °C (–40 °F) Max. ambient humidity 90 % (non-condensing)
Support stand color Brushed, anodized aluminum
Cover color RAL 7037 Dusty Grey (varnished plastic)
Panel color RAL 7021 Black Grey (varnished plastic)
Declarations / Certifications CE, FCC, IC, CNRTLUS
Degree of protection based on IEC 60529 IP43
Systemrequirements Parking.Logic V07 or higher
SKIDATA AG • Untersbergstraße 40 • A-5083 Grödig/Salzburg [t] +43 6246 888-0 • [f] +43 6246 888-7 • [e] [email protected] [w] www.skidata.com • Version 1.6a • 28.01.2016 all dimensions in mm all dimensions without options

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 844 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) AXIS P1204 Network Camera
Miniature HDTV pinhole camera for discreet surveillance AXIS P1204 is a tiny pinhole HDTV 720p camera for exceptionally discreet indoor surveillance. It is ideal for capturing subjects at close range, and can be installed on or flush-mounted in walls or ceilings, or in limited spaces.

AXIS P1204 comprises two parts: a sensor unit with an 8 m (26 ft.) cable, and a main unit. The cable enables the sensor unit to be installed discreetly in tight places, and the main unit to be placed elsewhere. AXIS P1204 offers powerful event management capabilities with intelligent video features such as tampering alarm, motion detection and support for third-party applications.
> Functional and extremely discreet design
> Easy and flexible installation
> HDTV 720p
> Edge storage
> Multiple H.264 streams
Datasheet

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 845 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) AXIS P1204 Network Camera
Camera
Image sensor Progressive scan RGB CMOS 1/4”
Lens Fixed iris, Fixed focus

3.7 mm, F2.5
Horizontal angle of view: 57°
Light sensitivity 1.2-10000 lux
Shutter time 1/24500 s to 1/6 s
Video
Video
compression
H.264 (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC), Motion JPEG
Resolutions 1280x720 to 320x180
Frame rate Up to 25/30 fps (50/60 Hz) in all resolutions Video streaming Multiple, individually configurable streams in H.264 and Motion JPEG
Controllable frame rate and bandwidth, VBR/CBR H.264
Image settings Compression, Color, Brightness, Sharpness, Contrast, White balance, Exposure control, Exposure zones, Backlight
compensation, Fine tuning of behavior at low light, Rotation, Text and image overlay, Mirroring of images, Privacy mask, Axis’ Corridor Format
Network
Security Password protection, IP address filtering, HTTPSaencryption, IEEE 802.1Xanetwork access control, Digest authentication, User access log, Centralized Certificate Management
Supported
protocols
IPv4/v6, HTTP, HTTPSa, SSL/TLSa, QoS Layer 3 DiffServ, FTP, CIFS/SMB, SMTP, Bonjour, UPnPTM, SNMP v1/v2c/v3 (MIB-II), DNS, DynDNS, NTP, RTSP, RTP, SFTP, TCP, UDP, IGMP, RTCP, ICMP,

DHCP, ARP, SOCKS, SSH
System integration
Application
Programming
Interface
Open API for software integration, including VAPIX®
and AXIS Camera Application Platform; specifications at www.axis.com
AXIS Video Hosting System (AVHS) with One-Click Connection.

ONVIF Profile S; specification at www.onvif.org
Analytics Video motion detection, Active tampering alarm Support for AXIS Camera Application Platform enabling
installation of AXIS Video Motion Detection 3, AXIS Cross Line Detection, AXIS Digital Autotracking and third-party applications, see www.axis.com/acap
Event triggers Analytics, External inputs, Video loss
Event actions File upload: FTP, SFTP, HTTP, HTTPS, network share and email Notification: email, HTTP, HTTPS and TCP
External output activation
Video recording to edge storage
Pre- and post-alarm video buffering
Built-in
installation aids
Pixel counter
Data streaming Event data
General
Casing Main unit: Polycarbonate casing
Sensor unit: Metal casing (aluminum)
Memory 256 MB RAM, 128 MB Flash
Power Power over Ethernet IEEE 802.3af/802.3at Type 1 Class 2 (max

6.49 W)
8-28 V DC max 4.7 W
Connectors RJ45 for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX PoE
RJ12 for the sensor unit
Terminal blocks for power, 1 alarm input and 1 output
Edge storage Support for microSD/microSDHC/microSDXC card Support for recording to dedicated network-attached storage (NAS)
For SD card and NAS recommendations see www.axis.com
Operating
conditions
-20 °C to 50 °C (-4 °F to 122 °F)
Main unit: Humidity 10-85% RH (non-condensing)
Sensor unit: Humidity 10-85% RH (non-condensing)
Storage
conditions
-40 °C to 65 °C (-40 °F to 149 °F)
Approvals EN 55022 Class B, EN 55024, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3, EN 61000-6-1, FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class B, ICES-003 Class B, VCCI Class B, C-tick AS/NZS CISPR 22 Class B,
KCC KN22 Class B, KN24, IEC/EN/UL 60950-1,
IEC 60068-2-1, IEC 60068-2-2, IEC 60068-2-6 Class 4M4,
IEC 60068-2-27 Class 4M3, 60068-2-78 Class 3K3
Dimensions 27 x 21.5 mm (1 1/16 x 7/8 in)
Weight Main unit: 109 g (0.24 lb)
Sensor unit: 222 g (0.49 lb)
Included
accessories
Mounting kit, Installation Guide, Windows decoder 1-user license, AVHS Authentication key
Optional
accessories
AXIS T8120 Midspan 15 W 1-port, AXIS P7701 Video Decoder, AXIS P8221 Network I/O Audio Module
Video
management
software
AXIS Camera Companion, AXIS Camera Station, Video
management software from Axis’ Application Development
Partners available on www.axis.com/techsup/software
Languages German, French, Spanish, Italian, Russian, Simplified Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese
Warranty Axis 3-year warranty and AXIS Extended Warranty option, see www.axis.com/warranty
a. This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/), and cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]).

More information is available at www.axis.com
www.axis.com
©2014 - 2015 Axis Communications AB. AXIS COMMUNICATIONS, AXIS, ETRAX, ARTPEC and VAPIX are registered trademarks or trademark applications of Axis AB in various jurisdictions. All other company names and products are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. We reserve the right to introduce modifications without notice. 1496752/EN/M1.4/0820

4.C.h
15 Packet Pg. 846 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) Back-UPS
™
350/500
User Manual
EN 990-9230A 06/2013
Inventory
1 Connect the Battery
3 Check the Building
Wiring Fault Indicator
4 Connect Equipment
6 Switch On the
Back-UPS
In compliance with Department of Transportation (DOT) regulations, the Back-UPS is shipped with theinternal red battery wire disconnected. The Back-UPS will not operate until the internal red wire isconnected to the battery. Once connected, allow the Back-UPS to charge for a full eight hours priorto use.Note: Small sparks may occur during battery connection. This is normal. a. Open the battery compartment, as shown.b. Pull the battery about half way out, as shown.
c. Connect the red battery wire to the positive
battery terminal.
d. Push the battery into the battery compartment
and re-install the cover, as shown.
• This UPS is intended for indoor use only. • Do not operate this UPS in direct sunlight, in contact with fluids, or where there is excessive dust or humidity. • Be sure the air vents on the UPS are not blocked.

Allow adequate space for proper ventilation.
• The battery typically lasts for two to three years.

Environmental factors impact battery life. Elevated ambient temperatures, poor quality AC power, and frequent short duration discharges will shorten battery life. • Connect the UPS power cable directly to a wall
outlet. Do not use surge protectors or extension cords.

Plug the Back-UPS into a wall outlet, as shown.

If the red Building Wiring Fault indicator on therear panel of the Back-UPS is lit, one of thefollowing conditions exists: • Open or high resistance ground • Hot or neutral polarity reversed • Overloaded neutral circuitA lit indicator means that a potential shockhazard exists. Improper building wiring shouldbe corrected by a qualified electrician. Do notuse the Back-UPS until the condition thatcaused the fault is corrected.Note: Improper building wiring will not prevent the Back-UPS from operating, but it will limit itsprotection capability. It may also result inequipment damage that is not covered by the APCby Schneider Electric Equipment ProtectionPolicy.

The rear panel of the Back-UPS consists of thefollowing elements:Battery Back Up Outlets (qty. of 3). Theseoutlets provide battery back-up, surge protection,and Electro-magnetic Interference (EMI)filtering. In case of power outage, battery poweris automatically provided to these outlets. Power(AC or battery) is not supplied to these outletswhen the Back-UPS is switched Off. Connect acomputer, monitor, and external disk or CDROM drive to these outlets.

External
Drive
Computer
Monitor
Scanner
Printer
Fax
Note: Allow the Back-UPS to charge for a full eighthours prior to use.Press the push-button on the front panel of theBack-UPS.Observe that the following events occur after pressing and releasing the push-button: • The green On-Line indicator flashes. • The yellow On Battery indicator lights while the Self-Test is being performed.
• When Self-Test has successfully completed,
only the green On Line indicator will be lit.
• If the internal battery is not connected, (see
Step 1 above) the green On Line indicator and
red Replace Battery indicator will light. TheBack-UPS will also emit a chirping sound.

On Line
On Battery
Overload
Replace Battery
7 There are four status indicators (lights) on the frontpanel of the Back-UPS (On Line, On Battery,Overload, and Replace Battery).On Line (green) - is lit whenever AC power is powering the Battery Backup outlets.

On Line
On Battery
Overload
Replace Battery
Overload (red) - is lit whenever power
demand has exceeded the capacity of the BackUPS.

Continuous Tone - this alarm issounded whenever the BatteryBackup outlets are overloaded.

Circuit Breaker - the circuitbreaker button located on the rearpanel of the Back-UPS will stickout if an overload condition forcesthe Back-UPS to disconnect itselffrom AC power. If the buttonsticks out, disconnect nonessential equipment. Reset thecircuit breaker by pushing thebutton inward. 5 Connect the Phone
Line to Surge Protection
The telephone ports provide lightning surge protection for any device connected to the telephoneline (computer, modem, fax or telephone). Thetelephone ports are compatible with Home Phoneline Networking Alliance (HPNA) and DigitalSubscriber Line (DSL) standards, as well as allmodem data rates. Connect as shown.

Wall Outlet
Modem/Phone/Fax
Replace Battery (red) - is lit whenever thebattery is near the end of its useful life, or ifthe battery is not connected (see above). Abattery that is near the end of its useful life hasinsufficient run-time and should be replaced.

Chirps for 1 Minute Every 5Hours - this alarm is soundedwhenever the battery has failed theautomatic diagnostic test.

TO COMPUTER

USB PORT
RJ-45 to USB
CABLE
Connect USB Cableand Install Software(optional)
NOTE: Macintosh Users - for full USB performance, use OS 10.1.5 or higher.If Autoplay is not enabled on the computer, proceedas follows:1. On the computer desktop of the display, doubleclick on My Computer.2. Double-click on the CD-ROM drive icon and follow the on-screen instructions.

Follow the
on-screen
instructions.

Status Indicators and Alarms
In situations where the Back-UPS or connected equipment appears too sensitive to input voltage, it may be necessary to adjust the transfer voltage. This is a simple task requiring use of the front panel push button. Toadjust the transfer voltage, proceed as follows:

1.Plug the Back-UPS into the AC power source. The Back-UPS will be in a Standby Mode (no indicators lit).

2.Press the front panel push button fully inward for 10 seconds. All indicators on the Back-UPS will flash to acknowledge going into Programming Mode.

3.The Back-UPS will then indicate its current Sensitivity Setting, as shown in the following table.

4.To select the Low Sensitivity setting, press the push button until the yellow indicator is flashing.

5.To select the Medium Sensitivity setting, press the push button until the yellow and red indicators (second and third from the top) are flashing.

6.To select the High Sensitivity setting, press the push button until yellow and both red indicators (bottom three) are flashing.

7.To exit without changing the Sensitivity Setting, press the push button until the green indicator is flashing.

8.Once in Programming Mode, if the push button is not pressed within 5 seconds, the Back-UPS will exit Programming Mode; all indicators will extinguish.

Indicators
Flashing
Sensitivity
Setting
Input Voltage
Range
(for AC
operation)
Use When
1 (yellow)
Low 88 - 142 Vac Input voltage is extremely low or high.

Not recommended for computer loads.
2 (yellow, and
red)
Medium
(factory default)
92 - 139 Vac Back-UPS frequently goes On Battery.
3 (yellow, red,
and red)
High 96 - 136 Vac Connected equipment is sensitive to
voltage fluctuations (recommended).

On Battery (yellow) - is lit whenever the battery of the Back-UPS is powering equipment connected to the Battery Backup Outlets.

Four Beeps Every 30 Seconds - thisalarm is sounded whenever the BackUPS is running On Battery. Considersaving work in progress.

Continuous Beeping - this alarm issounded whenever a low battery condition is reached. Battery run-time isvery low. Promptly save any work inprogress and exit all open applications. Shutdown the operating system, computer and the Back-UPS.

Transfer Voltage and Sensitivity Adjustment (optional)
Surge Only Outlets (qty. of 3). These outlets arealways On (when AC power is available) and are not controlled by the On/Off switch. These outlets
do not provide power during a power outage. Connect a printer, fax machine or scanner to these outletsBlack Velcro Straps (qty. of 2 - not shown). Forconvenience, two velcro traps have been includedand can be used to manage power cords. to the Back-UPS
2 Placement / Power
Installation
Inspect the package contents upon receipt. Notify the carrier and dealer if there is any damage.

Read the Safety Guide supplied with this unit before installing the UPS. bu001c
© 2013 APC by Schneider Electric. APC, the APC logo, Back-UPS, and PowerChute are owned by Schneider Electric Industries S.A.S., or their affiliated companies. All other trademarks are property of their respective owners.

Safety and General
Information
User Documentation

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 847
Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) Troubleshooting Back-UPS Storage
Use the tables below to solve minor Back-UPS installation and operation problems. Consult or callSchneider Electric IT (SEIT) Technical Support for assistance with problems that cannot be resolved usingthis document:

Possible Cause Procedure
Back-UPS will not switch on
Back-UPS not connected to an ACpower source.

Check that the Back-UPS power plug issecurely connected to the wall outlet.

Back-UPS does not power computer/monitor/external drive during an outage Internal battery is not connected. Check the battery connections. (See “Connect the Battery” under “Installation” on the front page of this document.

Back-UPS operates on battery although normal AC voltage exists Back-UPS circuit breaker“tripped”.

Disconnect non-essential equipment from theBack-UPS. Reset the circuit breaker (locatedon the rear panel of the Back-UPS) by pushing the circuit breaker button fully inwarduntil it catches.

Back-UPS does not provide expected backup time
Back-UPS is excessively loaded. Unplug non-essential Battery Backup connected equipment, such as printers and plug them into Surge Only outlets.Note: Devices that have motors or dimmer switches (laser printers,heaters, fans, lamps, and vacuum cleaners, for example) should not beconnected to the Battery Backup outlets.

A red indicator is lit
Battery is not connected properly. Check the battery connections. Consult “Connect the Battery” under “Installation” on the front page of this document. It shows how toaccess the battery and connect the wires.

Connect the Back-UPS to another wall outlet or have a qualifiedelectrician check the building wiring.

Red indicators are flashing
Back-UPS failure. Call SEIT Technical Support for service.

Specifications
Before storing, charge the Back-UPS for at least eight hours. Store the Back-UPS covered and upright ina cool, dry location. During storage, recharge the battery in accordance with the following table:

Please contact SEIT Technical Support to troubleshoot the unit before returning it to APC by SchneiderElectric.

Storage Temperature Recharge Frequency Charging Duration 23o to 86oF (-5o to 30oC)
86o to 113oF (30o to 45oC)
Every 6 monthsEvery 3 months
8 hours8 hours
Order Replacement Battery
The typical battery lifetime is 3-6 years (depending on the number of discharge cycles and operatingtemperature). A replacement battery can be ordered over the phone from APC by Schneider Electric, orthe battery can be ordered on-line from the APC by Schneider Electric web site (go tohttp:\\www.apc.com, a valid credit card is required).When ordering, please specify Battery Cartridge RBC2.

Battery Replacement
Battery replacement is a safe procedure. The Back-UPS can be left on with the equipment connectedduring this procedure. Do not replace the battery when the Back-UPS is On Battery. Refer to the SafetyGuide for additional information.Please consult the "Connect Battery" diagrams (a through d) on the front page of this document whenperforming the following procedures:1. While viewing the Back-UPS from the front, lay the Back-UPS on its left side (diagram a).2. Slide the battery compartment cover off of the Back-UPS (diagram a).3. Grasp the tab attached to the battery and slide the battery partially out of the case. Grab the battery firmly and pull it straight out. The battery wires will disconnect as the battery is pulled out (diagram b).

4. Carefully unpack the new battery. Retain the packing carton so that the old battery can be recycled.5. Insert the new battery halfway into the Back-UPS (diagram d).6. Connect the wires to the new battery as follows:7. Red Wire - to red (positive) terminal8. Black Wire - to black (negative) terminal9. Note: Small sparks at the battery terminals are normal during connection.10.Carefully insert the battery fully into the Back-UPS.11.Slide the battery compartment cover back into place.12.The Replace Battery indicator will shut off within the 14-day self-test interval, or when the BackUPS is switched On.

The old battery must be recycled. Deliver the battery to an appropriate recycling facility or return it toAPC by Schneider Electric in the packing carton that came with the new battery. Additional recyclinginformation is provided with the new battery.

Replace Battery indicator lit and an alarm sounds when the Back-UPS is turned on Internal battery not connected. Check the battery connections. Consult “Connect the Battery” under “Installation” on the front page of this document. It shows how toaccess the battery and connect the wires. © 2013 APC by Schneider Electric. APC, the APC logo, Back-UPS, and PowerChute are owned by Schneider Electric Industries S.A.S., or their affiliated companies. All other trademarksare property of their respective owners.

Service
If the unit requires service, do not return it to the dealer. Follow these steps:

1. Review the Troubleshooting section of the manual to eliminate common problems.

2. If the problem persists, contact Schneider Electric IT (SEIT) Customer Support through the APC by Schneider Electric Web site, www.apc.com.
a. Note the model number and serial number and the date of purchase. The model and serial numbers are located on the rear panel of the unit and are available through the LCD display on select models. b. Call SEIT Customer Support and a technician will attempt to solve the problem over the phone. If this is not possible, the technician will issue a Returned Material Authorization Number (RMA#). c. If the unit is under warranty, the repairs are free. d. Service procedures and returns may vary internationally. Refer to the APC by Schneider Electric Web site for country specific instructions.

3. Pack the unit in the original packaging whenever possible to avoid damage in transit. Never use foam beads for packaging. Damage sustained in transit is not covered under warranty.

4. Always DISCONNECT THE UPS BATTERIES before shipping. The United States Department of Transportation (DOT), and the International Air Transport Association (IATA) regulations require that UPS batteries be disconnected before shipping. The internal batteries may remain in the UPS.

5. Write the RMA# provided by Customer Support on the outside of the package.6. Return the unit by insured, pre-paid carrier to the address provided by Customer Support.

Warranty
The standard warranty is two (2) years from the date of purchase. Schneider Electric IT (SEIT) standardprocedure is to replace the original unit with a factory reconditioned unit. Customers who must have theoriginal unit back due to the assignment of asset tags and set depreciation schedules must declare such aneed at first contact with an SEIT Technical Support representative. SEIT will ship the replacement unitonce the defective unit has been received by the repair department, or cross ship upon the receipt of avalid credit card number. The customer pays for shipping the unit to SEIT. SEIT pays ground freighttransportation costs to ship the replacement unit to the customer.

APC by Schneider Electric IT Customer Support
For country specific customer support, go to the APC by Schneider Electric Web site, www.apc.com.

Select models are ENERGY STAR® qualified.

For more information go towww.apc.com/site/recycle/index.cfm/energy-efficiency/energy-star/.

This UPS is certified to comply with California Battery Charger System regulations. For more information go towww.apc.com/site/recycle/index.cfm/energy-efficiency/cec-battery-charger/.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant topart 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energyand, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radiocommunications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determinedby turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or moreof the following measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Locate the label on the bottom of this device that contains, among other information, the FCC registrationnumber [US: 1XH-USA-25572-XP-N]] and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this device. If requested,this information must be provided to the telephone company.If you experience trouble with this equipment, you disconnect it from the network until the problem has been corrected or until you are sure that the equipment is not malfunctioning. The ringer equivalence number (REN) is used to determine how many devices can be connected to your telephone line. In most areas,the sum of the RENs of all devices on any one line should not exceed five (5.0). If too many devices areattached, they may not ring properly.

Input Voltage (on line)
Worldwide
EMI Compliance
Check the wall outlet that supplies power tothe Back-UPS using a table lamp. If the lampbulb is very dim, have the AC voltagechecked by a qualified electrician.Disconnect non-essential equipment from theBack-UPS. Reset the circuit breaker (locatedon the rear panel of the Back-UPS) by pushing the circuit breaker button fully inwarduntil it catches. If the circuit breaker resets,switch the Back-UPS on and reconnect theequipment one-at-a-time. If the circuitbreaker trips again, it is likely that one of theconnected devices is causing the overload.

Back-UPS circuit breaker “tripped”.Very low or no AC voltage.

Move computer, monitor, or external drive power cord plug to theBattery Backup outlets.

The wall outlet that the Back-UPS isconnected to does not supply ACpower to the unit.Computer, monitor or external disk/CD-ROM drive is plugged into aSurge Only outlet.The Overload indicator is lit ifequipment connected to the BatteryBackup outlets is drawing morepower than the Back-UPS can provide.Battery requires replacement. The battery should be replaced within two weeks (see “Order Replacement Battery”). Failure to replace the battery will result inreduced run-time during a power outage. Move one or more equipment power plugs to the Surge Only outlets.

Battery requires replacement.Back-UPS battery is weak due torecent outage and has not had timeto recharge.

Charge the battery. The battery charges whenever the Back-UPS isconnected to a wall outlet. Typically, eight hours of charging time areneeded to fully charge the battery from total discharge. Back-UPSrun-time is reduced until the battery is fully charged.Replace battery (see Order Replacement Battery). Batteries typicallylast 3-6 years, shorter if subjected to frequent power outages or elevated temperatures.

Frequency Limits (on line)On Battery WaveshapeMaximum LoadEMI ClassificationShipping WeightWeightOperating TemperatureStorage TemperatureSize (H x W x D)Typical Recharge TimeOperating and StorageRelative HumidityOn Battery Run-Time 92 - 139 Vac
47 - 63 Hz (autosensing)
Stepped Sine Wave
350 VA - 210 W 500 VA - 300 W
8 Hours
32o to 104oF (0o to 40oC)
15o to 113oF (-15o to 45oC)
5 to 95% non-condensing

6.5 x 3.6 x 11.2 inches (16.5 x 9.2 x 28.5 cm)
350 VA - 12.9 lb (5.9 kg) 500 VA - 13.8 lb (6.3 kg)350 VA - 14.0 lb (6.4 kg) 500 VA - 14.9 lb (6.8 kg) FCC/DOC Class B Certified
350 VA - 13.8 Minutes typical - desktop computer and 17 inch (43.2 cm) monitor.
500 VA - 10.7 Minutes typical - desktop computer and 21 inch (53.3 cm) monitor.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 848
Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) Your Power Solutions Partner
> Compact, integrated UPS system provides clean, uninterruptible backup power, ensuring your system will remain up and running during power outages > Wide range Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR) without going to batteries extends battery life, even during periods of surge or sag in voltage from utility power > External communications via RS-232 port and optional Ethernet SNMP interface provides local or remote monitoring and control
> Independently programmable control and report relays allow tracking and controlling of key functions
> User-friendly LCD display allows "at-a-glance" monitoring and troubleshooting > Temperature compensated battery charging protects battery from over charging at extreme temperatures
> A wide operating temperature range of -40 to 74°C (-40 to 165°F)* is suitable for the most extreme operating environments
Alpha Micro 1000
UPS
The Alpha Micro Series provides constant, reliable backup power for Access Control, Security, Public Utility and Telecommunications applications in a compact all-in-one enclosure. The Alpha Micro UPS Series provides the same functionality as the Alpha FXM Series, for lower power applications in a single, easy to install cabinet. Optional add-on battery cabinets support applications where longer backup times are required. The system is available in either North American (120Vac/60Hz) or International (230Vac/50Hz) variants. * This applies to the UPS module only. Batteries may require a heater mat at lower temperatures. Output power derates after 50°C

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 849 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) Canada: Burnaby, British Columbia Tel: 604 436 5900 Fax: 604 436 1233 United States: Bellingham, Washington Tel: 360 647 2360 Fax: 360 671 4936 Alpha Technologies reserves the right to make changes to the products and information contained in this document without notice.

Alpha Technologies Ltd. For more information visit www.alpha.ca member of The Group™
#0480019-00 Rev B (03/2011)
Alpha Micro 1000 UPS
Consult your Alpha representative for P/N configurations Electrical
>North America
Battery string voltage:.......48Vdc
Input:

Nominal voltage: ............120Vac
Nominal frequency:........60Hz
Current:...........................8.8A nominal
Voltage range: ................85 to 175Vac
Output:

Current:...........................8.3A nominal
Voltage regulation: .........+/- 10% over input voltage range Power @ 50°C:................1000W/VA
>International
Battery string voltage:.......48Vdc
Input:

Nominal voltage: ............230Vac
Nominal frequency:........50Hz
Current:...........................4.6A nominal
Voltage range: ................150 to 328Vac
Output:

Voltage: ..........................230Vac
Current:...........................4.3A nominal
Voltage regulation: .........+/- 10% over input voltage range Power @ 50°C:................1000W/VA
Performance / Features
Run time*:..........................4 x 18Ah batteries - 28 mins *Run time on battery power can vary based on loads, temperature and battery.

Other battery options are available.

Mechanical
Agency Compliance
Electrical safety:................UL1778, CSA 22.2 No. 107.3, EN50091-1-2, EN60950
Marks: ...............................CCSAUS , CE**
EMI: ...................................Level A FCC, CISPR22, EN55022 NEMA: ...............................3R
**CE applies to 230Vac version only
>Alpha Micro
Dimensions mm 500H x 358W x 294D
inches 19.7H x 14.1W x 11.6D
Weight
(without batteries) 19.7kg (43.4lbs)
>Alpha Micro XL
Dimensions mm 776H x 358W x 294D
inches 30.6H x 14.1W x 11.6D
Weight
(without batteries) 19.7kg (49.8lbs)
>Alpha Micro XL3
Dimensions
mm 1330H x 358W x 294D
inches 52.4H x 14.1W x 11.6D
Weight
(without batteries) 22.6kg (69.2lbs)

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 850 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) CONTACT US:

NZ: 0800 PAYMENT (729 6368) AU: 1800 006 254
[email protected]
www.paymentexpress.com
Ingenico
iPP350 Series PINpad
Overview
The iPP350 Series is the most Paymark/ENZ compliant and innovative retail PINpad available today. It covers every possible payment method including the latest contactless ‘tap and go’ technology, providing a rapid payment process and future-proof option for any merchant.

At a Glance
• Lightweight, stylish and compact (168x 83x 40 mm), only 267g • Plug and Play Contactless payment module
• Tailored design for the retail market
• USB or RS232 powered
• Anti-theft system
• Paymark and ENZ certified, fully EMV compliant
• PA-DSS certified

SPECIFICATIONS
Processor
Main processor- Thunder (ARM9), 450 MIPS
Memory
128 MB Flash, 16MB SDRAM
OS
Telium 2
SAM Slots
3 Card Reader(s)
Magnetic stripe - triple track
Smart card - EMV L1, 500 000 insertions
Contactless - integrated reader
Display
TFT colour display QVGA 2.7”(320x240)
Keypad
15 keys, raised marking, backlit
Audio
Powerful buzzer
Connectivity
USB2.0 device
RS232
Ethernet 10/100
Power Supply
USB 5V 500 mA
RS 232 5V or 12V
Ethernet POE compliant with 802.3af
Size
168 x 83 x 40 mm
Weight
267g
Environment
5° to +45°C operating temperature
85% HR to +55°C operating humidity
PCI Pin Transaction Security
PCI PTS V2& V3 certified

FEATURES& BENEFITS
• Contactless ‘tap and go’
• ARM7 crypto processor dedicated
to handle all security-based
functionality
• PINpad is approved to authorise
transactions over any internet
connection removing the need
for dedicated phone lines
• Incredibly fast transaction times
– up to 10 times faster than other
EFTPOS systems
• The iPP300 series is integrated
with all leading POS systems
• Reduce your reconciliation time
with DPS’s feature rich web based
reporting tools
• USB Plug and Play- easy to install
• Kensington security slot anti-theft
system
• Optional PIN privacy shield for
additional peace of mind

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 851 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Overview
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 1 HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Front View

1. 5.25” external optical drive 5. NIC link indicator LED

2. Power/ Diagnostic LED 6. Hard Drive LED

3. NIC link indicator LED 7. Power button

4. 2 USB 2.0 ports with sliding door

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 852 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Overview
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 2 Rear View

1. 24 Volt USB + PWR port 10. PS/2 keyboard port

2. Two (2) Full-Height Slots* 11. VGA port

3. RS232 serial COM3 12. 3 USB 2.0 ports

4. RJ-45 LAN jack 13. 2 USB 3.0 ports

5. RS232 serial (power configurable) COM1 port 14. RS232 serial (power configurable) COM2 port

6. PS/2 mouse port 15. DisplayPort

7. 240W EPA – Active PFC power supply (no line
switching required)

16. RJ12 cash drawer port

8. Line in audio jack 17. One (1) PCIe x16 Slot (wired as x16)** – shown is optional three (3) port 12 Volt USB +Power Card

9. Line out audio jack 18. One (1) PCIe x16 Slot (wired as x4)** – shown is optional three (3) port 12 Volt USB + Power Card
* Can be configured either as two (2) PCI x1 or two (2) PCIe x1 Full-Height slots. Shown is optional 2 Port RS232 serial (power configurable) Card, COM4 port (left) and COM3 port (right port).
**A variety of cards are available to populate slots, dependant on riser choice and connectors utilized. For full details, please contact your HP sales representative for configuration choices.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 853 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Overview
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 3 Introduction
Get the flexibility and expandability to control everything from the store floor to the back office with the HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810, an all-around high-performer that stands up to the rigors of a retail environment so you can focus on making sales.

At A Glance
 UEFI BIOS developed and engineered by HP for better security, manageability and software image stability  Intel Q87 Express chipset supporting Intel 4th generation Intel ® Core™ processors, featuring Intel HD Graphics and vPro Technology (available with select processors)
 One of the following pre-installed operating systems:
o Genuine Microsoft Windows 8.1 Pro 64-bit1
o Genuine Microsoft Windows Embedded 8.1 Industry Pro Retail 64-bit o Genuine Microsoft Windows 7 Pro 32-bit or 64-bit2,3 (available through downgrade rights from Windows 8.1 Pro) o Genuine Microsoft Windows Embedded POSReady7 32-bit or 64-bit o FreeDOS
 Intel I217LM GbE integrated network connection
 DDR3L Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory (SDRAM)  Integrated dual independent monitor support via VGA and digital DisplayPort v1.2 interfaces  Discrete graphics options available
 90% high efficiency energy saving power supply
 ENERGY STAR 6.0 qualified models available (dependent upon the desired configuration)  Can be configured with multiple hard disk drives in a RAID array  Industry leading Design for Environment standards
 Protected by HP Services, including standard 3-3-3 warranty and warranties up to 5-5-5 (terms and conditions vary by country; certain restrictions and exclusions apply)
 Tool-less serviceability features for easier upgrades and repairs  40°C ambient thermals standard.
 Optional HP Rear Port/Cable Control Cover Available
 Tool-less serviceability for easy upgrades and repair  I/O ports including cash drawer port.
 Configurable Full-Height expansion slots; must choose either a PCI x1 Riser or PCIe x1 Riser. The choice of riser will affect which cards can be utilized.
 Either the PCI Riser or the PCIe Riser contain a Serial Port Connector, and if this connector is populated by a Serial Card then one of the riser bays is covered and cannot be used NOTE: All models and features may not be available in all countries [1] Not all features are available in all editions of Windows 8.1. Systems may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers and/or software to take full advantage of Windows 8.1 functionality. [2] Not all features are available in all editions of Windows 7. This system may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware to take full advantage of Windows 7 functionality. See http://www.microsoft.com/windows/windows-7/ for details. [3] This system is preinstalled with Windows 7 Pro software and also comes with a license and media for Windows 8 Pro software. You may only use one version of the Windows software at a time. Switching between versions will require you to uninstall one version and install the other version. You must back up all data (files, photos, etc.) before uninstalling and installing operating systems to avoid loss of your data.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 854 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Standard Features and Configurable Components (availability may vary by country) c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 4 Operating Systems
Preinstalled Genuine Microsoft Windows 8.1 Pro 64-bit1
Genuine Microsoft Windows Embedded 8.1 Industry Pro Retail 64-bit Genuine Microsoft Windows 7 Pro 32-bit or 64-bit2,3 (available through downgrade rights from Windows 8.1 Pro)
Genuine Microsoft Windows Embedded POSReady7 32-bit or 64-bit FreeDOS
Tested Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard (32-bit & 64-bit) Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard (64-bit)
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard (64-bit)
Certified Novell SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop†
[1] Not all features are available in all editions of Windows 8.1. Systems may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers and/or software to take full advantage of Windows 8.1 functionality.
[2] Not all features are available in all editions of Windows 7. This system may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware to take full advantage of Windows 7 functionality. See http://www.microsoft.com/windows/windows-7/ for details. [3] This system is preinstalled with Windows 7 Pro software and also comes with a license and media for Windows 8 Pro software. You may only use one version of the Windows software at a time. Switching between versions will require you to uninstall one version and install the other version. You must back up all data (files, photos, etc.) before uninstalling and installing operating systems to avoid loss of your data † The following features are not supported by Novell SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop:
 Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet Plus
 HP ProtectTools
 HP Blu-ray Writer playback of commercial movies
 DisplayPort video interface
 HP 2nd serial port adapter
 Power Management features
 Systems configured with Linux do not qualify for ENERGY STAR Value Added Software (included with all models; not included when configured with FreeDOS) HP ProtectTools Security Suite HP Vision Diagnostics
HP Software Management Agent PDF Complete Corporate Edition HP Computrace Microsoft Office 2013 Starter
HP Client Management Solutions (available for free download from the Internet) http://www.hp.com/go/easydeploy
HP SoftPaq Download Manager HP Systems Software Manager HP Client Catalog for Microsoft SMS HP Client Automation Starter Retail Solutions Services and Features
Intel® Stable Image Platform Program (SIPP) Factory Express Deployment and Lifecycle Services

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 855 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Standard Features and Configurable Components (availability may vary by country) c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 5 Intel® vPro™ Technology* Intel® Standard Manageability
HP Global Series Services Trusted Platform Module (TPM) v1.2** *
Intel® vPro™ Technology available on models with Intel® Core™ i7 and Intel® Core™ i5 processors. **TPM module disabled where restricted by law, i.e. Russia.

Service and Support
On-site warranty and service1: This limited warranty and service offering delivers parts, labor and on-site repair for terms up to 5 years. Response time is next business day2 and includes free telephone support3 24 x 7. Global coverage2 ensures any product purchased in one country and transferred to another non-restricted country will remain fully covered under the original warranty and service offering. Some countries/regions do not offer one year onsite and labor. 1 Terms and conditions may vary by country. Certain restrictions and exclusions apply 2 On-site services may be provided pursuant to a service contract between HP and an authorized HP third party provider, and is not available in certain countries. Global service response times are based on commercially reasonable best effort and may vary by country 3 Technical telephone support applies only to HP configured, HP and HP qualified third party hardware and software. Toll-free calling and 24 x 7 support may not be available in some countries.

Chipset
Intel® Q87 Express
Processor
Intel® Celeron® Processors
Intel® Celeron® G1820 Processor

2.7GHz
2MB cache, 2 cores, 2 threads
Intel® GT1 – HD Graphics
Supports DDR3 memory up to 1333 MT/s data rate
Intel® Pentium® Processors
Intel® Pentium® G3420 Processor

3.2GHz
3MB cache, 2 cores, 2 threads
Intel® GT1 – HD Graphics
Supports DDR3 memory up to 1600 MT/s data rate
Intel® 4th Generation Core™ i3 Processors
Intel® Core™ i3-4150 Processor

3.5GHz
3MB cache, 2 cores, 4 threads
Intel® HD Graphics 4400
Supports DDR3 memory up to 1600 MT/s data rate
Intel® Core™ i3-4430 Processor

3.0GHz
6MB cache, 4 cores, 4 threads
Intel® GT2 – 4600 Graphics
Supports DDR3 memory up to 1600 MT/s data rate
Intel® 4th Generation Core™ i5 Processors
Intel® Core™ i5-4570S Processor
Up to 3.6GHz Max. Turbo Frequency (2.9GHz Base Frequency) 6MB cache, 4 cores, 4 threads
Intel® GT2 – 4600 Graphics
Supports DDR3 memory up to 1600 MT/s data rate
Supports Intel® vPro™ Technology and Intel® Stable Image Platform Program (SIPP)

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 856 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Standard Features and Configurable Components (availability may vary by country) c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 6 Intel® 4th Generation Core™ i7 Processors
Intel® Core™ i7-4770S Processor
Up to 3.9GHz Max. Turbo Frequency (3.1GHz Base Frequency) 8MB cache, 4 cores, 8 threads
Intel® GT2 – 4600 Graphics
Supports DDR3 memory up to 1600 MT/s data rate
Supports Intel® vPro™ Technology and Intel® Stable Image Platform Program (SIPP) NOTE: Multi-Core is designed to improve performance of certain software products. Not all customers or software applications will necessarily benefit from use of this technology. 64-bit computing system required. Performance will vary depending on your hardware and software configurations. Intel’s numbering is not a measurement of higher performance.

Intel® vPro™ Technology
HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810 platforms featuring this technology include processors that are part of the Intel 2013 Stable Image Platform Program (SIPP) designed to ensure the stability promise inherent in the value proposition of the HP RP5 Model 5810, thus making this model the most stable, secure, and manageable platforms available to retailers today.

Intel Advanced Management Technology (AMT) v9.0 – An advanced set of remote management features and functionality which provides network administrators the latest and most effective tools to remotely discover, heal, and protect networked client systems regardless of the system's health or power state. AMT 9.0 includes the following advanced management functions:
 Power Management (on, off, reset)
 Hardware Inventory (includes BIOS and firmware revisions  Hardware Alerting
 Agent Presence
 System Defense Filters
 SOL/IDER
 Cisco NAC/SDN Support
 ME Wake-on-LAN
 DASH 1.1 compliance
 IPv6 Support
 Fast Call for Help - a client inside or outside the firewall may initiate a call for help via BIOS screen, periodic connections, or alert triggered connection
 Remote Scheduled Maintenance - pre-schedule when the Retail System connects to the IT or service provider console for maintenance. Remote Retail Systems can get required patches, be inventoried, etc by connecting to their IT console or Service Provider when it's convenient
 Remote Alerts – automatically alert IT or service provider if issues arise  Access Monitor – Provides oversight into Intel® AMT actions to support security requirements  PC Alarm Clock
 Microsoft NAP Support
 Host Base set-up and configuration
 Management Engine (ME) firmware roll back
 Wireless AMT functionality on Point of Sale/Desktop (WoDT)  Enhanced KVM resolution
Redundant Array of Independent Drives (RAID)
Flexible implementation:
 DriveLock is supported while in RAID mode. Users can manage the DriveLock password from within F10 Setup.

Locked drives will be displayed as such in the RAID option ROM interface.  Hard drive information can be viewed within F10 Setup while in RAID mode. Previously, the hard drives will not

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 857 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Standard Features and Configurable Components (availability may vary by country) c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 7 appear in Drive Configuration when switching to RAID mode.  The RAID Setup Utility (accessed through CTRL-I) can be protected by the F10 Setup password.

NOTE:

RAID 1 is the only RAID configuration offered via HP factory configurations. The pre-configured systems:
 are complete RAID systems and have both drives installed.  have the necessary Option ROM configuration.
 are pre-loaded and pre-installed with all required Intel software.  include a preinstalled operating system that is mirrored mode out of the box.

Please refer to the HP White Paper titled “Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI) and Redundant Array of Independent Disks (RAID) on HP Compaq PCs” at: http://www.hp.com for more information and instructions.

DDR3 Synchronous DRAM NON-ECC System Memory
The HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810 supports the 4th generation Intel® Core™ processor family. Based on a new microarchitecture, the processor is designed for a two-chip platform consisting of a processor and Platform Controller Hub (PCH). Unlike previous generations, the 4th generation Intel® Core™ processor includes an Integrated Memory Controller (IMC). The IMC supports DDR3/DDR3L protocols with two independent, 64-bit wide channels each accessing one or two DIMMs.
 Two channels of non-ECC DDR3/DDR3L unbuffered dual in-line memory modules (UDIMM) or DDR3/DDR3L unbuffered small
 Outline dual in-line memory modules (U-DIMM) with a maximum of two DIMMs per channel  Single-channel and dual-channel memory organization modes  Data burst length of eight for all memory organization modes  Memory data transfer rates of up to 1600 MT/s; actual supported data transfer rate determined by the configured processor.
 64-bit wide channels
 DDR3/DDR3L system memory I/O voltage of 1.5V
 Theoretical maximum memory bandwidth of:
o 21.3 GB/s in dual-channel mode assuming 1333 MT/s
o 25.6 GB/s in dual-channel mode assuming 1600 MT/s
CAUTION: You must shut down the Retail System and disconnect the power cord before adding or removing memory modules. Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always supplied to the memory modules as long as the Retail System is plugged in to an active AC outlet.

Adding or removing memory modules while voltage is present may cause irreparable damage to the memory modules or system board.

Memory Configurations:

Maximum Memory Supports up to 32 GB of DDR3 SDRAM using DIMM modules. Slot 1 is black and must always be populated. Not all memory configurations possible are represented below.

NOTE:

For systems configured with more than 3 GB of memory and a 32-bit operating system, all memory may not be available due to system resource requirements. Addressing memory above 4 GB requires a 64-bit operating system.

Total Memory Slot
Channel A Channel B
1 (black) 2 (white) 3 (white) 4 (white)
4 GB 4 GB

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 858 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Standard Features and Configurable Components (availability may vary by country) c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 8 (dual channel symmetric)
8 GB
(dual channel symmetric)
4 GB 4 GB 4 GB 4 GB
16 GB
(dual channel symmetric)
4 GB 4 GB 4 GB 4 GB
32GB
(dual channel symmetric)
8 GB 8 GB 8 GB 8 GB
NOTE: The Intel Q87 Express chipset includes a built-in Management Engine (ME), which allocates memory for manageability functions.

Management Engine memory is shared with system memory. If the POS System contains a single U-DIMM, 16 MB of memory is pre-allocated for it at system startup. If the POS System contains two U-DIMMs, 32 MB of memory is pre-allocated. This memory is not made available to the operating system, just as pre-allocated video memory is not available.

Front View Quantity Supported Position Controller

3.5-inch SATA Hard Drive 3 1, 2*, 3 SATA
Optical Drive Bay or Carrier for
Hard Drive
1 2 SATA
External HDD can be connected through optional external ESATA port. 3 Drive maximum NOTE: When ESATA is installed, either the 2nd HDD (if applicable) or ODD (if applicable) cannot be used. * For CRU Removable storage in lieu of ODD
Data Storage Drives
SATA Hard Disk Drives
HP 500GB SATA 3.0 Hard Disk Drive (3.5")
7,200 rpm, 16MB cache, 6.0 GB/s, NCQ, Smart IV
HP 2TB SATA 3.0 Hard Disk Drive (3.5")
7,200 rpm, 16MB cache, 6.0 GB/s, NCQ, Smart IV
HP 500GB SATA 3.0 Removable Hard Disk Drive (3.5")
7,200 rpm, 16MB cache, 6.0 GB/s, NCQ, Smart IV
Note: For hard drives, GB = 1 billion bytes. TB = 1 trillion bytes. Actual formatted capacity is less. Up to 30 GB (for Windows 8.1) of system disk is reserved for the system recovery software.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 859 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Standard Features and Configurable Components (availability may vary by country) c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 9 SATA SED Hard Disk Drives
HP 500GB SATA SED 3.0 Hard Disk Drive (3.5")
7,200 rpm, 16MB cache, 6.0 GB/s, NCQ, Smart IV
Solid State Drives (2.5” Drives use a 3.5" drive cage adapter) HP 32GB 2.5” SSD
HP 64GB 2.5” SSD
HP 128 GB M.2 PCIe SSD
HP 128GB 2.5” SSD
HP 256GB 2.5” SSD
HP 128GB 2.5” SED SSD
HP 256GB 2.5” SED SSD
Optical Disc Drive
HP SATA DVD-ROM Drive
Note: Optical drives are optional or add on features. Duplication of copyrighted material is strictly prohibited. Actual speeds may vary. Double Layer media compatibility will widely vary with some home DVD players and DVD-ROM drives. Note that DVD-RAM cannot read or write to 2.6GB Single Sided/5.2 Double Sided-Version 1.0 Media.

Security Solutions and Capabilities
Trusted Platform Module (TPM) 1.21
Stringent security (via BIOS)2
SATA port disablement (via BIOS)
Drive lock
RAID configurations
HP ProtectTools Security Software Suite
Serial, parallel, USB enable/disable (via BIOS)
Optional USB Port Disable at factory (user configurable via BIOS) Power Configurable Serial Ports (COM 1, 2, 3 and 4 ) via the HP BIOS Removable media write/boot control
Power-On password (via BIOS)
Setup password (via BIOS)
HP Hood Sensor
TPM 1.2 Embedded Security Chip* integrated with Broadcom NIC HP ProtectTools Security Software Suite with BIOS Configuration (serial (all 4), parallel, USB enable / disable), Credential Manager, Smart Card Manager (sold separately)
Three (3) port 12 Volt USB + PWR Card (sold separately) Two (2) port Power Configurable RS232 Serial Card COM 3 & 4 (sold separately) Wall Mount (sold separately)
HP Desktop Security Lock Kit (lock and cable) (sold separately) Security Cable with Kensington lock (sold separately)
HP Rear Port/Cable Control Cover (sold separately)
1 TPM module disabled where use is restricted by law; for example, Russia. 2 This setting is defaulted to disable, but when enabled, the PW jumper will not clear the BIOS pre-boot authentication passwords.

NOTE: TPM module disabled where use is restricted by law; for example, Russia.

I/O Ports

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 860 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Standard Features and Configurable Components (availability may vary by country) c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 10 USB USB 2.0:

Front: Two (2), covered
Rear: Three (3)
USB 3.0:

Rear: Two (2)
USB 24V One (1) 24V powered USB
Serial Two (2) RS-232 (power configurable) ports standard Parallel One port available as an option*
eSATA One port available as an option*
RS-232 Two (2) RS-232 powered configurable ports optional (for a total of 4*) USB+PWR 12V Two (2) USB+PWR 12V cards optional (three (3) 12 Volt USB+ PWR per card) for a total of 6* PS/2 One (1) color-coded support for keyboard (purple)
One (1) color-coded support for mouse (green)
RJ-12 One (1) RJ-12 Cash Drawer port
Video One (1) VGA
One (1) DisplayPort v1.2 and One (1) DisplayPort v1.2 as an option* Provides integrated dual independent monitor support
DVI output Available via optional DisplayPort to DVI Adapter Audio Rear: Line input (supports microphone or line input) and line out All ports are 3.5mm in diameter
NOTE: See Audio/Visual section for information on re-taskable audio ports NIC One (1) Industry standard RJ-45 port accesses the integrated network interface controller *These options occupy slot openings so less slots will be available when the options are installed Serial Ports (Power Configurable in HP Bios) – detail
1 and 2: Powered Configurable serial port expansion card installation that supplies two additional serial ports (COM3 and COM4)
3 and 4: Two Power Configurable serial ports, COM1 and COM 2, are standard on the POS System.

Slots
Full-Height Total of Two (2) Full-Height Slots, with a Choice of either:

1.) PCI x1 - Two (2) each: 4.2" full height, 6.6" length, 25W max. power

2.) PCIe x1 - Two (2) each: 4.2" full height, 6.6" length, 10W max. power Half-Height Total of Two (2) Half-Height:

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 861 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Standard Features and Configurable Components (availability may vary by country) c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 11 PCIe x16 (wired as x4) - One (1) each: 2.5" low profile, 6.6" length, 10W max. power PCIe x16 (wired as x16) - One (1) each: 2.5 low profile, 6.6" length, 25W max. power Bays
External 1 each 5.25”
Internal HDD 2 each 3.5”
Controllers
Hard drive SATA
Supports up to SATA 6.0 Gb/s
SATA interfaces One (1) SATA 2.0
Two (2) SATA 3.0
Host SATA Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI) Revision 1.2. The specification includes a description of the hardware/software interface between system software and the host controller hardware Network Interface Connections
Intel I217LM GbE Network Connection (integrated)
Intel 7260 802.11 a/b/g/n Wireless PCIe CLink NIC (optional) Intel I210-T1 PCIe x1 Gb NIC (optional)
Broadcom NetXtreme GgE PCIe NIC (optional)
NOTE: The integrated network connection is required to support Intel vPro Technology. 802.11 requires wireless access point and internet service. Availability of public wireless access points limited. Gigabit Ethernet speeds may vary.

Graphics
Integrated:

Intel HD Graphics (integrated)
Intel HD Graphics 4600
Discrete:

NVIDIA Quadro NVS 315 Graphics 1GB
NVIDIA Quadro NVS 510 Graphics 2GB
Note: HD content required to view HD images. Integrated Intel HD graphics uses part of the total system memory for video performance.

System memory dedicated to video performance is not available for other use by other programs.

HP DisplayPort to DVI-D Adapter
HP DisplayPort to HDMI Adapter
HP DisplayPort to VGA Adapter
Multi-Media
High Definition Audio (integrated) with Realtek ALC261 codec (all ports are stereo) Line-out and Line-In rear Ports (3.5mm)
Internal Speaker (standard)
Input/Output Devices
HP PS/2 Standard Keyboard for Retail (optional)

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 862 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Standard Features and Configurable Components (availability may vary by country) c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 12 HP PS/2 Optical Mouse (optional)
HP USB Standard Keyboard for Retail (optional)
HP USB Optical Mouse (optional)
Miscellaneous Devices and Configurations
HP Parallel Port Adapter
HP Serial Port Adapter
HP Tower Stand
HP Rear Port/Cable Control Cover
HP RP5 Model 5810 PCI Riser Assembly
HP RP5 Model 5810 PCIe Riser Assembly
Three (3) port 12 Volt USB + Pwr Card
Two (2) port RS232 Serial (power configurable) COM 3 & 4 port card

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 863 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 13 Weights & Dimensions
(configured with 1 HDD & 1 ODD)
Chassis
(H x W x D)

13.3 x 14.9 x 3.95 in

33.8 x 37.9 x 10cm
System Volume 788 cu in

13.0 L
Packaging
(H x W x D)

23.38 x 19.68 x 9.00 in

59.38 x49.99 x22.85 cm
System Weight* 15.08 lb

6.84 kg
Shipping Weight* 16.28lb

7.34kg
Max Supported Weight
(desktop orientation)
* Exact weight depends on
configuration

77.0 lb

35.0 kg
Unit Environment and Operating Conditions
General Unit Operating Guidelines
 Keep the POS System away from excessive moisture, direct moisture and the extremes of heat and cold, to ensure that unit is operated within the specified operating range.
 Leave a 10.2-cm (4-in) clearance on front side and power supply side of the POS System to permit the required airflow.  If within an enclosure, the front side should be 100% open. The clearance between the system and the cabinet must be at least 10 mm (0.4 inch) on the sides and top and at least 50-mm (2-inch) clearance in the rear with power supply venting area 100% open per the above bullet.
 Never restrict airflow into the POS System by blocking any vents or air intakes.  Do not stack POS Systems on top of each other or place POS Systems so near each other that they are subject to each other's re-circulated or preheated air.
 Occasionally clean the air vents on the front, back, and any other vented side of the POS System. Lint, dust and other foreign matter can block the vents and limit the airflow.

Temperature Range Operating: 50° to 104° F (10° to 40° C)* Non-operating: -22° to 149° F (-30° to 65° C)
Relative Humidity Operating: 20% to 85% (non-condensing at ambient) Non-operating: 0% to 95% (non-condensing at ambient)
Maximum Altitude
(unpressurized)
Operating: 10,000 ft (3048 m)
Non-operating: 30,000 ft (9144 m)
* Operating temperature is de-rated 1.0 deg C per 300 m (1000 ft) to 3000 m (10,000 ft) above sea level, no direct sustained sunlight. Maximum rate of change is 10 deg C/Hr. The upper limit may be limited by the type and number of options installed.

Power Supply 240-watt – EPA90 power supply – Active PFC *This power supply meets ENERGY STAR compliance in
conjunction with a select range of processors and modules.

Operating Voltage Range 90 to 264 VAC
Rated Voltage Range 100 to 240VAC
Rated Line Frequency 50/60 Hz
Operating Line Frequency Range 47 – 63 Hz

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 864 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 14 Rated Input Current 4A
Efficiency 87/90/87% at 20/50/100% load
Power Supply Fan 90 mm variable speed fan
ENERGY STAR Compliant ENERGY STAR 6.0 compliant
Power Cord Length 6.0ft (1.8 3m)
Current Leakage (NFPA99) < 275 µA
ROM BIOS Information
Key features of the HP BIOS include:
 Deployment and manageability – HP BIOS provides several technologies that help integrate the HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810 into retail, such as PXE, remote configuration, remote control, and F10 Setup support for 12 languages.  Select models feature either Intel Standard Manageability or vPro Technology.  Stability – HP BIOS supports the HP stable product roadmap by releasing only critical BIOS changes to the factory and advanced change notification.
 Computrace agent – For tracking and tracing services, available in select countries, separate software and purchase of a subscription is required.
 Thermal and power management – The HP BIOS provides and enables thermal and power management technologies so component temperatures are managed for high reliability and to assist in operating the HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810 in any retail environment.
 Acoustic performance – Industry leading acoustic emissions across the range of operating conditions.  Serviceability – HP BIOS provides diagnostic and detailed service information.  Upgrades and recovery – HP BIOS provides numerous ways to upgrade the HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810, including BIOS updates from within DOS (Flashbin), BIOS updates from within Windows (HPQFlash), HP Client Manager, and failsafe recovery. In addition, the HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810 BIOS Utilities tool enables replicated BIOS setup throughout the Enterprise; it is available from within the BIOS software and from the support website Additional HP BIOS Features
 Power-On password – Helps prevent an unauthorized user from powering on the system.  Administrator password – Also known as the setup password, this helps prevent unauthorized changes to the system configuration. If the administrator password is not known, the BIOS version cannot be changed and changes cannot be made to BIOS settings using F10 setup or under the OS.
 Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) – Represents a significant innovation in power and configuration management, allowing operating systems and applications to manage power based on activity and usage. HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810 use ACPI to provide power conservation features.  S5 Max Power Savings setting supports EU Lot6 requirement and allows the HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810 to power down below 1W is S5 (when turned off). When S5 Max Power Savings feature is enabled power to slots is turned off along with WOL functionality.

Other Features
 Advanced Configuration and Power Management Interface (ACPI). Allows the system to wake from a low power mode.

Controls system power consumption, making it possible to place individual cards and peripherals in a low-power or powered-off state without affecting other elements of the system.  System Management BIOS v2.7
 Intel Wired for Management support; industry wide initiative to make Intel architecture based Retail Systems, PCs, servers and mobile computers more inherently manageable out-of-the-box and over the network  Dual State Power Button; acts as both an on/off button and a suspend-to-sleep button

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 865 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 15 Serviceability Features
 Dual colored power LED on front of the HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810 to indicate either normal or fault condition  Indicator Lights on front of system:

Power / Diagnostic LED Hard Drive LED
NIC Link LED NIC Activity LED
 Diagnostic LED Explanation Table:
o Number of 1-second red LED blinks followed by a 2-second pause, then repeats:
 2 – processor thermal protection activated
 3 – processor not installed
 4 – power supply failure
 5 – memory error
 6 – video error
 7 – PCA failure (ROM detected failure prior to video)  8 – invalid ROM, bootblock recovery mode
 9 – system not fetching code
 10 – system hang while loading an option ROM
 System/Emergency ROM
 NIC Link and activity LED's on front bezel
 Flash ROM
 CMOS Battery Holder for easy replacement
 Flash Recovery with Video Configuration Record Software  5 Aux Power LED on System PCA
 Processor ZIF Socket for easy Upgrade
 Over-Temp Warning on Screen (Requires IM Agents)
 Clear Password Jumper
 DIMM Connectors for easy Upgrade
 Clear CMOS Button
 NIC LEDs (integrated) (Green & Amber) - Rear
 Color coordinated cables and connectors
 Tool-less Hood Removal
 Front power button
 System memory can be upgraded without removing the system board or any internal components  Tool-less Hard Drive, Optical Drive Removal
NOTE: thumb screw release mechanism is used with the Ultra-slim Desktop chassis cover.

Additional Features Description
Intel® Standard Manageability
 Requires the utilization of the integrated network connection  Delivered with processors that are not part of the Intel Stable Intel Platform Program (SIPP)
 Intel Advanced Management Technology (AMT) v9.0
 Basic Retail SYSTEM management capabilities such as asset inventory, HW alerting, SOL/IDE-R, remote configuration, agent presence and system defense.
 DASH 1.1 compliance. Support for profile updates.
 Host VPN support for local management VPN tunneling
Intel Standard Manageability includes features of Intel Active Management Technology (Intel AMT). Intel AMT requires the Retail system to have an Intel AMT4.C.h Packet Pg. 866 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 16 enabled chipset, network hardware and software, as well as connection with a power source and a corporate network connection. Setup requires configuration by the purchaser and may require scripting with the management console or further integration into existing security frameworks to enable certain functionality. For more information, see http://www.intel.com/technology/platform-technology/intel-amt/.

DASH 1.1 support (Desktop and Mobile
Architecture for System Hardware)
A standards initiative for representing out-of-band management capability for Retail Systems. It is a secure, web-services based successor to ASF.

ASF 2.0 support (Alert Standard Format) Industry-standard specification for network alerting in operating system-absent environments
TXT (Trusted Execution Technology) and
VT-d (Virtualized devices)
TXT allows for secure management (via TPM) and measured launch of VMM, as well as teardown of secrets in unexpected reset case. TXT support provided in select Intel processors
VT-d is a chipset technology that virtualizes directed I/O Together, TXT and VT-d may be used to support verified launch of a known trusted VMM that also may protect VMs from accessing each other's memory.

Computrace Computrace agent support standard
Towerable Orientation The chassis can be oriented as either a desktop or a tower.

Drive Protection System
DPS Access through F10 Setup during Boot
A diagnostic hard drive self test. It scans critical physical components and every sector of the hard drive for physical faults and then reports any faults to the user Running independently of the operating system, it can be accessed through a Windows-based diagnostics utility or through the Retail System's setup procedure. It produces an evaluation on whether the hard drive is the source of the problem and needs to be replaced
The system expands on the Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology (SMART), a continuously running systems diagnostic that alerts the user to certain types of failures
SMART Technology (Self-Monitoring,
Analysis and Reporting Technology)
SMART I – Drive Failure Prediction
SMART II – Off-Line Data Collection
SMART III – Off-Line Read Scanning with
Defect Reallocation
SMART IV – End-to-End CRC for hard drives
Allows hard drives to monitor their own health and to raise flags if imminent failures were predicted
Predicts failures before they occur. Tracks fault prediction and failure indication parameters such as re-allocated sector count, spin retry count, calibration retry count By avoiding actual hard drive failures, SMART hard drives act as "insurance" against unplanned user downtime and potential data loss from hard drive failure IOEDC: I/O Error Detection Circuitry
Detects errors in Read/Write buffers on HDD cache RAM
Interface in F10 setup provides confirmation of SMART IV support.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 867 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Audio
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 17 High Definition Audio
Type Integrated
HD Stereo Codec Realtek 2-channel ALC221 codec
Audio I/O Ports Rear Line-In/Microphone input (47-K ohm Input Impedance, function is configurable by audio driver)
Rear Line-Out* (200 ohms Output Impedance, expects at least a 10-K ohm load) Line-in and Line-out, both on rear.

All ports are 3.5mm in diameter
Internal Speaker Amplifier 1.5W amplifier for the internal speaker only. External speakers must be powered externally. Rear Line-in audio port is re-taskable as either Line-in or Microphone-In.

Multi-streaming Capable Multi-streaming can be enabled in the Realtek control panel to allow independent audio streams to be sent to/from the front and rear jacks.

Sampling 8 kHz – 192 kHz
Wavetable Syntheses
(software)
Yes – Uses OS soft wavetable
Analog Audio Yes
# of Channels on Line-Out
(mono/stereo)
Stereo (Left & Right channels)
Internal Speaker Yes
External Speaker Jack
(Line-Out)
Yes

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 868 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Communications
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 18 Intel® I217LM GbE Network Connection (integrated)
Connector RJ-45
System Interface Integrated on PCA
Controller Intel I217LM GbE platform LAN connect networking controller Memory 24 KB FIFO packet buffer memory
Data rates supported 10/100/1000 Mbps
802.1P
802.1Q
802.2
Compliance 802.3
802.3ab
802.az
802.3u
Bus architecture PCI Express and SMBus
Data transfer mode PCIe-based interface for active state operation (S0 state) and SMBus for host and management traffic (Sx low power state)
Power requirement Requires 3.3V and 0.9V or just 3.3V with integrated regulators Power consumption 0.733 Watts
Boot ROM support Yes
Network transfer mode Full-duplex
Half-duplex (not supported for the 1000BASE-T transceiver) Network transfer rate 10BASE-T (half-duplex) 10 Mbps
10BASE-T (full-duplex) 20 Mbps
100BASE-TX (half-duplex) 100 Mbps
100BASE-TX (full-duplex) 200 Mbps
1000BASE-T (full-duplex) 2000 Mbps
Environmental Operating Temperature: 32° to 185°F (0° to 85° C) Operating Humidity: 60% RH
Management WOL, auto MDI crossover, PXE, Multi-port teaming, RSS, Advanced cable diagnostic.

Alerting ASF 2.0 support, AMT 9.0 support
Intel Ethernet I210-T1 GbE NIC Card
Connector RJ-45
System Interface PCI Express x1
Controller Intel I210 Gigabit Ethernet Controller
Memory Integrated Dual 48K configurable transmit receive FIFO Buffers Data rates supported 10/100/1000 Mbps
Compliance IEEE 802.1P, 802,1Q, 802.2, 802.3, 802.3AB and 802.3u compliant, 802.3x flow control Bus architecture PCI Express 2.1
Data path width X1, 250 MB/s, Bi-directional interface
Data transfer mode Bus-master DMA
Hardware certifications FCC, B, CE, TUV- cTUVus Mark Canada and United States, TUV- GS Mark for European Union Power requirement Aux 3.3V, 3.0 Watts in 1000base-T and 2.0 Watts in 100Base-T Boot ROM support Yes

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 869 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Communications
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 19 Network transfer mode Full-duplex
Half-duplex (not available for the 1000BASE-T transceiver) Network Transfer Rate 10BASE-T (half-duplex) 10 Mbps
10BASE-T (full-duplex) 20 Mbps
100BASE-TX (half-duplex) 100 Mbps
100BASE-TX (full-duplex) 200 Mbps
1000BASE-T (full-duplex) 2000 Mbps (actual rate limited by PCI Bus) Environmental Operating Temperature: 32° to 131°F (0° to 55° C) Operating Humidity: 85% at 131° F (55° C)
Dimensions 2.56 x 2.17 x 0.8 in (6.5 x 5.5 x 2.0 cm)
Management capabilities WOL, PXE, DMI, WFM 2.0
Intel 7260 802.11 a/b/g/n PCIe x1 WLAN Card
Wireless LAN standards IEEE 802.11a
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11g
IEEE 802.11n
Interoperability Wi-Fi certified
Cisco Compatible Extensions Program compliant with Microsoft Windows 7, Windows Vista and XP (details at: http://www.hp.com/go/notebooks/WLAN)
1 Frequency band 802.11b/g/n 2.402 - 2.482 GHz
802.11 a/n 4.9 - 4.95 GHz (Japan)

5.15 - 5.25 GHz

5.25 - 5.35 GHz

5.47 - 5.725 GHz

5.825 - 5.850 GHz
Antenna structure 2 transmit; 2 receive (2x2)
Data rates 802.11a: 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps
802.11b: 1, 2, 5.5, 11 Mbps
802.11g: 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps
802.11n: MCS 0 ~ MCS 15, (20MHz, and 40MHz)
Modulation Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum
CCK, BPSK, QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM
Security2
 IEEE and WiFi compliant 64 / 128 bit WEP encryption for a/b/g mode only  AES-CCMP: 128 bit in hardware
 802.1x authentication
 WPA, WPA2: 802.1x. WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK, TKIP, and AES
 WPA2 certification
 IEEE 802.11i
 Cisco Certified Extensions, all versions through CCX4 and CCX Lite  WAPI
Sub-channels Multinational support with frequency bands and channels compliant to local regulations.

Network architecture models Ad-hoc (Peer to Peer)
Infrastructure (Access Point Required)
Roaming IEEE 802.11 compliant roaming between band Access Points Output power3 2.4G: +13.5dBm minimum

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 870 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Communications
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 20 (approximately) 5G: +12dBm minimum
Power Consumption Transmit mode 2.0 Watts
Receive Mode 1.6Watts
Idle mode4 250mW (WLAN Associated)
Idle mode 100 mW (WLAN unassociated)
Radio off 75mW
Power Management ACPI and PCI Express compliant power management 802.11 compliant power saving mode
Receiver sensitivity5 802.11g:-90 dBm (6 Mbps), -89 dBm (9 Mbps), -87 dBm (12 Mbps), -85 dBm (18 Mbps), -82 dBm (24 Mbps), -79 dBm (36 Mbps), -76 dBm (48 Mbps), -74 dBm (54 Mbps) 802.11b:-95 dBm (1 Mbps), -93 dBm (2 Mbps), -91 dBm (5.5 Mbps), -88 dBm (11 Mbps) 802.11g:-90 dBm (6 Mbps), -89 dBm (9 Mbps), -87 dBm (12 Mbps), -85 dBm (18 Mbps), -82 dBm (24 Mbps), -79 dBm (36 Mbps), -76 dBm (48 Mbps), -74 dBm (54 Mbps) 802.11n:-69 dBm (150 Mbps), -66 dBm (300 Mbps)
Antenna connections 2 U.FL type connectors (output impedance of 50 ± 2 ohms) Form Factor PCI-Express Half-MiniCard
Dimensions 0.12 x 1.06 x 1.18 in (3.1 x 26.8 x 30.0 mm) Weight Approx. 0.122 lb (55.7 g)
Operating voltage 3.3V +/- 9%
Temperature Operating 14° to 158° F (-10° to 70° C)
Non-operating -40° to 176° F (-40° to 80° C)
Humidity Operating 10% to 90% (non-condensing)
Non-operating 5% to 95% (non-condensing)
Altitude Operating 0 to 10,000 ft (3,048 m)
Non-operating 0 to 50,000 ft (15,240 m)
LED activity LED Amber - Radio OFF; LED White - Radio ON OS Support Windows 8.1 Pro (64-bit)*
Windows 8.1 (64-bit)*
Windows 8 Pro (64-bit)*
Windows 8 (64-bit)*
Windows 7 Ultimate (32-bit)**
Windows 7 Ultimate (64-bit)**
Windows 7 Professional (32-bit)**
Windows 7 Professional (64-bit)**
Windows 7 Home Premium (32-bit)**
Windows 7 Home Premium (64-bit)**
Novell SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11***
*Not all features are available in all editions of Windows 8. Systems may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers and/or software to take full advantage of Windows 8 functionality. See http://www.microsoft.com. **Not all features are available in all editions of Windows 7. This system may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware to take full advantage of Windows 7 functionality. See http://www.microsoft.com/windows/windows-7/ for details. ***Most features not available on Linux.

Option kit contents PCIe x1 card with full height bracket, rf antenna, antenna cable, separate low profile bracket, software CD and warranty.

1. WLAN supplier's client utility is required for Cisco Compatible Extensions support with Microsoft Windows XP. WLAN may also be compatible with certain thirdparty software supplicants. WLAN supplier IHV extensions required for Cisco Compatible Extensions support for Microsoft Windows Vista.

2. Check latest software/driver release for updates on supported security features.

3. Maximum output power may vary by country according to local regulations.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 871 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Communications
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 21

4. In Power Save Polling mode and on battery power.

5. Receiver sensitivity is measured at a packet error rate of 8% for 802.11b (CCK modulation) and a packet error rate of 10% for 802.11a/g (OFDM modulation).

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 872 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Graphics
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 22 Intel HD Graphics (integrated)
VGA Controller Integrated
DisplayPort Multimode capable; supports HDCP, Display Port Audio (2 streams), HBR2 link rates and Multi-Stream Technology for a maximum of 3 displays (including the integrated panel) Memory Intel graphics do not have dedicated memory but utilizes some of the computer's system memory. The amount of memory used for graphics depending on the amount of system memory installed, BIOS settings, operating system, and system load. 32 MB is pre-allocated for graphics use at system boot time. Additional memory can be allocated at boot time by the BIOS for PAVP (Protected Audio Video Playback) support for playback of protected video content.

Maximum Graphics
Memory
Microsoft Windows 7
Up to 1.7GB
Windows 8
Up to 1.8GB
Note: The actual amount of maximum graphics memory can be less than the amounts listed above depending on your computer’s configuration.

Graphics/Video API
Support
 The Processor Graphics contains a refresh of the seventh generation graphics core enabling substantial gains in performance and lower power consumption. Up to 16 EU support.  Next Generation Intel Clear Video Technology HD Support is a collection of video playback and enhancement features that improve the end user's viewing experience o Encode/transcode HD content
o Playback of high definition content including Blu-ray Disc o Superior image quality with sharper, more colorful images  DirectX Video Acceleration (DXVA) support for accelerating video processing o Full AVC/VC1/MPEG2 HW Decode
 Advanced Scheduler 2.0, 1.0
 Windows 7
 Windows 8, Linux OS Support
 DirectX 11.1
 OpenGL 4.0
 Open CL 1.2
Resolution Refresh Rates (Hz)
800x600 60
1024x768 60
1280x600 60
1280x720 60
1280x800 60
1280x960 60
1280x1024 60
1360x768 60
1366x768 60
1440x1050 60
1440x900 60
1600x900 60
1600x1200* 60
1680x1050 60
1920x1080 60
1920x1200* 60
1920x1440* 60
2560x1440* 60

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 873 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Graphics
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 23 2560x1600* 60
* Only supported when using a DisplayPort connector
NVIDIA NVS 315 1GB PCIe x16 Graphics Card
Form Factor Low Profile: 2.713 × 6.15 in
Graphics Controller NVIDIA® NVS 315
Bus Type PCIe x16, 2.0 Compliant
Memory Size: 1GB, 64bit wide bus
Clock: 875 MHz
Memory Bandwidth: 14 GB/s
Connectors DMS-59, with support for dual VGA, dual DVI or dual DisplayPort with the appropriate adapter cable.

NOTE: Optional cable required for DVI and DisplayPort connectivity.

Display Max. Resolution Up to 2048 x 1536 VGA; 1920 x 1200 DVI; 2560 x 1600 DisplayPort Display Output Up to 2 displays in the following configurations  Dual DVI:
o Drives two DVI displays using optional HP DMS59 DVI Dual-head Connector Cable DL139A
 Dual DisplayPort:
o Drives two DisplayPort using optional HP DMS-59 to Dual DisplayPort kit XP688AA  Dual VGA:
o Drives two analog using the included HP DMS-59 to Dual VGA Cable Supported Display
Resolutions and Refresh
Rates
NOTE: Other resolutions may be available but are not recommended as they may not have been tested and qualified by HP.

Resolution Analog Connection Digital Connection
640x480 85 60
720x480 85 60
720x576 85 60
800x600 85 60
1024x768 85 60
1280x720 85 60
1280x768 85 60
1280x1024 85 60
1440x900 75 60
1600x1024 85 60
1600x1200 85 60
1680x1050 75 60
1920x1080 85 60-R
1920x1200 85 60-R
1920x1440 85 N/A
2048x1536 75 N/A
2560x1440 N/A 60*
2560x1600 N/A 60*
* Display Port Only

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 874 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Graphics
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 24 NVIDIA NVS 510 2GB Graphics Card
Form Factor Low Profile, 2.713 inches × 6.3 inches, single slot Graphics Controller NVS 510 GPU
Core Clock: 797 Mhz
Memory Clock: 891 Mhz
CUDA Cores: 192
Bus Type PCI Express™ x16 Generation 2.0
Memory 2GB DDR3
Connectors Four mini-DisplayPort.

Four mini-DisplayPort to DisplayPort adapters included. (DisplayPort to DVI-D, DisplayPort to VGA, DisplayPort to HDMI, and DisplayPort to Dual-Link DVI adapters available as separate accessories)
Maximum Resolution Mini-DisplayPort connectors support ultra-high-resolution panels (up to 3840 x 2160 @ 60Hz) NOTE: This card supports up to four displays. For Windows XP, only 2 active displays are supported.

RAMDAC Not Applicable
Image Quality Features 10-bit internal display processing, including hardware support for 10-bit scan-out Display Output DisplayPort with Multi-Stream Technology (MST) and High Bit Rate 2 (HBR2) support.

Digital Display Support

1. DisplayPort Output
 Drives four DisplayPort enabled digital display at resolutions up to 3840 × 2160 at 60 Hz with reduced blanking, when connected natively using the 4 DisplayPort connectors on the NVS 510 graphics card.
 DisplayPort Multi-Stream Topology (MST) Technology: Supports various combinations of display resolutions and number of displays when using DisplayPort multi stream topology technology - up to a maximum of 4 monitors at a resolution of 1920 × 1200 at 60 Hz with reduced blanking.

2. DVI-D Output
 Drives four digital displays at resolutions up to 1920 × 1200 at 60 Hz with reduced blanking using DisplayPort to DVI-D single-link cable adaptors.
 Drives four digital displays at resolutions up to 2560× 1600 at 60 Hz with reduced blanking using DisplayPort to DVI-D dual-link cable adaptors.

3. HDMI Output
 The NVS 510 graphics board is capable of driving four high definition (HD) panels up to resolutions of 1920 × 1080P at 60 Hz using DisplayPort to HDMI cable adaptors.

Analog Display Support

1. VGA display output
 Drives four analog displays at resolutions up to 1920 × 1200 at 60 Hz using DisplayPort to VGA cable adaptors.

Supported Graphics APIs Full Microsoft DirectX 11, Shader Model 5.0 support

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 875 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Graphics
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 25 Full OpenGL 4.3 support
Power consumption 33.4 Watts
Note Heatsink cooler design is active
HP DisplayPort to HDMI Adapter
Connectors DisplayPort plug and HDMI receptiacle
Adapter length 8.0 in (20.0 cm)
Adapter weight .10 lbs (.05 kg)
HP DisplayPort to DVI-D Adapter
Connectors DisplayPort and DVI-D single link connector
Adapter length 7.5 in (19.0 cm)
Adapter weight .10 lbs (.05 kg)
HP DisplayPort to VGA Adapter
Connectors DisplayPort and VGA connector
Adapter length 8 in (20 cm)
Adapter weight .1 lbs (.06 kg)
Max. vertical refresh rate 85 Hz
Display support 162 MHz RAMDAC
Display max resolution 1600x1200
Resolutions Supported Resolution Max refresh rate
640x480 85
800x600 85
1024x768 85
1280x720 85
1280x1024 85
1440x900 75
1600x1200 60
1680x1050 60
1920x1080 60-R
1920x1200 60-R
NOTE:

Other resolutions may be available but are not recommended as they may not have been tested and qualified by HP. Using the HP DisplayPort to VGA Adapter may require an update to the graphics driver installed on your system. To install the most up-to-date graphics driver go to:
www.hp.com.

NOTE:
60-R denotes reduced blanking timings are used. Not all monitors support reduced blanking timing.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 876 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Data Storage Drives
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 26 Introduction:

HP Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) Hard Drives maximize the performance of HP Retail Systems by providing the technologies to meet your increasing storage demands with high-capacity drives offering superior reliability and performance.

SATA provides faster data transfer speeds, better system cooling airflow, more bandwidth, more headroom for speed increases in future generations and better data integrity. A next-generation technology, the SATA interface connects hard drives to the Retail System platform enabling easy aggregation of multiple hard drives into a single Retail System. This offers you the additional benefits of dedicated bandwidth, the ability to more easily identify device failures and scalability. The HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810 supports the latest SATA 6.0Gb/s specification.

HP Drive Lock
HP Serial ATA Hard Drives offer enhanced security via a new Drive Lock. When enabled, this ATA security feature set prevents software access to user data on the drive until one or two user-defined passwords are provided.

SMART IV Technology
Self Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology (SMART) hard drive technology allows hard drives to monitor their own health and to raise flags if imminent failures are predicted. If the drive determines that a failure is imminent, the SMART hard drive technology enables the intelligent manageability or management software to generate a fault alert. While the current versions of SMART hard drives do a good job monitoring the data on the hard drive media, the ever increasing emphasis on reliability and quality has promoted HP to implement SMART IV technology which constantly checks that the data flow from host interface to media and media to host interface is not compromised. This is accomplished by inserting a 2 byte parity code into every 512 byte block in the data path of the hard drive's Cache RAM. This unique parity checking performed by HP's SMART IV technology hard drives, allows for more complete error detection coverage encompassing the entire data path between the host and the hard drive.

Smart IV is also known as IOEDC: I/O Error Detection Code.

Native Command Queuing
NCQ or Native Command Queuing is a SATA protocol extension that allows the hard drive to have several write or read commands outstanding at the same time. In contrast, normal non-queued operation requires each command to be completed before the next command is issued by the host system. Queuing allows the drive to complete the commands in the order that allows for best overall throughput. It also involves an advanced method of transferring data to or from the host, called First Party Direct Memory Access (FPDMA), which allows the hard drive and the host controller to manage the data transfers for multiple outstanding commands, without involving the host processor. NCQ can contribute to better performance but the results are dependent on many factors, including the access patterns of the various applications and operating system functions that are initiating drive accesses. Enabling NCQ features in the hard drive requires AHCI support from the host system BIOS, controller, and driver. AHCI support is typically implemented in RAID configurations.

NOTE: GB = 1 billion bytes. Actual available capacity is less.

HP Solid State Drives
HP 32GB SATA Solid State Drive (2.5” with caddy)
Capacity 32,017,047,552 bytes
Interface Serial ATA (SATA) 3.0
Synchronous Transfer Rate
(maximum)
Up to 6 Gb/s

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 877 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Data Storage Drives
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 27 Logical Blocks 62,533,296
Height (nominal) 7mm
Width (nominal) Physical size: 70mm
Operating Temperature 0° to 70° C
HP 64GB SATA Solid State Drive (2.5” with caddy)
Capacity 63,023,063,040 bytes
Interface Serial ATA (SATA) 3.0
Synchronous Transfer Rate
(maximum)
Up to 6 Gb/s
Logical Blocks 123,091,920
Height (nominal) 7mm
Width (nominal) Physical size: 70mm
Operating Temperature 0° to 70° C
HP 128GB SATA Solid State Drive (2.5” with caddy)
Capacity 128,035,676,160 bytes
Interface Serial ATA (SATA) 3.0
Synchronous Transfer Rate
(maximum)
Up to 6 Gb/s
Buffer Size 256 MB
Logical Blocks 250,069,680
Height (nominal) 7mm
Width (nominal) Physical size: 70mm
Operating Temperature 0° to 70° C
HP 256GB SATA Solid State Drive (2.5” with caddy)
Capacity 256,060,514,304 bytes
Interface Serial ATA (SATA) 3.0
Synchronous Transfer Rate
(maximum)
Up to 6 Gb/s
Buffer Size 256 MB
Logical Blocks 500,118,192
Height (nominal) 7mm
Width (nominal) Physical size: 70mm
Operating Temperature 0° to 70° C
HP 512GB Solid State Drive (2.5” with caddy)
Capacity 512,110,190,592 bytes
Interface Serial ATA (SATA) 3.0
Synchronous Transfer Rate
(maximum)
Up to 6 Gb/s

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 878 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Data Storage Drives
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 28 Buffer Size 512 MB
Logical Blocks 1,000,215,216
Height (nominal) 7mm
Width (nominal) Physical size: 70mm
Operating Temperature 0° to 70° C
HP 128GB SATA SED Solid State Drive (2.5” with caddy)
Capacity 128,035,676,160 bytes
Interface Serial ATA (SATA) 3.0
Synchronous Transfer Rate
(maximum)
Up to 6 Gb/s
Buffer Size 256 MB
Logical Blocks 250,069,680
Height (nominal) 7mm
Width (nominal) Physical size: 70mm
Operating Temperature 0° to 70° C
HP 128 GB* M.2 PCIe SSD
Unformatted Capacity 128 GB*
Architecture NAND Flash Memory which has a high reliability and a high technology in a small form factor for using a SSD and supporting PCIe interface up to 4 lanes.

Form Factor PCIe SATAe Ultrathin
Dimensions
(Width x Length x Thickness) .899 x 3.149 x .146 in (22 x 80 x 3.73 mm) Bandwidth Performance -
Performance measured using
IOMeter 2008 on Windows 8
64bit. Actual performance may
vary depending on use
conditions and environment.

Sustained Sequential Read (128KB): Up to 920 MB/ss
Sustained Sequential Write (128KB): Up to 430 MB/s
Random Read (4KB): up to 8500 IOPs
Random Write (4KB): up to 32000 IOPs
Power
Allowable voltage 3.3V ± 5%
Total power consumption: 5.8 W (Active) ; 80 mW; (Idle) MTBF 1.5 M hours
Environmental
(all conditions, noncondensing)
Operating Temperature: 32° to 158° F (0° to 70° C)
Relative Humidity (operating): 5% to 95%
Shock: 1,500 G
Regulations
Safety TUV UL CB c-UL-us TUV
UL CB
c-UL-us
TUV

EMC/EMI CE (EU)
BSMI (Taiwan)
KCC (South Korea)

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 879 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Data Storage Drives
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 29 VCCI (Japan)
C-Tick (Austrailia)

FCC (USA)
* For solid state disk drives, GB means 1 billion bytes. Actual formatted capacity is less. Up to 16GB for Windows 7 and up to 36GB for Windows 8.1 is reserved for system recovery software. ** The product achieves a mean time between failure (MTBF) based on population statistics not relevant to individual units.

HP 256GB SATA SED Solid State Drive (2.5” with caddy)
Capacity 256,060,514,304 bytes
Interface Serial ATA (SATA) 3.0
Synchronous Transfer Rate
(maximum)
Up to 6 Gb/s
Buffer Size 256 MB
Logical Blocks 500,118,192
Height (nominal) 7mm
Width (nominal) Physical size: 70mm
Operating Temperature 0° to 70° C
HP 500GB Hard Disk Drive (2.5” with caddy)
Capacity 500,107,862,016 bytes
Rotational Speed 7,200 rpm
Interface Serial ATA (SATA) 3.0
Synchronous Transfer Rate
(maximum)
Up to 6 GB/s
Buffer Size 16 MB
Logical Blocks 976,773,168
Seek Time (typical reads,
includes controller overhead,
including settling)
Single Track: 2.0 ms
Average: 13 ms
Full-Stroke: 25 ms
Height (nominal) 0.374 in/9.5 mm
Width (nominal) Media diameter: 2.5 in/63.5 mm
Physical size: 2.75 in/69.85 mm
Operating Temperature 41° to 131° F
5° to 55° C
HP 500GB SED Hard Disk Drive (2.5” with caddy)
Capacity 500,107,862,016 bytes
Rotational Speed 7,200 rpm
Interface Serial ATA (SATA) 3.0
Synchronous Transfer Rate
(maximum)
Up to 6 GB/s
Buffer Size 32 MB
Logical Blocks 976,773,168

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 880 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Data Storage Drives
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 30 Seek Time (typical reads,
includes controller overhead,
including settling)
Single Track: 2.0 ms
Average: 13 ms
Full-Stroke: 25 ms
Height (nominal) 0.267 in/6.8 mm
Width (nominal) Media diameter: 2.5 in/63.5 mm
Physical size: 2.75 in/69.85 mm
Operating Temperature 41° to 131° F
5° to 55° C
HP 500GB Hard Disk Drive (3.5”)
Capacity 500,107,862,016 bytes
Rotational Speed 7,200 rpm
Interface Serial ATA (SATA) 3.0
Synchronous Transfer Rate
(maximum)
Up to 6 GB/s
Buffer Size 16 MB
Logical Blocks 976,773,168
Seek Time (typical reads,
includes controller overhead,
including settling)
Single Track: 2.0 ms
Average: 11 ms
Full-Stroke: 21 ms
Height (nominal) 1 in/25.4 mm
Width (nominal) Media diameter: 3.5 in/88.9 mm
Physical size: 4 in/101.6 mm
Operating Temperature 41° to 131° F
5° to 55° C
HP 1TB Hard Disk Drive (3.5”)
Capacity 1,000,204,886,016 bytes
Rotational Speed 7,200 rpm
Interface Serial ATA (SATA) 3.0
Synchronous Transfer Rate
(maximum)
Up to 6 GB/s
Buffer Size 32 MB
Logical Blocks 1,953,525,168
Seek Time (typical reads,
includes controller overhead,
including settling)
Single Track: 2.0 ms
Average: 11 ms
Full-Stroke: 21 ms
Height (nominal) 1 in/25.4 mm
Width (nominal) Media diameter: 3.5 in/88.9 mm
Physical size: 4 in/101.6 mm
Operating Temperature 41° to 131° F
5° to 55° C

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 881 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Data Storage Drives
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 31 HP 2TB Hard Disk Drive (3.5”)
Capacity 2,000,409,772,032 bytes
Rotational Speed 7,200 rpm
Interface Serial ATA (SATA) 3.0
Synchronous Transfer Rate
(maximum)
Up to 6 GB/s
Buffer Size 64 MB
Logical Blocks 3,907,050,336
Seek Time (typical reads,
includes controller overhead,
including settling)
Single Track: 2.0 ms
Average: 11 ms
Full-Stroke: 21 ms
Height (nominal) 1 in/25.4 mm
Width (nominal) Media diameter: 3.5 in/88.9 mm
Physical size: 4 in/101.6 mm
Operating Temperature 41° to 131° F
5° to 55° C
HP Removable SATA Hard Drive Enclosure
Introduction
The HP Removable Hard Drive Enclosure supports up to 3 Gb/s SATA transfer rates along with Gold DIN connectors that are rated for 30,000 insertions and removals. Robust all-metal construction provides superior cooling while protecting the hard drive during transportation and storage. A powered key lock prevents theft or accidental removal during operation and a temperature sensing fan ensures sufficient airflow across the hard drive based on workload.

The HP Removable SATA Hard Drive Enclosure consists of two components; a receiving frame and a removable drive carrier. Install the receiving frame into the 5.25" optical storage bay and then relocate your primary system hard drive or secondary hard drive to the removable drive carrier. Then insert the drive carrier into the receiving frame and you have a fully configured removable hard drive.

Interface Type Compatible with 3.5” SATA controllers
Dimensions (W x L x H) 5.73 x 7.87 x 1.61 in (14.6 x 20 x 4.1 cm) Weight 1.56 lbs (707 g) (not including hard drive)
HP DX115 Removable Drive Enclosure
Introduction
The HP DX115 Removable Enclosure is a rugged drive carrier and receiving frame for internally mounting a SATA hard drive into the 5.25 inch optical drive bay in the HP RP5 Retail System.

The DX115 supports one 3.5" SATA (Serial ATA) hard disk drive.  HP DX115 Removable HDD Frame/Carrier - A receiving frame and carrier for a SATA hard disk drive. The receiving frame installs in one of the 5.25" optical bays in the HP RP5 Retail System. The carrier holds the HDD and has a quick release handle for insertion/removal. You can install any HP supported 3.5" disk in the carrier.  HP DX115 Removable HDD Carrier - Use this carrier for adding spare or additional drives. Hard Drive purchased separately.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 882 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Data Storage Drives
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 32 Performance and Features
Enclosure with centered drive carrier ensures no interference with the system bezel. Drive spin/power up/down button. Power, spin & fan failure indicator. Drive activity indicator (system-dependent). "Soft Start" circuitry & anti-static device protection.

Cable-less drive connector. Rugged construction; drive is protected in the event of physical trauma. Mating connectors provide 25K insertion rating for multiple insertions and removals. Integrated fan assures proper drive cooling. Key lock functions independently from drive power
Interface Type Compatible with 3.5” SATA controllers
Dimensions (W x H x D) 147.6mm W x 41.1mm H x 205mm L
(5.81” W x 1.62” H x 8.08” L)
Weight Frame and Carrier: 1.73 kg (3.8 lbs)
Carrier: 0.45 kg (1 lbs)

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 883 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Input/Output Devices
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 33 HP DVD-ROM Drive
Height 5.25-inch, half-height, tray-load
Orientation Either horizontal or vertical
Interface type SATA/ATAPI
Disc capacity Single layer: Up to 4.7 GB (6 times capacity of CD-ROM) Double layer: Up to 8.5 GB (12 times capacity of CD-ROM) Dimensions (W x H x D) 5.9 x 1.7 x 8.0 in (15.0 x 4.4 x 20.3 cm) Weight (max) 2.6 lb (1.2 kg)
Read speeds DVD+R/-R/+RW/
-RW/+R DL /-R DL
Up to 8X
DVD-ROM Up to 16X
DVD-RAM Up to 5X
CD-ROM, CD-R Up to 40X
CD-RW Up to 32X
Removable Storage - Media
Compatibility - DVD-ROM
Media Read Write
CD-ROM Yes No
CD-R Yes No
CD-RW Yes No
DVD-ROM Yes No
DVD-ROM DL Yes No
DVD-RAM Yes No
DVD+R Yes No
DVD+R DL Yes No
DVD+RW Yes No
DVD-R Yes No
DVD-RW Yes No
DVD-R DL Yes No
Access times
(typical reads, including
setting)
Random DVD: < 140 ms (typical), CD: < 125 ms (typical)
Full Stroke DVD: < 250 ms (seek), CD: < 210 ms (seek)
Cache Buffer 2 MB (minimum)
Data Transfer Modes ATA PIO mode 4 (16.7 MB/s); ATA Multi-word DMA mode 2 (16.7 MB/s); ATA UltraDMA Mode 3 (44.4 MB/s -default)
Power Source SATA DC power receptacle
DC Power Requirement 5 VDC ± 5%-100 mV ripple p-p
12 VDC ± 5%-200 mV ripple p-p

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 884 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Input/Output Devices
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 34 DC Current 5 VDC - <1000 mA typical, < 1600 mA maximum
12 VDC -< 600 mA typical, < 1400 mA maximum
Environmental
(all conditions
non-condensing)
Temperature 41° to 122° F (5° to 50° C)
Relative Humidity 10% to 90%
Maximum Wet Bulb
Temperature
86° F (30° C)
HP USB Standard Keyboard for Retail
Physical characteristics Keys 104, 105, 106, 107, 109 layout (depending upon country) Dimensions (L x W x H) 18.0 x 6.4 x 0.98 in (45.8 x 16.3 x 2.5 cm) Weight 2 lb (0.9 kg) minimum
Electrical Operating voltage + 5VDC ± 5%
Power consumption 50-mA maximum (with three LEDs ON)
System interface USB Type A plug connector
ESD CE level 4, 15-kV air discharge
EMI - RFI Conforms to FCC rules for a Class B computing device Microsoft® PC 99 - 2001 Functionally compliant
Mechanical Languages 38 available
Keycaps Low-profile design
Switch actuation 55-g nominal peak force with tactile feedback Switch life 20 million keystrokes (using Hasco modified tester) Switch type Contamination-resistant switch membrane
Key-leveling mechanisms For all double-wide and greater-length keys Cable length 6 ft (1.8 m)
Microsoft PC 99 - 2001 Mechanically compliant
Acoustics 43-dBA maximum sound pressure level
Environmental Operating temperature 50° to 122° F (10° to 50° C) Non-operating temperature -22° to 140° F (-30° to 60° C) Operating humidity 10% to 90% (non-condensing at ambient) Non-operating humidity 20% to 80% (non-condensing at ambient) Operating shock 40 g, six surfaces
Non-operating shock 80 g, six surfaces
Operating vibration 2-g peak acceleration
Non-operating vibration 4-g peak acceleration

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 885 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Input/Output Devices
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 35 Drop (out of box) 26 in (66 cm) on carpet, six-drop sequence Drop (in box) 42 in (107 cm) on concrete, 16-drop sequence Approvals UL, CSA, FCC, CE Mark, TUV, TUV GS, VCCI, BSMI, C-Tick, MIC Ergonomic compliance ANSI HFS 100, ISO 9241-4, and TUVGS Kit contents Keyboard Installation Guide
Warranty Card Safety and Comfort Guide
HP PS/2 Standard Keyboard for Retail
Physical characteristics Keys 104, 105, 106, 107, 109 layout (depending upon country) Dimensions (L x W x H) 18.0 x 6.4 x 0.98 in (45.8 x 16.3 x 2.5 cm) Weight 2 lb (0.9 kg) minimum
Electrical Operating voltage + 5VDC ± 5%
Power consumption 50-mA maximum (with three LEDs ON)
System interface PS/2 6-pin mini din connector
ESD CE level 4, 15-kV air discharge
EMI - RFI Conforms to FCC rules for a Class B computing device Microsoft® PC 99 - 2001 Functionally compliant
Mechanical Languages 38 available
Keycaps Low-profile design
Switch actuation 55-g nominal peak force with tactile feedback Switch life 20 million keystrokes (using Hasco modified tester) Switch type Contamination-resistant switch membrane
Key-leveling mechanisms For all double-wide and greater-length keys Cable length 6 ft (1.8 m)
Microsoft PC 99 - 2001 Mechanically compliant
Acoustics 43-dBA maximum sound pressure level
Environmental Operating temperature 50° to 122° F (10° to 50° C) Non-operating temperature -22° to 140° F (-30° to 60° C) Operating humidity 10% to 90% (non-condensing at ambient) Non-operating humidity 20% to 80% (non-condensing at ambient) Operating shock 40 g, six surfaces
Non-operating shock 80 g, six surfaces
Operating vibration 2-g peak acceleration
Non-operating vibration 4-g peak acceleration

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 886 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Input/Output Devices
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 36 Drop (out of box) 26 in (66 cm) on carpet, six-drop sequence Drop (in box) 42 in (107 cm) on concrete, 16-drop sequence Approvals UL, CSA, FCC, CE Mark, TUV, TUV GS, VCCI, BSMI, C-Tick, MIC Ergonomic compliance ANSI HFS 100, ISO 9241-4, and TUVGS HP PS/2 Optical Mouse
Dimensions (H x L x W) 1.46 x 2.48 x 4.53 in (3.70 x 6.29 x 11.50 cm) Weight 3.53 oz (100g; +10g/- 5 g)
Environmental Operating temperature 32° to 104°F (0° to 40° C) Non-operating temperature -4° to 140°F (-20° to 60° C)
Operating humidity 10% to 90% (non condensing at ambient) Non-operating humidity 10% to 90% (non condensing)
Operating shock 40 g, 6 surfaces
Non-operating shock 80 g, 6 surfaces
Operating vibration 2 g peak acceleration
Non-operating vibration 4 g peak acceleration
Drop
(out of box)
80 cm height onto asphalt tile over concrete or equivalent, 5- drop in 5 direction except the cable face
Electrical Operating voltage 5 VDC ± 10%
Power consumption 100mA
System consumption PS/2 mini-din connector
ESD CE level 4, 15 kV air discharge
EMI-RFI Conforms to FCC rules for a Class B computing device Microsoft PC99 - 2001 Functionally compliant
Mechanical Resolution 800 DPI
Tracking speed 10 in/s (25.4 cm/s) maximum
Acceleration ± 15%
Switch actuation 65±20 gf
Switch life 3,000,000 operations (using Hasco modified tester) Switch type Low force micro-switches
Tracking mechanism life 80km
Cable length 6 ft (1.8 m)

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 887 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Input/Output Devices
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 37 Microsoft PC99 - 2001 Mechanically compliant
Scroll wheel Width 6 mm
Diameter 22.5 ± 0.2 mm
Maximum rotation speed 50 gf-cm
Switch type Light force micro-switch
Switch life 1 million operations
Mechanical life Max 200,000 revolutions
Regulatory Approvals UL/cUL, FCC, CE Mark, TUV/GS, VCCI, KCC, BSMI, C-Tick Compatibility Operating system support Windows 8, Windows 8 Pro, Windows 7, Windows 7 Professional, Windows Vista Business 64*, Windows Vista Business 32*, Windows Vista Home Basic 32*, Windows XP
Professional or Windows XP Home 32* (no driver is required for this device. Native support is provided by the operating system.), xpe, ce.net, Linux, XP-64
*Certain Windows Vista product features require advanced or additional hardware. Windows Vista Upgrade Advisor can help you determine which features of Windows Vista will run on your computer. To download the tool, visit http://www.windowsvista.com/upgradeadvisor. For Windows Vista system requirements, visit
http://www.windowsvista.com/systemrequirements.

HP USB Optical Mouse
Dimensions (H x L x W) 1.5x 4.5 x 2.5 in (3. 7x 11.5 x 6.3 cm) Weight 0.22 lb (0.10 kg) (Typical weight with cable)
Cable length 70.9 in (180 cm)
System requirements Windows 8, Windows 8 Pro, Windows 7, Windows 7 Professional, Windows Vista Business 64*, Windows Vista Business 32*, Windows Vista Home Basic 32*, Windows 2000, Windows XP Professional or Windows XP Home 32* (No driver is required for this device. Native support is provided by the operating system.), xpe, ce.net, Linux, XP-64

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 888 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Environmental Data
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 38 Eco-Label Certifications &
declarations
This product has received or is in the process of being certified to the following approvals and may be labeled with one or more of these marks:
 US ENERGY STAR ®
 IT ECO declaration
 EPEAT Gold registered in the United States. See http://www.epeat.net for registration status in your country.

Energy Consumption 115 VAC 230 VAC 100 VAC
Normal Operation 38.55W 38.62W 38.42W
Sleep (Energy Star low power
mode)

2.65W 2.90W 2.70W
Off 0.93W 1.12W 0.92W
NOTE:

Energy efficiency data listed is for an ENERGY STAR® compliant product if offered within the model family. HP computers marked with the ENERGY STAR® Logo are compliant with the applicable U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR® specifications for computers. If a model family does not offer ENERGY STAR® compliant configurations, then energy efficiency data listed is for a typically configured model.

Heat Dissipation* 115 VAC 230 VAC 100 VAC
Normal Operation 132 BTU/hr 132 BTU/hr 131 BTU/hr
Sleep 9 BTU/hr 10 BTU/hr 9 BTU/hr
Off 3 BTU/hr 4 BTU/hr 3 BTU/hr
* Heat dissipation is calculated based on the measured watts, assuming the service level is attained for one hour.

Declared Noise Emissions
(in accordance with
ISO 7779 and ISO 9296)
System Fan Off Sound Power
(LWAd, bels)
Sound Pressure
(LpAm, decibels)
Idle 3.7 28
Fixed Disk
(random writes)

3.8 29
Batteries This battery(s) in this product comply with EU Directive 2006/66/EC Batteries used in the product do not contain:
 Mercury greater the 5ppm by weight
 Cadmium greater than 10ppm by weight
Battery size: CR2032 (coin cell)
Battery type: Lithium

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 889 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Environmental Data
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 39 Additional information  This product is in compliance with the Restrictions of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) directive – 2002/95/EC.
 This HP product is designed to comply with the Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive – 2002/96/EC.
 This product is in compliance with California Proposition 65 (State of California; Safe Drinking Water and Toxic Enforcement Act of 1986).
 This product is in compliance with the IEEE 1680 (EPEAT) standard at the Gold where HP registers commercial desktop products. See http://www.epeat.net for registration status in your country.
 Plastics parts weighing over 25 grams used in the product are marked per ISO 11469 and ISO1043.
 This product contains 7.5% post consumer recycled plastic (by wt.)  This product is 91.3% recyclable when properly disposed of at end of life.

Packaging Materials
 External:
o Corrugated – 1320 g
 Internal:
o Polyethylene low density foam – 196 g
 The corrugated packaging material varies in recycled content:
o North America – at least 25% recycled content
o Asia – at least 62% recycled content (Singapore at least 80%) o Europe – at least 50% recycled content
 The Polyethylene low density Foam packaging material varies in recycled content:
o North America – 100% (Pre-consumer or Post-industrial) o Asia – 10%
o Europe – 7%
RoHS Compliance Hewlett-Packard is committed to compliance with all applicable environmental laws and regulations, including the European Union Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive.

HP's goal is to exceed compliance obligations by meeting the requirements of the RoHS Directive on a worldwide basis. By July 1, 2006, RoHS substances will be virtually eliminated (virtually = to levels below legal limits) for all HP electronic products subject to the RoHS Directive, except where it is widely recognized that there is no technically feasible alternative (as indicated by an exemption under the EU RoHS Directive).

Material Usage This product does not contain any of the following substances in excess of regulatory limits (refer to the HP General Specification for the Environment at:
http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/supplychain/gen_specifications.html):
 Asbestos
 Certain Azo Colorants
 Certain Brominated Flame Retardants – may not be used as flame retardants in plastics  Cadmium
 Chlorinated Hydrocarbons
 Chlorinated Paraffins
 Formaldehyde
 Halogenated Diphenyl Methanes
 Lead carbonates and sulfates
 Lead and Lead compounds
 Mercuric Oxide Batteries
 Ozone Depleting Substances

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 890 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Environmental Data
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 40  Polybrominated Biphenyls (PBBs)
 Polybrominated Biphenyl Ethers (PBBEs)
 Polybrominated Biphenyl Oxides (PBBOs)
 Polychlorinated Biphenyl (PCB)
 Polychlorinated Terphenyls (PCT)
 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) – except for wires and cables, and certain retail packaging has been voluntarily removed from most applications.
 Radioactive Substances
 Tributyl Tin (TBT), Triphenyl Tin (TPT), Tributyl Tin Oxide (TBTO)  Nickel finishes that release greater than 0.5 micro-grams/cm2/week, measured according to EN 1811:1998, are not used on any product surface designed to be frequently handled or touched by users.

Packaging HP follows these guidelines to decrease the environmental impact of product packaging:
 Eliminate the use of heavy metals such as lead, chromium, mercury and cadmium in packaging materials.
 Eliminate the use of ozone-depleting substances (ODS) in packaging materials.  Design packaging materials for ease of disassembly.
 Maximize the use of post-consumer recycled content materials in packaging materials.  Use readily recyclable packaging materials such as paper and corrugated materials.  Reduce size and weight of packages to improve transportation fuel efficiency.  Plastic packaging materials are marked according to ISO 11469 and DIN 6120 standards.

End-of-life Management
and Recycling
Hewlett-Packard offers end-of-life HP product return and recycling programs in many geographic areas. To recycle your product, please go to: http://www.hp.com/go/reuse-recycle or contact your nearest HP sales office. Products returned to HP will be recycled, recovered or disposed of in a responsible manner.

The EU WEEE directive (2002/95/EC) requires manufacturers to provide treatment information for each product type for use by treatment facilities. This information (product disassembly instructions) is posted on the Hewlett Packard web site at: http://www.hp.com/go/recyclers.

These instructions may be used by recyclers and other WEEE treatment facilities as well as HP OEM customers who integrate and re-sell HP equipment.

Hewlett-Packard Corporate
Environmental Information
For more information about HP's commitment to the environment:

Global Citizenship Report
http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/gcreport/index.html Eco-label certifications
http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdesign/ecolabels.html ISO 14001 certificates:
http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/operations/envmanagement.html

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 891 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
After-Market Options (availability may vary by region)
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 41 Communication Devices
Part #
Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet Plus NIC FS215AA
Intel Ethernet I210-T1 GbE NIC E0X95AA
Intel 7260 802.11 a/b/g/n PCIe x1 WLAN Card F2P07AA
NOTE:

The use of a discrete network interface connection card (wired or wireless) will disable the vPro Technology features.

Graphics Solutions
Part #
NVIDIA NVS 315 1GB Graphics Card E1U66AA
NVIDIA NVS 510 2GB Graphics Card C2J98AA
HP DMS59 DVI Dual-head Connector Cable DL139A
HP DMS-59 to Dual DisplayPort Adapter XP688AA
HP DisplayPort Cable Kit VN567AA
HP DisplayPort To Dual Link DVI-D Adapter NR078AA
HP DisplayPort To DVI-D Adapter FH973AA
HP DisplayPort to HDMI Adapter BP937AA
HP DisplayPort to VGA Adapter AS615AA
HP USB Graphics Adapter NL571AA
Hard Disk Storage Drives
Part #
HP 500GB SATA (6.0Gb/s) Hard Disk Drive QK554AA
HP 1TB SATA (6.0Gb/s) Hard Disk Drive QK555AA
HP 128GB Solid State Drive QV063AA
128GB M.2 PCIe SSD J8W51AV
HP DX115 Removable HDD Frame/Carrier FZ576AA
HP DX115 Removable HDD Carrier NB792AA
HP Removable SATA Hard Drive Enclosure (frame & carrier) RY102AA HP Removable SATA Hard Drive Enclosure (carrier only) RY103AA Input / Output Devices
Part #
HP PS/2 Standard Keyboard for Retail J4A10AA
HP USB Standard Keyboard for Retail J4A11AA
HP 2-port Powered Serial Port Card QP906AA
HP 12V PUSB Entry Card QP905AA
HP PS/2 Optical Mouse QY775AA
HP USB Optical Mouse QY777AA
System Memory
Part #

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 892 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
After-Market Options (availability may vary by region)
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 42 HP 4GB DDR3-1600 MHz DIMM B4U36AA
HP 8GB DDR3-1600 MHz DIMM B4U37AA
Multimedia Devices
Part #
HP DVD-ROM Drive AR629AA
HP SuperMulti Drive QS208AA
HP Blu-ray Writer Drive B4F70AA
Security Devices
Part #
HP Chassis Security Kit AR639AA
HP Business PC Security Lock PV606AA
HP Wall Mount/Security Sleeve VN570AA
Accessories
Part #
HP rp5800 Trim Bezel – with ODD Opening QP910AA
HP Integrated Work Center Stand QP897AA
HP Tower Stand VN569AA
HP Serial Port Adapter PA716A
HP Parallel Port Adapter KD061AA
HP Rear Port / Cable Control Cover QP909AA
Retail Solutions Specific Accessories
Part #
HP Standard Duty Cash Drawer QT457AA
HP USB Standard Duty Cash Drawer E8E45AA
HP Heavy Duty Cash Drawer FK182AA
HP Flip-Top Cash Drawer BW867AA
HP Till with Locking Cover QT458AA
HP Flip-Top Till with Locking Cover BZ335AA
HP Imaging Barcode Scanner BW868AA
HP Imaging Barcode Scanner 7-foot Cable BZ337AA
HP Linear Barcode Scanner QY405AA
HP Presentation Barcode Scanner QY439AA
HP Wireless Barcode Scanner E6P34AA
HP POS Pole Display FK225AA
HP Graphical Pole Display QZ704AA
HP Mini MSR with Brackets FK186AA
HP POS Keyboard without MSR FK221AA
HP POS Keyboard with MSR FK218AA
HP Powered USB Thermal Receipt Printer FK224AA
HP Serial/USB Thermal Receipt Printer BM476AA

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 893 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
After-Market Options (availability may vary by region)
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 43 HP Hybrid POS Printer with MICR FK184AA
Epson H6000IV Hybrid POS Printer D9Z51AA
Epson T88V PUSB Receipt Printer E1Q93AA
EpsonT88V Serial USB Receipt Printer D9Z52AA
HP Value PUSB Receipt Printer F7M67AA
HP Value Serial/USB Receipt Printer F7M66AA
HP USB Y Cable (for Serial USB Receipt Printer) BM477AA HP Cable Pack for Dual Cash Drawers QT538AA
HP L5006tm 15-inch LCD (SAW) Touchscreen Monitor RB146AA HP L5009tm 15-inch LCD (APR) Touchscreen Monitor VK202AA HP L1506x 15-inch LED Monitor (Non-Touchscreen) LL543AA HP L6010 10.4-inch Monitor (Non-Touchscreen) A1X76AA
HP Dual Position Stand for L6010 A1X79AA
HP L6015tm 15-inch (PCAP) Touchscreen Monitor A1X78AA
HP L6017tm 17-inch (PCAP) Touchscreen Monitor A1X77AA
HP Height Adjusting Stand for L6015/17tm A1X81AA
HP Integrated Barcode Scanner E1L07AA
HP Retail Integrated Fingerprint Reader QZ672AA
HP Retail Integrated Webcam QZ673AA
HP Retail Integrated Dual-Head MSR QZ700AA
HP rp5800 Terminal Enclosure Assembly QQ971AA
HP rp5800 Integration Tray Assembly QQ972AA
HP Display Pole Mount Assembly QQ973AA
HP Optional Display Arm Assembly QQ974AA

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 894 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Summary of Changes
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 44 Date of change: Version History: Description of change:

May 16, 2014 V7 May Changed
Added Add document ID to footnotes section, LCD Pole Display and 7-in CFD
December 8, 2014 From v7 to v8 Added Intel Core i3-4150, 128GB M.2 PCIe SSD

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 895 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 45 Copyright © 2014 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.

All rights reserved. Microsoft, Windows 8.1, Windows 7, and Windows POSReady 7 are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. Intel, Core, and Pentium are registered trademarks or trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., in the U.S. and other countries. All other product names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective companies.

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is provided "as is" without warranty of any kind. The warranties for HP products are set forth in the express limited warranty statements accompanying such products. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 896 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) hidglobal.com

PHYSICAL ACCESS SOLUTIONS
ProxCard® II Card
Durable, Value Priced Proximity Access Card
THE RF-PROGRAMMABLE PROXCARD® II PROXIMITY
ACCESS CARD IS THE INDUSTRY CHOICE FOR A COSTEFFECTIVE SOLUTION TO PROXIMITY ACCESS CONTROL. Proven, Reliable Technology – Offers extremely consistent read range. Unaffected by body shielding or variable
environmental conditions, even when close to keys and coins. Convenient To Use – Can fit into a wallet or purse. Use with a strap and clip as a photo ID badge.
Cross-reference – A cross-reference list correlating the external card number and the programmed ID number is provided for easy system administration.
Security – Offers over 137 billion unique codes.
Long Life – Passive, no-battery design allows for an infinite number of reads.
Durability – Strong, flexible and resistant to cracking and breaking.
Companion Products– 1321 Photo pouch overlay
1324 PVC Direct print overlay
The RF-programmable ProxCard® II proximity access card is the industry choice for a cost-effective solution to proximity access control.

Features:
Offers universal
compatibility with all
HID proximity readers.
Provides durable
packaging and
consistent read range.
Provides an external
number for easy
identification and
control.
Supports formats up to
85 bits, with over 137
billion codes.
Custom pre-printed
artwork available.
A PVC overlay allows
for on-site photo ID
using most direct image
printers.
Using HID’s
ProxProgrammer®,
card vendors can
ship ProxCard II
proximity cards,
custom programmed
to their customers’
requirements, from their
own inventory. Enables
smaller order quantities
and overnight delivery.
(Check with vendor for
availablilty.)

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 897 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

SPECIFICATIONS
© 2011 HID Global Corporation. All rights reserved. HID, the HID logo, ProxCard logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HID Global in the U.S. and/or other countries. All other trademarks, service marks and product or service names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
2012-05-14-hid-proxcardii-cards-ds-en
North America: +1 949 732 2000
Toll Free: 1 800 237 7769
Europe, Middle East, Africa: +44 1440 714 850
Asia Pacific: +852 3160 9800
Latin America: +52 55 5081 1650
hidglobal.com
ProxCard® II Card
Base Part Number 1326
Typical Maximum*
Read Range
ProxPoint® Plus reader-up to 3” (7.5 cm)
MiniProx® reader-up to 5.5” (14 cm)
ThinLine® II reader-up to 5.5” (14 cm)
ProxPro® reader-up to 8” (20 cm)
ProxPro® II reader-up to 9”(22.9 cm)
Prox80™-up to 5.5” (14 cm)
MaxiProx® reader-up to 24” (60 cm)
Dimensions 2.135” x 3.385” x 0.075” MAX.
(5.4 x 8.6 x 0.19 cm)
Operating
Temperature -50° to 160° F (-45° to 70° C)
Options
External card numbering
(inkjet only; no laser engraving)
Custom artwork (text or graphics)
Weight 0.24 oz. (6.8 gm)
Warranty Lifetime

3.385"
(8.6 cm)

0.075"
(0.19 cm)
MAX.

2.135"
(5.4 cm)
MAX.

NOTES:
*Dependent on local installation conditions.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 898 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) Datasheet Version 2.1/0913 | Errors and omissions excepted | Products may change in the interest of technical improvements without notice. www.commend.com P 1 | 8 Datasheet
Compact and suitable for networks, the GE 300 Intercom
Server is ideal for Intercom systems where small, manageable units are combined to form a network. Each GE 300 acts as an Intercom IP-Server that controls the different interfaces:
interface cards for speech, control and indication functions and communication with other systems such as video
systems, door and gate control, telephone systems, and
more. The simple modular construction of the basic operating system enables continuous upgrading for new applications and features. The latest design results in the system being physically compact and conforming to the highest standards of electronic reliability. All kinds of Intercom stations, 2‑wire, 4-wire as well as IP-stations, can be connected to the GE 300. Connection of the special GEI 300 interface housing also allows cards from the GE 800 to be used.

Compact System Intercom IP-Server GE 300

1. GE 300
Basic housing including power supply, with five plug-in slots. Up to 40 IP-subscribers (or 20 analogue or 20 digital). One AF input (for music or alarm); two inputs for floating contacts; two relay outputs; configuration via Ethernet or RS 232.

2. GEZ 300
Expansion housing including power supply with 5 plug-in slots.

Up to 80 subscribers together with basic housing. Basic housing required.

3. GEI 300
Interface housing with two slots for G8-interface cards. Basic housing required.

GE 300
1 2
3 4.C.h
Packet Pg. 899 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) GE 300
Datasheet Version 2.1/0913 | Errors and omissions excepted | Products may change in the interest of technical improvements without notice. www.commend.com P 2 | 8 datasheet
Technical Data - Benefits
Benefits
• Compact plastic housing suitable for wall mounting
• Easy installation and start-up
• More than 150 standard features
• Latest Intercom technology
• For all kinds of Intercom stations (IP, digital or analogue) • Digital networking over IP, 2-wire lines, E1 or ISDN
• Integrated functions for door/gate control, alarms,
conferences and central control desks
• Plug&Play CCTV integration
• Flexible expansion by means of different feature packages • Wide range of applications
• User-friendly configuration with PC software (included in extent of supply)
Extent of Supply
• GE 300 / GEZ 300 / GEI 300 incl. short reference, cable bearers, screws and dowels
The types of GE 300 and GEZ 300 differ in extent of supply:
• GE 300, GEZ 300: without power supply unit/transformer • GE 300EU: incl. 24 V DC power supply unit
• GE 300CA: incl. 24 V DC power supply unit with adapters for

AUS, USA, UK
• GEZ 300EU: incl. transformer 230 V Europa
• GEZ 300AU: incl. transformer 230 V AUS
• GEZ 300US: incl. transformer 120 V USA
• GEZ 300UK: incl. transformer 230 V UK
Expansion
Subscribers: Outputs: Inputs:

Basic expansion: 0 2 2
Maximum expansion: see “Plug-in Position of the Cards”
Technical Data GE 300
Power supply: 24 V DC +/–5% / 30 W / 20 subscribers*
Emergency power consumption: 200 mAh (without cards)
cards: see corresponding data sheet
Power consumption: maximum (All Call): 30 W
Frequency range: 50 to 15 kHz (–3 db)
Distortion: less than 0.9%
Operating temperature range: 0° C to +50° C (32° F to 122° F) Storage temperature range: –30° C to +60° C (–22° F to 140° F) Relative humidity: 20% to 80% not condensing
Measurements of the housing: 310 x 210 x 77.5 mm
(12.21 x 8.27 x 3.05 inch)
Weight including package: approx. 1650 g (3.64 lbs)
Mounting: Wall mounting
Relay outputs: max. switching capacity: 60 W / 62.5 VA, max. switching current: 2A
max. switching voltage: 60 VDC / 40 VAC
Music input: max. 800 mVrms at 10 kΩ, 16 kHz
Inputs IN1, IN2: for floating contacts,
max. line resistance: 1.5 kΩ
Technical Data GEZ 300
Power supply: 24 V AC +/–5% / 40 VA / 20 subscribers
24 – 35 V DC / 40 W / 20 subscribers
Emergency power consumption: 200 mAh (without cards)
cards: see corresponding data sheet
Power consumption: maximum (All Call): 40 VA
Frequency range: 50 to 15 kHz (–3 db)
Distortion: less than 0.9%
Operating temperature range: 0° C to +50° C (32° F to 122° F) Storage temperature range: –30° C to +60° C (–22° F to 140° F) Relative humidity: 20% to 80% not condensing
Measurements of the housing: 310 x 210 x 77.5 mm
(12.21 x 8.27 x 3.05 inch)
Weight including package: approx. 2300 g (5 lbs)
Mounting: Wall mounting
*power supply of up to 16 digital subscribers without GEI 300 power supply of up to 12 digital subscribers with GEI 300 (with inserted card)
Options when in need of more digital subscribers:
– using external power supply for the stations – or
– using the 70 W power supply unit C-PA70W24V for the GE 300; has to be ordered separately.

In order to be able to use the full capacity of the power supply unit, an appropriate configuration in CCT 800 is required, therefore see manual GE 300 („Power Management“).

Technical Data GEI 300
Power supply: from GE 300 or GEZ 300
Emergency power consumption: without cards:
no power consumption
Operating temperature range: 0° C to +50° C (32° F to 122° F) Storage temperature range: –30° C to +60° C (–22° F to 140° F) Relative humidity: 20% to 80% not condensing
Measurements of the housing: 310 x 210 x 77.5 mm
(12.21 x 8.27 x 3.05 inch)
Weight including package: approx. 1200 g (2.65 lbs)
Mounting: Wall mounting

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 900 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) GE 300
Datasheet Version 2.1/0913 | Errors and omissions excepted | Products may change in the interest of technical improvements without notice. www.commend.com P 3 | 8 datasheet
Installation
Precautions
• This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
• GEZ 300: Defective power cables of the transformer may not be repaired or changed. In case of defective power cables, the whole transformer must be changed.
• Mounting and installation of the Intercom Server GE 300 and of the equipment may be carried out by authorised service personnel only.
• Cards may be inserted or removed only with voltage switched off.
• Before exchanging of cards, ESD precautions must be observed. The M3 screw nut of the motherboard G3-GEM (see “Mounting, Cable Run” on page 6) is used as grounding point for Wrist Strap Grounding.

Configuraton via IP
The GE 300 Intercom Servers are automatically recognized in local networks by CCT 800 1.3 for configuration (reachable via layer 2).

Configuration via RS232
For configuration of the GE 300 a 9-way D-Submin connection cable is required (1:1, plug on Server side, socket on PC side):

GND 5 5
NC 4 4
NC 6 6
NC 7 7
NC 8 8
NC 9 9
RXD 3 3
TXD 2 2
NC 1 1
GE 300 (9-way D-Submin plug) (9-way D-submin jack) PC
NC = not connected
This cable can be purchased at an electric outfitter or ordered with the type “X-KAB-CCT“.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 901 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) GE 300
Datasheet Version 2.1/0913 | Errors and omissions excepted | Products may change in the interest of technical improvements without notice. www.commend.com P 4 | 8 datasheet
Installation
plug-in cards for ge 300
Subscriber Cards with Speech Storage
G3-IP IP Subscriber Card for up to 8 IP-Intercom stations, basic card for 4 subscribers with feature level B, upgrades to 8 subscribers and feature level C, D or P can be activated by licence keys G3-GED Subscriber Card for 4 digital 2-wire Intercom stations, basic card with feature level B, upgrade to feature level C, D or P can be activated by a licence key
G3-GET Subscriber Card for 4 analogue 4-wire Intercom stations, basic card with feature level B, upgrade to feature level C, D or P can be activated by a licence key
G8-TEL4 * Telephone Subscriber Card with 4 analogue FXS ports e.g. for telephones, card is available in feature level C or D Input/Output Cards
G3-16A Plug-in card with 16 relay outputs (4 of which are make, open or switch over contacts, 12 only as make contacts) G3-16E Plug-in card with 16 inputs for floating contacts, with or without line monitoring.

Read in of 5 operation states (Idle, Active 1, Active 2, Short, Line break) G3-8E8A Plug-in card with 8 inputs for floating contacts and 8 relay outputs (make, open or switch over).

Read in of 5 operation states with inputs (Idle, Active 1, Active 2, Short, Line break) Interface Cards
G8-V24-PRO * Programmable V24-card with 2 RS 232-interfaces, of which one can be configured as RS 422 G3-TEL Telephone interface with one FXO port, e.g. for connection to an analogue subscriber of a telephone system or directly to a standard telephone line
G8-SELCALL * Radio interface for connection of selective-call radio systems to Intercom systems, available for selective tones according to ZVEI and CCIR.

G8-AUD-2 * Digital Audio-Recording-Card with 2 audio channels (IN/OUT) and two relay contacts, basic card in feature level B, upgrade to feature level D can be activated by a licence key G8-AUD-4 * Digital Audio-Recording-Card with 4 audio channels (IN/OUT) and four relay contacts, basic card in feature level B, upgrade to feature level D can be activated by a licence key IP-Networking
G3-LAN GE 300 IP network card for connections via Ethernet, up to 8 LAN-connections, bandwidth for up to 8 simultaneous conversations, music programs or radio channels in full quality HDSL-, ISDN- and Multiplexer-Networking
G8-CNET-W * High-speed network card for connections via 2 wires (multi channel – HDSL) with a length of up to 4 km (2.48 miles), bandwidth for up to 12 conversations, music programs or radio channels, up to 4 Servers in series or 100 Servers in a tree structure G8-CNET-E1 * High-bitrate network card for connections via transmission routes that conform to the E1 standard, connection to multiplexer or media converter, bandwidth for up to 10 conversations, music programs or radio channels, up to 4 Servers in series or 100 Servers in a tree structure
G3-S0-I * Network card for connection via the S0-interface of an ISDN connection, bandwidth for two conversations (G3-S0-I one conversation) between two Servers networked via S0
VoIP-Interfacing
G8-IAX * Interface card for up to 8 trunk connections to VoIP Servers, which support the IAX2 protocol, basic card with 4 connections and feature level B, upgrades to 8 connections and feature level C or D can be activated by licence keys G3-IAX Interface card for up to 4 trunk connections to VoIP Servers, which support the IAX2 protocol, basic card with 2 connections and feature level B, upgrades to 4 connections and feature level C or D can be activated by licence keys G8-VOIPSERV * Server card for trunk connections to VoIP Servers, which support the SIP protocol, or directconnection of SIP telephones as main or substations
G3-IF Powerful interface card with up to 2 virtual TCP/IP-interfaces, standard Commend-Intercom-protocol and 2 RS 232 for connection of extern systems
* For use in a GE 300 IP-Intercom Server these cards require the GEI 300 Interface housing

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 902 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) GE 300
Datasheet Version 2.1/0913 | Errors and omissions excepted | Products may change in the interest of technical improvements without notice. www.commend.com P 5 | 8 datasheet
Installation
Plug-in Position of the Cards
The plug-in cards can be inserted in the following slots:

GE 300 GEZ 300 GEI 300 Maximum number of cards
Card type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 max. per
GE 300
max. per
GEZ 300
max. per
GEI 300
G3-GET           - - 5 5 -
G3-GED           - - 5 5 -
G3-IP           - - 5 5 -
G3-8E8A           - - 5 5 -
G3-16A           - - 5 5 -
G3-16E           - - 5 5 -
G3-TEL           - - 5 5 -
G3-IF           - - 5 5 -
G3-LAN 1           - - together 1 1 -
G3-IAX           - - 5 5 -
G8-IAX - - - - - - - - - -   - - 2
G8-VOIPSERV 3 - - - - - - - - - -   - - 23
G8-V24-PRO - - - - - - - - - -   - - 2
G8-SELCALL 2 - - - - - - - - - -   - - 12
G8-CNET-E1 1 - - - - - - - - - -   - - 21
G8-CNET-W 1 - - - - - - - - - -   - - 21
G8-AUD - - - - - - - - - -   - - 2
G3-S0-I - - - - - - - - - -   - - 2
G8-TEL4 - - - - - - - - - -  - - - 1
1 Only one G3-LAN, one licence L3-LAN-4 or CNET-W/E1 cards may be used simultaneously 2 The second slot of the GEI 300 is occupied by the G8-V24-PRO delivered with the G8-SELCALL 3 Min. G8-VOIPSERV Rev. AB

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 903 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) GE 300
Datasheet Version 2.1/0913 | Errors and omissions excepted | Products may change in the interest of technical improvements without notice. www.commend.com P 6 | 8 datasheet
Installation
Mounting, Cable Run
GEZ 300
GE 300
/ 2
4 /
4 /
A
B
C
D
GEI 300
SW2
+24V
M3
Expansion
housing
RJ11-Socket
Cable bearer Cable bearer
Grounding point
for wrist strap
grounding
max. 120 mm (4.7 inch)
max. 120 mm (4.7 inch) 110 cm
(4.3 inch)
140 cm
(5.5 inch)
290 mm (11.4 inch)
306 mm (12.1 inch)
180 mm (7.1 inch)
206 mm (8.1 inch)
24VAC
supply
Analogue
Digital
Analogue

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 904 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) GE 300
Datasheet Version 2.1/0913 | Errors and omissions excepted | Products may change in the interest of technical improvements without notice. www.commend.com P 7 | 8 datasheet
Installation
Connection Diagram
24 VAC 24 VAC
+30V
1 6
2 7
3 8
4 9
5 10
GE 300
AA
BB
AC
BD
GEI 200
GEI 300
GEZ 300
GEI 300
+
+
-
-
GEZ 300
GEI 300)
G3-16A
G3-GED-4
G3-16A
G3-GET-4
G3-GET-4 G3-GET-4
G3-GET-4 G3-GET-4
G3-GET-4 G3-GET-4
Status-LED
Status-LED
ON
OFF
IP
RS232
IN2
IN1
MUSIC
+24V
M3
OUT1
OUT1 OUT2
OUT2
+
+
-
-
Power
potential free outputs
Slot number
Expansion plug
Expansion plug
Music / Alarm
input
potential free
inputs
Slot number
Slot 11 Slot 12
(or
e.g.
e.g.
e.g.
e.g.
e.g.
e.g.
e.g.
e.g.
e.g.
e.g.
30 VDC
supply
optionally
instead of
24 VAC
optionally:
30 VDC
output
max. 100mA
Attention: For GE 300 and GEZ 300
two separate power supply units
have to be used!

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 905 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) GE 300
Datasheet Version 2.1/0913 | Errors and omissions excepted | Products may change in the interest of technical improvements without notice. www.commend.com P 8 | 8 datasheet

AUSTRIA

SLOVENIA
RUSSIA

HUNGARY
Commend Österreich GmbH
Tel. +43-1-715 30 79
www.commend.at

CROATIA
SERBIA

BOSNIA-HERZEGOVINA

MONTENEGRO

MACEDONIA
KOSOVO

ALBANIA
Commend Adria d.o.o.

Tel. +385-1-369 11 23
www.commend.hr
FRANCE Commend France S.A.S.

Tel. +33-149 18 16 40
www.commend.fr

NETHERLANDS

BELGIUM

LUXEMBURG
Commend Benelux B.V.

Tel. +31-76-200 01 00
www.commend.nl
ITALY Commend Italia S.R.L.

Tel. +39-035-95 39 63
www.commend.it

SWITZERLAND

LIECHTENSTEIN
Commend AG
Tel. +41-44-955 02 22
www.commend.ch
Europe
USA
CANADA

LATIN AMERICA
Commend Inc.

Tel. +1-201-529-2425
www.commendusa.com
America
Commend International GmbH
Tel. +43-662-85 62 25
www.commend.com
Other countries
SWEDEN
NORWAY

FINLAND

DENMARK

ICELAND
Commend Business Hub Nordic
JNT Sound System AB
Tel. +46-8-99 30 60
www.jnt.se
GERMANY Schneider Intercom GmbH
Tel. +49-211-88285-333
www.schneider-intercom.de
POLAND C&C Partners Telecom Sp.z o.o.

Tel. +48-65-525 55 55
www.ccpartners.pl

UNITED KINGDOM

IRELAND
Commend UK Ltd
Tel. +44-1279-87 20 20
www.commend.co.uk

SLOVAKIA

CZECH REPUBLIC
Commend Slovakia spol. s r.o.

Tel. +421-2-58 10 10 40
www.commend.sk
SPAIN

PORTUGAL
Commend Ibérica S.L.

Tel. +34-91-395 24 98
www.commend.es
Asia-Pacific
SINGAPORE Commend Business Hub Asia
Isolectra Far East Pte. Ltd
Tel. +65-6272-2371
www.commend.com.sg
CHINA Commend Business Hub China
Tel. +86-21-52 13 19 28
www.commend.cn

AUSTRALIA

NEW ZEALAND
Commend Australia
Tel. +61-3-9729-3700 (Melbourne)
Tel. +61-2-4655-5738 (Sydney)
www.commend.com.au
ISRAEL Sberlophone Ltd
Tel. + 972-4-834 10 32
www.sberlophone.co.il
Africa
SOUTH AFRICA Commend Business Hub South Africa
Evolving Management Solutions (Pty) Ltd
Tel. +27-11-274 6665
www.commend.co.za

ALGERIA

TUNISIA

MOROCCO
Commend France S.A.S.

Tel. +33-149 18 16 40
www.commend.fr

COMMEND
A Strong Network | Worldwide

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 906 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) www.skidata.com Picture may vary from actual product
The cashless option among SKIDATA
pay-on-foot machines provides full cashless
payment support for your customers – it's easy,
quick and secure. Credit.Cash lets you present
your business with a modern design while benefitting from highly reliable technology and low maintenance costs.

Utilizing potential
• Modern ticketing
Take advantage of Print@Home, RFID, magstripe and
barcode technologies.
• Planned growth
Easy-to-install extension options support new
business models and numerous co-operation
options.

Your business card
• Demonstrating presence
Credit.Cash's modern design matches both
contemporary and traditional architecture while giving
your business proper exposure.
• Individual style
Accentuate your unique corporate presence with your
logo and company colors.

Eliminating risks
• Intelligent key management
Operator.Services ‘Webkey’ brings full transparency to
your key management.
• Refined technology
Internationally proven technology guarantees high
reliability and availability.
• No initial cash required
Easily cut costs and risks.

Paying cashless
• Cashless payment made easy, fast and secure
No need to handle cash – and accounting gets
easier, too!
• Make the cost efficiency work for you!
Increase your presence through several cost-efficient
pay-on-foot machines
Credit.Cash – Your benefits
• Cashless payment
Patrons can pay conveniently by credit card – no
need for complicated cash management.
• Smart looks
Present your business in a modern design based
on your company colors.
• Safe investment
Maximizing benefits at minimum risk.

Credit.Cash

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 907 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 518 (20.394'')
455 (17.913'')
423 (16.654'')
(13.622'')
(13.386'')
(12.323'')
(7.283'')
(6.220'')
1045 (41.142'')
340
346 158
(21.811'') 554
(21.811'') 554
(13.071'')
332
(13.622'')
346
(28.504'') 724
(28.504'') 724
(13.071'')
332
<50 (1.969'')
110°
313
185
© 2012 SKIDATA AG. All rights reserved.

The content provided herein is subject to change and possible editorial errors. Country-specific versions may vary. SKIDATA® is a registered trademark of SKIDATA AG in the USA, the European Union and other countries. Terms and conditions of the authorized SKIDATA distributor apply. The operator is fully responsible for compliance with any legal provisions applicable to the operation of the products. • Extremely easy to operate by staff
Options
Design/Structure
• Illumination attachment (integrated “Parking” sign, space for custom logo or other symbols)
• Pedestal (optionally with or without front door panel) • Pedestal “elevated” (optionally with or without front door panel)
• Wall-mount console
• Locking system with mechanical or electronic locks
(supports configurable permissions
Coder/ticket technology
• Coder Unlimited (supported data carrier formats depend on modules selected)
• Coder Basic (for cross-wise barcode and validation via hole punch)
• RFID Module (for reading and writing of keycards)
• RFID Module 13 MHz (for keycards and contract parker) • Print@Home Scanner
Features
Design/Structure
• Compact, modern design
• Basic unit powder coated steel enclosure and design
elements made from polycarbonate
• Expansion bays for add-on components, such as pin pad, credit card terminal, and fiscal printer
• Analog intercom station, alarm function, call button and 3 soft keys,
• Uninterruptible power supply (ensures proper transaction management in case of power failure)
• Heater, cooling fan, and power supply
• Issuing of up to 3000 receipts
• Control unit, complete with hard disk
Operation
• TFT 14.5 cm (5.7'') color display, break-proof monitor screen • Ergonomically arranged user interaction controls
• User guidance with graphic color display and illuminated pictograms
• Users can switch on-screen language at any time
Te c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Dimensions 340 mm x 1045 mm x 455 mm / 13.39" x 41.14" x 17.91" (w x h x d) – without pedestal Height with Pedestal “elevated” 1769 mm / 69.65"
Power supply 230 V AC / 50-60 Hz; 120 V AC / 60 Hz
Power consumption 600 W (with heater on)
Temperature range during
operation
−25 °C to +50 °C (−13 °F to +122 °F) ambient temperature; unit not directly exposed to sunlight
Color of enclosure and
illumination attachment
RAL 9007 (gray aluminum)
Color of plastic front-panel
elements
RAL 7043 (traffic gray B)
Color of front panel RAL 9007 (gray aluminum), RAL 7021 (black-gray) Color of pedestal RAL 7021 (black-gray)
Ticket slot Pantone 114 U (yellow)
Supported data carrier formats SKIDATA barcoded, magstripe, keycard ISO/ISO RFID TK-/TKC-Unlimited (barcode and magnetic strip tickets)
keycard basic/unlimited/ca13/advanced/venue, keytix light, keywrist light, VP-Card with barcode
Declarations /
Certifications
CE, FCC, IC, CNRTLUS (only 120 V variant), ADA (in combination with pedestal APM STD BASE item code: 946010700), Ukr-Sepro
Degree of protection based on
IEC 60529
IP 43, when installed in a protected location according to the installation manual SKIDATA AG • Untersbergstraße 40 • A-5083 Grödig/Salzburg [t] +43 6246 888-0 • [f] +43 6246 888-7 • [e] [email protected] [w] www.skidata.com • Version 4.8 • 23.04.2014 all dimensions in mm

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 908 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) www.skidata.com Picture may vary from actual product
Make paying on foot even easier for your
patrons. The standard model of the
SKIDATA range of pay-on-foot machines
combines a modern design with versatile
functionality and proven technology. Take
advantage of ultimate reliability and availability.

Convenience for you and your patrons
• Easy, intuitive user interaction
Excellent ergonomic usability - even for wheelchair
users - helps to promote throughput.
• Easy to maintain
Easy.Cash is low in maintenance and related costs.

Your image builder
• Look & Feel
Modern design highlights your business
competence.
• Corporate Identity
On request, Easy.Cash is also available in your
corporate colors.

More security
• Intelligent key management
Operator.Service ‘Webkey’ brings full transparency to
your key management.
• Refined technology
Internationally proven technologies - such as the
flexible, self-refilling cash processing unit - ensures ultimate system reliability and availability.

Easy.Cash - Your Benefits
• Modern look & feel
Easy to operate, with a stylish design for maximum
business exposure.
• Proven functionality
Reliable technology for profit-yielding business
models.
• Protected investment
Maximizing benefits at minimum risk.

Easy.Cash

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 909 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 518 (20.394")
455 (17.913")
423
(16.654")
1045 (41.142")
158 (6.220")
700 (27.559")
198
(7.795")
674 (26.535")
110 °
>50
(1.969")
346(13.622")
346 (13.622")
554 (21.811")
692 (27.244")
724 (28.504")
692 (27.244")
© 2011 SKIDATA AG. All rights reserved.

Options
Design/Structure
• Illumination attachment (integrated “Parking“ sign, coin and bill symbols, space for custom logo)
• Pedestal (optionally with or without front door panel) - see specific factsheet
• Pedestal “elevated” (optionally with or without front door panel) - see specific factsheet
• Wall-mount console
• Locking system with mechanical or electronic locks (supports configurable permissions)
Cash management system
• Banknote validator SC83 for up to 48 bill denominations in 4 directions, complete with bill stacker box for up to 600 bills • Bill to Bill banknote recycler: handles up to 23 bill denominations in 4 directions; stacker box for up to 1,000 banknotes and 2 selfrefilling change-giving drums for approx. 110 bills • Extra coin container (2x approx. 1,000 coins; non-self-refilling), incl. lockable front panel
Coder/ticket technology
• Coder Unlimited (supported data carrier formats depend on modules selected)
• Coder Basic (for cross-wise barcode and validation via hole punch)
• RFID Module (for reading and writing/coding of keycards) • Print@Home Scanner
Features
Design/Structure
• Compact, modern design
• Basic unit powder coated steel enclosure, and controls and design elements made from polycarbonate
• VDS certified enclosure construction
• Built-in alarm system, intercom station (analog), call button, three soft keys, and buffer memory (ensures proper transaction management in case of a power failure)
• Heater, cooling fan, and power supply
• Expansion bays for add-on components, such as pin pad, credit card terminal, and fiscal printer
• Issuing of up to 3,000 receipts
• Control unit, complete with hard disk
Operation
• 5.7" TFT color display, break-proof monitor screen
• Ergonomically arranged user interaction controls
• User guidance with graphic color display and illuminated pictograms
• Users can switch on-screen language at any time
• Extremely easy to operate by staff
Cash handling system
• Electronic coin validator, accepts up to 16 different coins (including 2 programmable token)
• 4 compact coin containers (each approx. 250 coins)
• Self-locking coin box, made from high-grade stainless steel • Compact coin containers come with lockable covers
Te c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Dimensions 700 mm x 1045 mm x 455 mm / 27.559" x 41.142" x 17.913" (w x h x d) – without pedestal
Power supply 240 V AC / 50 Hz; 120 V AC / 60 Hz
Power consumption 600 W (with heater on)
Temperature range during operation -25 °C to +50 °C (-13 °F to + 122 °F) ambient temperature; unit not directly exposed to sunlight
Color of enclosure and illumination attachment RAL 9007 (grey aluminum) Color of plastic front-panel elements RAL 7043 (traffic gray B) Color of front panel RAL 9007 (gray aluminum), RAL 7021 (black-gray) Color of pedestal RAL 7021 (black-gray)
Ticket slot Pantone 114 U (yellow)
Supported data carrier formats SKIDATA barcoded, magstripe, keycard ISO/ISO RFID Norms and Standards / Certifications CE mark, UL, FCC, VDS, FDA, ADA (in combination with pedestal APM STD BASE item code: 946010700)
Protection class IP 23 (outdoor use requires protective roofing) SKIDATA AG • Untersbergstraße 40 • A-5083 Grödig/Salzburg [t] +43 6246 888-0 • [f] +43 6246 888-7 • [e] [email protected] [w] www.skidata.com • Version 5.3 • 16.03.2011 all dimensions in mm

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 910 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) Picture may vary from actual product
A system for all purposes and applications!
No barriers for you and your applications – but a
distinct boundary for your parking facility!
Quick Movements, Longer Booms
• Boom lengths up to 4,5 meters (14,76 ft) in one
single variation of the basic device with optional
magnetic lock to prevent misuse.
• Configurable opening times: openings are up to 15%
quicker than other systems.

High-Quality, Energy-Optimized
Components
• High-quality design that is the best in its field.
• Special focus on the use of energy-saving
components.
• Operation in a wide range of temperatures possible
without any extra heating or ventilation.

Entirely New Applications
• Display of various symbols via the integrated lane
signal.
• Surveillance using a built-in video camera that is safe against vandalism.
• Unique: Colored joint barrier boom using RGB LEDs
for safety and recognisability.

The Intelligent System Without Column
• The inexpensive solution for your long-term parking
facility: You only need the barrier gate, no column.
• Integrable RFID readers solve the task of parking facility monitoring.
• Small amount of components.
www.skidata.com
Barrier.Gate

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 911 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 369 (14.53")
965 (37.99")
281 (11.06")
max. 4500 (177.17")
1005 (39.57")
251 (9.88")
1149 (45.24")
2150 (84.65") / ADA 2340 (92.13")
382 (15.04")
4 x Ø12 x 90°
(4 xØ 0.47" x 90°)
Ø 185 (7.28")
280,7 (11.02")
251 (9.88")
2058 (81") / ADA 2248 (88.5")
max. 2900 (114.17")
©2014 SKIDATA AG. All rights reserved.

Options
Barrier arms
• Standard: Color: Traffic Yellow RAL 1023/translucent; nonilluminated for lengths up to 4,5 m (14,76 ft) • Multi-color version: Color: white/translucent, with interior RGB LEDs for optional illumination of barrier arm in red, yellow and green to indicate closed, opening, and open
states, respectively; lengths up to 4,5 m (14,76 ft)
• Jointed barrier arm: Overhead clearance: 2,07 m (6,8 ft) or 2,25 m (7,38 ft); Lengths 2,5 m (8,2 ft) or 2,9 m (9,5 ft) Functional modules
• Up to two double loop detectors for detection of vehicles and passage direction
• Bi-directional red warning light to indicate moving barrier arm
• Beeper for acoustic indication of barrier motion
• Crash guard, made from stainless steel
• Interface for illumination options and optional loop detectors • Interface for up to 16 additional I/Os
• Barrier lock for Webkey system
• Lock for installation in locking systems
• White contour stripe
• Backlight for contour stripe
Features
• Housing made from high-impact resistant plastic;
support stand manufactured from anodized aluminum
• Integrated drive gear motor with frequency converter control and slipping clutch
• Self-locking drive (stops motion in case of power failure) • Barrier breakage detector
• Variable opening times, configurable in accordance with barrier arm length
• Barrier arms made from GRP
• Barrier arm lengths up to 4,5 m (14,76 ft)
• Barrier arms are easy to mount
• Versions for left-hand and right-hand traffic
Standard Version
• Parking barrier with mounting plate, main body
manufactured from aluminum, drive motor and washer
for barrier arm installation
• Electronic control assembly with data connection to
Power.Gate, Lite.Gate or Column.Gate parking column
• Yellow contour stripe
• Triangular key for opening the housing
Te c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Dimensions 382 mm x 1149 mm x 369 mm / 15,04" x 45,24" x 14,53" (w x h x d) Weight 48 kg (105,82 lbs) (without barrier arm)
Operating voltage 100-240 V ±10% / 50-60 Hz / Maximum current 1,8 A at 240 V or 4,8 A at 100 V With heater for 220-240 V ±10% / 50-60 Hz / 3,8 A maximum current With heater for 100-127 V ±10% / 50-60 Hz / 8,1 A maximum current Temperature range Standard: −20 °C to +50 °C (−4 °F to +122 °F) Cold Kit (heater): −40 °C to +50 °C (−40 °F to +122 °F) Hot Kit: −20 °C to +55 °C (−4 °F to +131 °F)
Support Stand - Color Light Gray RAL 7035 (Anodized Aluminum) Top Section - Color Dusty Gray RAL 7043 (Plastic)
Base Section - Color Traffic Gray RAL 7043 (Die-Cast Aluminum) Contour Stripes - Color Traffic Yellow RAL 1023
Degree of protection IP44
System Requirements SKIDATA Online Stack 3.0 resp. Parking.Logic V 05.00.04 Declarations / Certifications CE
SKIDATA AG • Untersbergstraße 40 • A-5083 Grödig/Salzburg [t] +43 6246 888-0 • [f] +43 6246 888-7 • [e] [email protected] [w] www.skidata.com • Version 1.4 • 14.11.2014 all dimensions in mm

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 912 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) © 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public. Page 1 of 14 Data Sheet
Cisco 200 Series Smart Switches
Cisco Small Business
Build a Powerful, Easy-to-Use Basic Business Network at an Affordable Price The key to succeeding in today’s competitive business environment is investing resources wisely – knowing how to separate the essential from the extraneous and get the most value for your dollar. As the backbone of your business and productivity applications, the small business network clearly falls into the “essential” category. But that doesn’t mean you need the most advanced feature set on the market.

With Cisco®200 Series Smart Switches, you can achieve business-class network security and performance without paying for advanced network management features that you will not need. When you need a reliable solution to share network resources and connect computers, printers, and servers, but low cost is a top priority, Cisco 200 Series Smart Switches provide the ideal solution.

Figure 1. Cisco 200 Series Smart Switches
Cisco 200 Series Smart Switches
The Cisco 200 Series (Figure 1) is a series of affordable smart switches that combine powerful network performance and reliability with the essential network management features you need for a solid business network.

These expandable Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet switches provide basic management, security, and quality-ofservice (QoS) features beyond those of an unmanaged or consumer-grade switch, at a lower cost than managed switches. And with an easy-to-use web user interface, Cisco Discovery Protocol, and Cisco Smartports, you can deploy and configure a rock-solid business network in minutes.

Business Applications
Whether you need basic high-speed connectivity for your computers and servers or a comprehensive voice, data, and wireless technology solution, Cisco 200 Series switches can meet your business needs. Possible deployment scenarios include:
● High-speed desktop connectivity. Cisco 200 Series switches can quickly and securely connect employees working in small offices with one another and with all of the servers, printers, and other devices they use. High performance and reliable connectivity help speed file transfers and data processing, improve network uptime, and keep your employees connected and productive.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 913 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) © 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public. Page 2 of 14 ● Highly secure wireless connectivity. Cisco 200 Series switches work with Cisco and third-party wireless solutions to extend the reach of your network. Employees can work productively from conference rooms and common areas, collaborate in any office, and access business applications from wherever they are.

With their security features, Power over Ethernet (PoE), Auto Smartports, VLAN, and QoS, these switches are the perfect foundation to add business-grade wireless to a network. ● Unified communications. The Cisco 200 Series provides QoS features to enable you to prioritize delaysensitive traffic in your network and let you converge all of your communications solutions – such as IP telephony and video surveillance – onto a single Ethernet network. Cisco offers a complete portfolio of IP telephony and other unified communications products designed for small businesses, and Cisco 200 Series switches have been rigorously tested to help ensure easy integration and full compatibility with these and other vendor products.

Features and Benefits
Cisco 200 Series Smart Switches provide all of the features you need to create a basic business-class network at an affordable price. These features include:
● Easy configuration and management: Cisco 200 Series switches are designed to be easy to deploy and use by small businesses or the partners that serve them. Simple-to-use web-based interfaces reduce the time it takes to deploy, manage, and troubleshoot your network. Key features include:
◦ Cisco Discovery Protocol and Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP-MED) automatically detect all the devices connected to your network and then automatically configure themselves for the appropriate connectivity and instruct the devices to use appropriate voice VLAN or QoS parameters. ◦ Cisco Smartports technology provides for more advanced capabilities and hands-on control by automatically configuring ports with specific levels of security, QoS, and availability according to the type of connected device, based on Cisco best practices and pretested configurations. The Auto Smartports feature automatically applies the intelligence delivered through the Smartports roles to the port based on the devices discovered over Cisco Discovery Protocol or LLDP-MED. This capability facilitates zerotouch deployments. ◦ Cisco FindIT Network Discovery Utility works through a simple toolbar on the user’s web browser to discover Cisco devices on the network and display basic information, such as serial numbers and IP addresses, to aid in the configuration and speed the deployment of Cisco Small Business products. For more information, and to download the utility, visit www.cisco.com/go/findit. ● Performance and reliability: Cisco 200 Series switches have been tested to deliver the high availability and performance you would expect from a Cisco switch and help you prevent costly downtime. The switches speed file transfer times, improve slow and sluggish networks, keep your vital business applications available, and help your employees respond more quickly to customers and each other. With a network based on Cisco 200 Series switches, you can address all of your business communications and connectivity needs and reduce the total cost of ownership of your technology infrastructure. ● Power over Ethernet (PoE): Cisco 200 Series switches are available with PoE on both Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet models. This capability simplifies the deployment of IP telephony, wireless, video surveillance, and other solutions by allowing you to send data and power to network endpoints over the same network cable. With no need for separate power supplies or outlets for IP phones, IP cameras, or wireless access points, you can speed up deployment and installation and take advantage of advanced communications technologies quickly, and at a lower cost.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 914 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) © 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public. Page 3 of 14 ● Network security: Cisco 200 Series switches provide security and network management features you need to maintain a high level of security for your business, keep unauthorized users off the network, and protect your business data. The switches provide integrated network security to reduce the risk of a security breach, with IEEE 802.1X port security to control access to your network. Denial-of-service (DOS) attack prevention increases network uptime in the presence of an attack. ● IP telephony support: Cisco 200 Series switches include QoS features to prioritize delay-sensitive services such as voice and video, simplify unified communications deployments, and help ensure consistent network performance for all services.
● Networkwide automatic voice deployment: Using a combination of Cisco Discovery Protocol, LLDPMED, Auto Smartports, and Voice Services Discovery Protocol (VSDP) – a unique patent-pending Cisco protocol – customers can deploy an end-to-end voice network dynamically. The switches in the network automatically converge into a single voice VLAN and set of QoS parameters and then propagate them out to the phones on the ports where they are discovered. For example, automated voice VLAN capabilities let you plug any IP phone (including third-party phones) into your IP telephony network and receive an immediate dial tone. The switch automatically configures the device with the right VLAN and QoS parameters to prioritize voice traffic.
● IPv6 support: As the IP network addressing scheme evolves to accommodate more devices, you can make sure that your network is ready. Cisco 200 Series switches provide native support for IPv6 alongside traditional IPv4. That means you can take full advantage of IPv6-enabled operating systems and applications in the future, without having to upgrade your network equipment. ● An energy-efficient solution: Cisco 200 Series switches are designed to be energy efficient and ecofriendly without compromising performance. They help conserve energy by optimizing power use, which helps protect the environment and lowers your energy costs. Power-saving features include:
◦ Energy-Efficient Ethernet (EEE, the IEEE 802.3az standard), supported on all Cisco 200 Series Gigabit Ethernet switch models. EEE improves the efficiency of network equipment and provides standardized signaling mechanisms that can enable rapid transitions between normal operation and low power idle (LPI) states in systems on either end of the physical layer link. ◦ Automatic power down on Gigabit Ethernet ports when a link is not active. ◦ Embedded intelligence to adjust power based on cable length on Gigabit Ethernet models. ◦ Fanless design in most models, which reduces power consumption, increases reliability, and provides quieter operation.
● Additional Gigabit Ethernet ports: The Cisco 200 Series provides more ports per switch than other switches in the market, giving you more flexibility to connect and empower your business. Gigabit Ethernet models feature 26- and 50-port switches, versus traditional devices that offer 20 or 44 ports with 4 shared ports. The Cisco 200 Series also offers mini Gigabit Interface Converter (mini-GBIC) expansion slots that give you the option to add fiber optic or Gigabit Ethernet uplink connectivity to the switch. With the ability to increase the connectivity range of the switches, you have more flexibility to design your network around your unique business environment, and to easily connect switches on different floors or across the business. ● Peace of mind and investment protection: Cisco 200 Series switches offer the reliable performance, investment protection, and peace of mind you expect from a Cisco switch. When you invest in the Cisco 200 Series, you gain the benefit of:
◦ Cisco limited lifetime warranty to protect your investment.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 915 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) © 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public. Page 4 of 14 ◦ Rigorous testing to help ensure easy integration and compatibility with other Cisco networking and communications products, including the complete Cisco Small Business portfolio. ● Limited lifetime warranty: The Cisco 200 Series switches come with the Cisco Limited Lifetime Hardware Warranty, with return-to-factory replacement, a 1-year limited warranty for fans and power supplies, and a 90-day limited software warranty. In addition, Cisco offers software updates for bug fixes for the warranty term and telephone technical support at no charge for the first 12 months following the date of purchase. To download software updates, go to www.cisco.com/cisco/web/download/index.html. ● World-class support: To extend the support coverage beyond the warranty provisions, choose the Cisco Small Business Support Service, which helps you get the most value from Cisco Small Business solutions, providing peace of mind at an affordable price. The subscription-based service offers software upgrades and updates, access to the Cisco Small Business Support Center, next-business-day hardware replacement (if needed), and telephone and online chat support. To learn more, visit www.cisco.com/go/smbservices.

To find out where Cisco Small Business Support Service is available by country, go to https://supportforums.cisco.com/community/netpro/small-business/sbcountrysupport. ● Multiple language options: The Cisco 200 Series is available in seven languages: English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Japanese, and simplified Chinese. All product documentation and most user interfaces are translated, giving you the ability to select your preferred language.

Product Specifications
Table 1 gives the product specifications for the Cisco 200 Series Switches.

Table 1. Product Specifications
Feature Description
Performance
Switching capacity and
forwarding rate Model
Capacity in Millions of Packets per Second
(mpps) (64-byte packets)
Switching Capacity in Gigabits
per Second (Gbps)
SF200-24 6.55 8.8
SF200-24P 6.55 8.8
SF200-24FP 6.55 8.8
SF200-48 10.12 13.6
SF200-48P 10.12 13.6
SG200-08 11.9 13.6
SG200-08P 11.9 13.6
SG200-10FP 14.88 20.0
SG200-18 26.78 36.0
SG200-26 38.69 52.0
SG200-26P 38.69 52.0
SG200-26FP 38.69 52.0
SG200-50 74.41 100.0
SG200-50P 74.41 100.0
SG200-50FP 74.41 100.0
Layer 2 Switching
Spanning Tree Protocol
(STP)
Standard 802.1d STP support
Fast convergence using 802.1w (Rapid Spanning Tree [RSTP]), enabled by default

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 916 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) © 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public. Page 5 of 14 Feature Description
Port grouping Support for IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) ● Up to 4 groups
● Up to 8 ports per group with 16 candidate ports for each (dynamic) 802.3ad link aggregation VLAN Support for up to 256 VLANs simultaneously (out of 4096 VLAN IDs). 16 VLANs supported in SG200-08 and SG200-08P
Port-based and 802.1Q tag-based VLANs
Voice VLAN Voice traffic is automatically assigned to a voice-specific VLAN and treated with appropriate levels of QoS Internet Group Management
Protocol (IGMP) versions 1
and 2 snooping
IGMP limits bandwidth-intensive multicast traffic to only the requesters; supports 256 multicast groups Head-of-line (HOL) blocking HOL blocking prevention
Security
IEEE 802.1X
(Authenticator role)
802.1X: RADIUS authentication, MD5 hash
Port security Locks MAC addresses to ports, and limits the number of learned MAC addresses Storm control Broadcast, multicast, and unknown unicast DoS prevention DoS attack prevention
Quality of Service
Priority levels 4 hardware queues
Scheduling Strict priority and weighted round-robin (WRR) Queue assignment based on differentiated services code point (DSCP) and class of service (802.1p/CoS) Class of service Port based, 802.1p VLAN priority based, IPv4/v6 IP precedence/type of service (ToS)/DSCP based, Differentiated Services (DiffServ)
Rate limiting Ingress policer, per VLAN and per port
Standards
Standards IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T Ethernet, IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet, IEEE 802.3ab 1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet, IEEE 802.3ad LACP, IEEE 802.3z Gigabit Ethernet, IEEE 802.3x Flow Control, IEEE 802.1D (STP), IEEE 802.1Q/p VLAN, IEEE 802.1w RSTP, IEEE 802.1X Port Access Authentication, IEEE 802.3af, RFC 768, RFC 783, RFC 791, RFC 792, RFC 793, RFC 813, RFC 879, RFC 896, RFC 826, RFC 854, RFC 855, RFC 856, RFC 858, RFC 894, RFC 919, RFC 922, RFC 920, RFC 950, RFC 951, RFC 1042, RFC 1071, RFC 1123, RFC 1141, RFC 1155, RFC 1350, RFC 1533, RFC 1541, RFC 1542, RFC 1624, RFC 1700, RFC 1867, RFC 2030, RFC 2616, RFC 2131, RFC 2132, RFC 3164, RFC 2618
IPv6
IPv6 IPv6 host mode
IPv6 over Ethernet
Dual IPv6/IPv4 stack
IPv6 neighbor and router discovery (ND)
IPv6 stateless address auto-configuration
Path maximum transmission unit (MTU) discovery
Duplicate address detection (DAD)
Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) version 6
IPv6 over IPv4 network with Intra-Site Automatic Tunnel Addressing Protocol (ISATAP) support IPv6 QoS Prioritize IPv6 packets in hardware
Multicast Listener Discovery
(MLD) snooping
Deliver IPv6 multicast packets only to the required receivers IPv6 applications Web, ping, Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP), Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP), RADIUS, syslog, DNS client

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 917 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) © 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public. Page 6 of 14 Feature Description
IPv6 RFCs supported RFC 2463: ICMP version 6
RFC 3513: IPv6 address architecture
RFC 4291: IPv6 addressing architecture
RFC 2460: IPv6 specification
RFC 2461: Neighbor discovery for IPv6
RFC 2462: IPv6 stateless address auto-configuration
RFC 1981: Path maximum transmission unit (MTU) discovery RFC 4007: IPv6 scoped address architecture
RFC 3484: Default address selection mechanism
RFC 4214: ISATAP tunneling
RFC 4293: MIB IPv6: Textual conventions and general group RFC 3595: Textual conventions for IPv6 flow label
Management
Web user interface Built-in switch configuration utility for easy browser-based device configuration (HTTP). Supports configuration, system dashboard, system maintenance, and monitoring
Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP)
SNMP versions 1, 2c, and 3 with support for traps, and SNMP version 3 user-based security model (USM) Standard MIBs draft-ietf-bridge-8021x-MIB
draft-ietf-bridge-rstpmib-04-MIB
draft-ietf-hubmib-etherif-MIB-v3-00-MIB
draft-ietf-syslog-device-MIB
ianaaddrfamnumbers-MIB
ianaifty-MIB
ianaprot-MIB
inet-address-MIB
ip-forward-MIB
ip-MIB
RFC1155-SMI
RFC1213-MIB
SNMPv2-MIB
SNMPv2-SMI
SNMPv2-TM
RMON-MIB.my
dcb-raj-DCBX-MIB-1108-MIB
rfc1724-MIB
RFC-1212.my_for_MG-Soft
rfc1213-MIB
rfc1757-MIB
RFC-1215.my
SNMPv2-CONF.my
SNMPv2-TC.my
rfc2674-MIB
rfc2575-MIB
rfc2573-MIB
rfc2233-MIB
rfc2013-MIB
rfc2012-MIB
rfc2011-MIB
draft-ietf-entmib-sensor-MIB
lldp-MIB
lldpextdot1-MIB
lldpextdot3-MIB
lldpextmed-MIB
p-bridge-MIB
q-bridge-MIB
rfc1389-MIB
rfc1493-MIB
rfc1611-MIB
rfc1612-MIB
rfc1850-MIB
rfc1907-MIB
rfc2571-MIB
rfc2572-MIB
rfc2574-MIB
rfc2576-MIB
rfc2613-MIB
rfc2665-MIB
rfc2668-MIB
rfc2737-MIB
rfc2925-MIB
rfc3621-MIB
rfc4668-MIB
rfc4670-MIB
trunk-MIB
tunnel-MIB
udp-MIB

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 918 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) © 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public. Page 7 of 14 Feature Description
Private MIBs CISCOSB-lldp-MIB
CISCOSB-brgmulticast-MIB
CISCOSB-bridgemibobjects-MIB
CISCOSB-bonjour-MIB
CISCOSB-dhcpcl-MIB

CISCOSB-MIB
CISCOSB-wrandomtaildrop-MIB
CISCOSB-traceroute-MIB
CISCOSB-telnet-MIB
CISCOSB-stormctrl-MIB
CISCOSB-ssh-MIB
CISCOSB-socket-MIB
CISCOSB-sntp-MIB
CISCOSB-smon-MIB
CISCOSB-phy-MIB
CISCOSB-multisessionterminal-MIB
CISCOSB-mri-MIB
CISCOSB-jumboframes-MIB
CISCOSB-gvrp-MIB
CISCOSB-endofmib-MIB
CISCOSB-dot1x-MIB
CISCOSB-deviceparams-MIB
CISCOSB-cli-MIB
CISCOSB-cdb-MIB
CISCOSB-brgmacswitch-MIB
CISCOSB-3sw2swtables-MIB
CISCOSB-smartPorts-MIB
CISCOSB-tbi-MIB
CISCOSB-macbaseprio-MIB
CISCOSB-policy-MIB
CISCOSB-env_mib
CISCOSB-sensor-MIB
CISCOSB-aaa-MIB
CISCOSB-application-MIB
CISCOSB-bridgesecurity-MIB
CISCOSB-copy-MIB
CISCOSB-CpuCounters-MIB
CISCOSB-Custom1BonjourService-MIB
CISCOSB-dhcp-MIB
CISCOSB-dlf-MIB
CISCOSB-dnscl-MIB
CISCOSB-embweb-MIB
CISCOSB-fft-MIB
CISCOSB-file-MIB
CISCOSB-greeneth-MIB
CISCOSB-interfaces-MIB
CISCOSB-interfaces_recovery-MIB
CISCOSB-ip-MIB
CISCOSB-iprouter-MIB
CISCOSB-ipv6-MIB
CISCOSB-mnginf-MIB
CISCOSB-lcli-MIB
CISCOSB-localization-MIB
CISCOSB-mcmngr-MIB
CISCOSB-mng-MIB
CISCOSB-physdescription-MIB
CISCOSB-Poe-MIB
CISCOSB-protectedport-MIB
CISCOSB-rmon-MIB
CISCOSB-rs232-MIB
CISCOSB-SecuritySuite-MIB
CISCOSB-snmp-MIB
CISCOSB-specialbpdu-MIB
CISCOSB-banner-MIB
CISCOSB-syslog-MIB
CISCOSB-TcpSession-MIB
CISCOSB-traps-MIB
CISCOSB-trunk-MIB
CISCOSB-tuning-MIB
CISCOSB-tunnel-MIB
CISCOSB-udp-MIB
CISCOSB-vlan-MIB
CISCOSB-ipstdacl-MIB

CISCO-SMI-MIB
CISCOSB-DebugCapabilities-MIB

CISCOSB-CDP-MIB
CISCOSB-vlanVoice-MIB

CISCOSB-EVENTS-MIB
CISCOSB-sysmng-MIB
CISCOSB-sct-MIB

CISCO-TC-MIB

CISCO-VTP-MIB

CISCO-CDP-MIB
CISCOSB-eee-MIB
CISCOSB-ssl-MIB
CISCOSB-qosclimib-MIB
CISCOSB-digitalkeymanage-MIB
CISCOSB-tbp-MIB

CISCOSMB-MIB
CISCOSB-secsd-MIB
CISCOSB-draft-ietf-entmib-sensor-MIB
CISCOSB-draft-ietf-syslog-device-MIB
CISCOSB-rfc2925-MIB
Remote Monitoring (RMON) Embedded RMON software agent supports 4 RMON groups (history, statistics, alarms, and events) for enhanced traffic management, monitoring, and analysis
IPv4 and IPv6 dual stack Coexistence of both protocol stacks to ease migration Firmware upgrade Web browser upgrade (HTTP) and TFTP
Port mirroring Traffic on a port can be mirrored to another port for analysis with a network analyzer or RMON probe. Up to 4 source ports can be mirrored to one destination port. A single session is supported.

VLAN mirroring Traffic from a VLAN can be mirrored to a port for analysis with a network analyzer or RMON probe. Up to 4 source VLANs can be mirrored to one destination port. A single session is supported.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 919 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) © 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public. Page 8 of 14 Feature Description
Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol (DHCP) (options 66
and 67)
(DHCP) options facilitate tighter control from a central point (DHCP server) to obtain IP address and perform autoconfiguration (with configuration file download) Text-editable config files Config files can be edited with a text editor and downloaded to another switch, facilitating easier mass deployment Smartports Simplified configuration of QoS and security capabilities Auto Smartports Automatically applies the intelligence delivered through the Smartports roles to the port based on the devices discovered over Cisco Discovery Protocol or LLDP-MED. This facilitates zero touch deployments.

Cloud services Support for FindIT Network Discovery Utility and Cisco OnPlus™ technology Localization Localization of GUI and documentation into multiple languages Other management HTTP, RADIUS, port mirroring, TFTP upgrade, DHCP client, BOOTP, SNTP, ping, syslog Power Efficiency
EEE compliant (802.3az) Supports 802.3az on all copper Gigabit Ethernet ports (SG200-xx models) Not supported on SG200-08 and SG200-08P models
Energy Detect mode Automatically turns off power on Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 port when the switch detects a link down Active mode is resumed without loss of any packets when the switch detects that the link is back up Cable length detection Adjusts the signal strength based on the cable length. Reduces the power consumption for cables shorter than 10 m.

General
Jumbo frames Frame sizes up to 10 KB supported on 10/100 and Gigabit Ethernet interfaces (9 KB for SG200-08 and SG200-08P)
MAC table Up to 8000 MAC addresses
Discovery
Link Layer Discovery Protocol
(LLDP) (802.1ab) with LLDPMED extensions
LLDP allows the switch to advertise its identification, configuration, and capabilities to neighboring devices, which store the data in an MIB. LLDP-MED is an enhancement to LLDP that adds the extensions needed for IP phones.

Cisco Discovery Protocol The switch advertises itself using the Cisco Discovery Protocol. It also learns the connected device and its characteristics via this protocol.

Auto Smartports Automatically applies the intelligence delivered through the Smartports roles to the port based on the devices discovered over Cisco Discovery Protocol or LLDP-MED. This capability facilitates zero-touch deployments.

Bonjour The switch advertises itself using the Bonjour protocol Power over Ethernet (PoE)
IEEE 802.3af PoE delivered
on half of the RJ-45 ports
within the listed power
budgets
Maximum power of 15.4W to any 10/100 or Gigabit Ethernet base port supporting PoE. The total power available for PoE per switch is as follows:

Model Power Dedicated to PoE
Number of Ports That Support
PoE
SF200-24P 100W 12
SF200-24FP 180W 24
SF200-48P 180W 24
SG200-08P 32W 4
SG200-10FP 62W 8
SG200-26P 100W 12
SG200-26FP 180W 24
SG200-50P 180W 24
SG200-50FP 375W 48
Power consumption
Model Power Savings Mode
Power
Consumption:

Worst Case Heat Dissipation (BTU/hr)
SF200-24 Energy Detect 110V/0.272A/13.7
W
220V/0.169A/14.5
W

49.5 4.C.h
Packet Pg. 920 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) © 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public. Page 9 of 14 Feature Description
SF200-24P Energy Detect 110V/0.346A/21.3
W
220V/0.166A/22.2
W

75.8 SF200-24FP Short reach plus Energy
Detect
110V/0.231A/23.5
W
220V/0.179A/24.4
W

85.6 SF200-48 Energy Detect 110V/0.453A/26.2
W
220V/0.276A/26.8
W

91.5 SF200-48P Energy Detect 110V/0.355A/37.2
W
220V/0.217A/37.4
W
127.6
SG200-08 Auto power down for link
down
110V/P=6.7W
220V/P=7.21W

24.6 SG200-08P Auto power down for link
down
110V/P=7.6W
220V/P=8.1W

27.6 SG200-10FP Short reach plus Energy
Detect
110V/P=13.13W
220V/P=13.48W

46.0 SG200-18 Energy Detect (link down),
short reach
110V/P=22.4W
220V/P=22.9W

78.2 SG200-26 Short reach plus Energy
Detect
110V/0.513A/27.8
W
220V/0.306A/28.3
W

96.6 SG200-26P Short reach plus Energy
Detect
110V/0.591A/36.8
W
220V/0.381A/37.5
W

97.9 SG200-26FP Short reach plus Energy
Detect
110V/0.269A/27.8
W
220V/0.196A/28.7
W
128.0
SG200-50 Short reach plus Energy
Detect
110V/0.569A/61.8
W
220V/0.296A/61.4
W
209.6
SG200-50P Short reach plus Energy
Detect
110V/0.595A/62W
220V/0.338A/61.2
W
211.6
SG200-50FP Short reach plus Energy
Detect
110V/0.749A/76.4
W
220V/0.412A/78.3
W
267.2
Ports
Model Name Total System Ports RJ-45 Ports
Combo Ports
(RJ-45 + SFP)
SF200-24 24 Fast Ethernet
2 Gigabit Ethernet
24 Fast Ethernet 2 Gigabit Ethernet combo
SF200-24P 24 Fast Ethernet
2 Gigabit Ethernet
24 Fast Ethernet 2 Gigabit Ethernet combo
SF200-24FP 24 Fast Ethernet
2 Gigabit Ethernet
24 Fast Ethernet 2 Gigabit Ethernet combo
SF200-48 48 Fast Ethernet
2 Gigabit Ethernet
48 Fast Ethernet 2 Gigabit Ethernet combo
SF200-48P 48 Fast Ethernet
2 Gigabit Ethernet
48 Fast Ethernet 2 Gigabit Ethernet combo
SG200-08 8 Gigabit Ethernet 8 Gigabit Ethernet –

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 921 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) © 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public. Page 10 of 14 Feature Description
SG200-08P 8 Gigabit Ethernet 8 Gigabit Ethernet –
SG200-10FP 8 Gigabit Ethernet 8 Gigabit Ethernet 2 Gigabit Ethernet combo SG200-18 18 Gigabit Ethernet 16 Gigabit
Ethernet
2 Gigabit Ethernet combo
SG200-26 26 Gigabit Ethernet 24 Gigabit
Ethernet
2 Gigabit Ethernet combo
SG200-26P 26 Gigabit Ethernet 24 Gigabit
Ethernet
2 Gigabit Ethernet combo
SG200-26FP 26 Gigabit Ethernet 24 Gigabit
Ethernet
2 Gigabit Ethernet combo
SG200-50 50 Gigabit Ethernet 48 Gigabit
Ethernet
2 Gigabit Ethernet combo
SG200-50P 50 Gigabit Ethernet 48 Gigabit
Ethernet
2 Gigabit Ethernet combo
SG200-50FP 50 Gigabit Ethernet 48 Gigabit
Ethernet
2 Gigabit Ethernet combo
Buttons Reset button
Cabling type Unshielded twisted pair (UTP) Category 5 or better for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX; UTP Category 5 Ethernet or better for 1000BASE-T
LEDs System, Link/Act, PoE, Speed
Flash 16 MB (8 MB in SG200-08 and SG200-08P)
CPU memory 128 MB (32 MB in SG200-08 and SG200-08P)
Packet buffer All numbers are aggregate across all ports, as the buffers are dynamically shared:

Model Packet Buffer
SF200-24 4 Mb
SF200-24P 4 Mb
SF200-24FP 4 Mb
SF200-48 2 @ 8 Mb
SF200-48P 2 @ 8 Mb
SG200-08 4 Mb
SG200-08P 4 Mb
SG200-10FP 4 Mb
SG200-18 4 Mb
SG200-26 4 Mb
SG200-26P 4 Mb
SG200-26FP 4 Mb
SG200-50 2 @ 8 Mb
SG200-50P 2 @ 8 Mb
SG200-50FP 2 @ 8 Mb
Supported Small Form-Factor
Pluggable (SFP) Modules
Product Ordering Number Media Speed Typical Distance
MFEFX1 Multimode fiber 100 Mbps 2 km
MFELX1 Single-mode fiber 100 Mbps 10 km
MFEBX1 Single-mode fiber 100 Mbps 20 km
MGBBX1 Single-mode fiber 1000 Mbps 40 km
MGBSX1 Multimode fiber 1000 Mbps 300 m
MGBLH1 Single-mode fiber 1000 Mbps 40 km
MGBLX1 Single-mode fiber 1000 Mbps 10 km

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 922 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) © 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public. Page 11 of 14 Feature Description
Environmental
Dimensions (W x H x D) Model Metric (mm) Inches
SF200-24 440 x 44.32 x 257 17.35 x 1.74 x 10.1
SF200-24P 440 x 44 x 257 17.35 x 1.73 x 10.1
SF200-24FP 440 x 44 x 257 17.35 x 1.73 x 10.1
SF200-48 440 x 44 x 257 17.35 x 1.73 x 10.1
SF200-48P 440 x 44.32 x 350 17.35 x 1.74 x 13.8
SG200-08 113 x 27 x 130 4.45 x 1.06 x 5.12
SG200-08P 130 x 42.3 x 130 5.12 x 1.52 x 5.12
SG200-10FP 279.4 x 44.45 x 170 11 x 1.45 x 6.7
SG200-18 440.6 x 44.32 x 202.82 17.35 x 1.74 x 7.99
SG200-26 440 x 44 x 257 17.35 x 1.73 x 10.1
SG200-26P 440 x 44 x 257 17.35 x 1.73 x 10.1
SG200-26FP 440 x 44 x 257 17.35 x 1.73 x 10.1
SG200-50 440 x 44 x 257 17.35 x 1.73 x 10.1
SG200-50P 440 x 44 x 350 17.35 x 1.73 x 13.8
SG200-50FP 440 x 44 x 350 17.35 x 1.73 x 13.8
Unit weight Model Kilograms Pounds
SF200-24 3.04 6.70
SF200-24P 3.45 7.61
SF200-24FP 3.67 8.09
SF200-48 3.42 7.54
SF200-48P 4.73 10.43
SG200-08 0.75 1.65
SG200-08P 1.26 2.78
SG200-10FP 1.26 2.78
SG200-18 2.01 4.43
SG200-26 3.27 7.21
SG200-26P 3.67 8.09
SG200-26FP 3.82 8.42
SG200-50 3.96 8.73
SG200-50P 5.47 12.06
SG200-50FP 6.04 13.32
Power Model Power
SF200-24 100V-240V, 12V/2.5A, 50-60 HZ
SF200-24P 100V-240V, 50V/2A, 50-60 HZ
SF200-24FP 100V-240V 47-63 Hz, internal, universal
100V-240V, 50V/3.6A, 12V/4, 50-60 Hz
SF200-48 100V-240V, 12V/4.5A, 50-60 HZ
SF200-48P 100V-240V, 50V/3.6A, 12V/4A, 50-60 HZ
SG200-08 (external) 100V-240V, 0.5A, 50-60 HZ
SG200-08P (external) 100V-240V, 1.0.56A, 50-60 HZ
SG200-10FP (external) 100V-240V, 2.5A, 50-60 Hz
SG200-18 100V-240V, 1.0-0.5A, 50-60 HZ

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 923 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) © 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public. Page 12 of 14 Feature Description
SG200-26 100V-240V, 12V/2.5A, 50-60 HZ
SG200-26P 100V-240V, 50V/2A, 50-60 HZ
SG200-26FP 100V-240V 50-60 Hz, internal, universal
100V-240V, 50V/3.6A, 12V/4, 50-60 Hz
SG200-50 110V-240V, 12V/8.33A, 50-60 HZ
SG200-50P 100V-240V, 50V/2A, 50-60 HZ
SG200-50FP 100V-240V 47-63 Hz, internal, universal
100V-240V, 50V/7.5A, 12V/7.5A, 50-60 Hz
Certification UL (UL 60950), CSA (CSA 22.2), CE mark, FCC Part 15 (CFR 47) Class A Operating temperature 32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C)
Storage temperature –4° to 158°F (–20° to 70°C)
Operating humidity 10% to 90%, relative, noncondensing
Storage humidity 10% to 90%, relative, noncondensing
Acoustic noise and mean
time between failures (MTBF)
Model Fan (Number) Acoustic Noise MTBF @ 40°C (hours)
SF200-24 No N/A 414,166
SF200-24P 1 40.2 dB 307,098
SF200-24FP 2 40.2 dB at 45°C 314,444.5 (based on 45°C)
SF200-48 No – 267,865
SF200-48P 2 41.7 dB 174,966
SG200-08 No – 71,834
SG200-10FP No – 287,436 (based on 45°C)
SG200-08P No – 69,003
SG200-18 No – 68,033
SG200-26 No – 194,278
SG200-26P 1 40.2 dB 218,842
SG200-26FP 2 40.2 dB at 45°C 319,407 (based on 45°C)
SG200-50 2 41.7 dB 237,610
SG200-50P 4 42.5 dB at 30°C

54.7 dB at 40°C
208,976
SG200-50FP 4 42.1 dB at 30°C

55.9 dB at 50°C
192,790 (based on 45°C)
Warranty Limited lifetime
Package Contents
● Cisco 200 Series Smart Switch
● Power cord (power adapter for 8-port and 10-port SKUs) ● Mounting hardware
● CD-ROM with user documentation (PDF) included
● Quick-start guide
Minimum Requirements
● Web browser: Mozilla Firefox version 8 or later; Microsoft Internet Explorer version 7 or later, Safari, Chrome ● Category 5 Ethernet network cable
● TCP/IP, network adapter, and network operating system (such as Microsoft Windows, Linux, or Mac OS X) installed on each computer in the network

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 924 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) © 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public. Page 13 of 14 Ordering Information
Table 2 provides ordering information for the Cisco 200 Series Switches. Table 3 gives ordering information for the MFE and MGE transceivers.

Table 2. Cisco 200 Series Switches Ordering Information Model Product Ordering Number Description
Fast Ethernet
SF200-24 SLM224GT-xx ● 24 10/100 ports
● 2 combo mini-GBIC ports*
SF200-24P SLM224PT-xx ● 24 10/100 ports
● 2 combo mini-GBIC ports*
● PoE support on 12 ports
SF200-24FP SF200-24FP-xx ● 24 10/100 ports
● 2 combo mini-GBIC ports*
● PoE support on 24 ports
SF200-48 SLM248GT-xx ● 48 10/100 ports
● 2 combo mini-GBIC ports*
SF200-48P SLM248PT-xx ● 48 10/100 ports
● 2 combo mini-GBIC ports*
● PoE support on 24 ports
SF200-48 SLM248GT-xx ● 48 10/100 ports
● 2 combo mini-GBIC ports*
Gigabit Ethernet
SG200-08 SLM2008T-xx ● 8 10/100/1000 ports
SG200-08P SLM2008PT-xx ● 8 10/100/1000 ports
● PoE support on 4 ports
SG200-10FP SG200-10FP-xx ● 10 10/100/1000 ports
● 2 combo mini-GBIC ports*
● PoE support on 8 ports
SG200-18 SLM2016T-xx ● 16 10/100/1000 ports
● 2 combo mini-GBIC ports*
SG200-26 SLM2024T-xx ● 24 10/100/1000 ports
● 2 combo mini-GBIC ports*
SG200-26P SLM2024PT-xx ● 24 10/100/1000 ports
● 2 combo mini-GBIC ports*
● PoE support on 12 ports
SG200-26FP SG200-26FP-xx ● 24 10/100/1000 ports
● 2 combo mini-GBIC ports*
● PoE support on 24 ports
SG200-50 SLM2048T-xx ● 48 10/100/1000 ports
● 2 combo mini-GBIC ports*
SG200-50P SLM2048PT-xx ● 48 10/100/1000 ports
● 2 combo mini-GBIC ports*
● PoE support on 24 ports
SG200-50FP SG200-50FP-xx ● 48 10/100/1000 ports
● 2 combo mini-GBIC ports*
● PoE support on 48 ports
* Each combo mini-GBIC port has one 10/100/1000 Ethernet port and one mini-GBIC/SFP Gigabit Ethernet slot, with one port active at a time.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 925 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) © 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public. Page 14 of 14 Table 3. Service and Support Ordering Information
Service Ordering Number Description
CON-SBS-SVC2 3 years support, software updates, Small Business Support Center access via online, telephone, or community, next-business-day advance replacement
Table 4. MFE and MGE Transceiver Ordering Information
Product Ordering Number Description
MFE Transceivers
MFEBX1 100BASE-BX-20U SFP transceiver for single-mode fiber, 1310 nm wavelength, supports up to 20 km MFELX1 100BASE-LX SFP transceiver for single-mode fiber, 1310 nm wavelength, supports up to 2 km MFEFX1 100BASE-FX SFP transceiver for multimode fiber, 1310 nm wavelength, supports up to 10 km MGE Transceivers
MGBBX1 1000BASE-BX-20U SFP transceiver for single-mode fiber, 1310 nm wavelength, supports up to 40 km MGBLH1 1000BASE-LH SFP transceiver for single-mode fiber, 1310 nm wavelength, supports up to 40 km MGBLX1 1000BASE-LX SFP transceiver for single-mode fiber, 1310 nm wavelength, supports up to 10 km MGBSX1 1000BASE-SX SFP transceiver for multimode fiber, 850 nm wavelength, supports up to 550 m A Powerful Foundation for the Basic Business Network
As you strive to make your business more competitive and efficient, every dollar counts. Cisco 200 Series Smart Switches give you just the right the features, performance, and reliability you need, without making you pay for advanced features you don’t. With Cisco 200 Series switches, you can rest assured that your business applications and communications tools are resting on a strong technology foundation, so you can focus on achieving your business goals.

For More Information
To find out more about Cisco 200 Series Smart Switches, visit www.cisco.com/go/200switches.

To learn about other products and solutions in the Cisco Small Business portfolio, visit www.cisco.com/go/smallbusiness.

Printed in USA C78-634369-04 07/13

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 926 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) Symantec™ Endpoint Protection 12.1.6
Data Sheet: Endpoint Security
Overview
Last year, we saw 317 million new malware variants, while targeted attacks and zero-day threats were at an all-time high1. The threat environment is evolving quickly and given the size and complexity of today's networks, organizations are struggling to keep up. Symantec™ Endpoint Protection is designed to address these challenges with a layered approach to security at the endpoint. It goes beyond traditional antivirus to include firewall, Intrusion Prevention System (IPS) and advanced protection technologies powered by the world’s largest civilian threat intelligence network. Symantec Insight™ technology blocks rapidly-mutating malware and enables faster scan times, while SONAR™ stops zero-day threats by monitoring file behavior and blocking suspicious files while they execute. Granular policy settings such as application control and external media control provide an added layer of security. With a single management console and high-powered agent, Symantec Endpoint Protection delivers powerful protection at the endpoint without compromising performance.

Unrivaled Security
Stops targeted attacks and advanced persistent threats with intelligent security and layered protection • Symantec Endpoint Protection leverages the world's largest civilian threat intelligence network to deliver advanced protection at the endpoint. This network consists of telemetry data coming from 175 million endpoints and 57 million attack sensors in 175 countries, providing unique visibility into the latest security threats. • Derived from this intelligence network, our unique Insight™ technology identifies file reputation by analyzing key file attributes such as how often a file has been downloaded, how long a file has been there, and where it is being downloaded from. This information allows us to block more threats and defend against new, mutating malware. • SONAR™ technology, also powered by this intelligence network, monitors application behavior in real-time and stops targeted attacks and zero-day threats
• Network Threat Protection analyzes incoming data streams and blocks threats while they travel through the network before hitting endpoints
• Symantec™ Endpoint Protection detects and removes threats more accurately2, repeatedly scoring a AAA rating, the highest score, by Dennis Labs Real World A/V Test
Blazing Performance
Performance so fast your users won't know it is there
• Insight™ reputation technology accurately identifies file reputation so only at-risk files are scanned, effectively eliminating up to 70 percent of scan overhead compared to traditional solutions • Symantec™ Endpoint Protection outperforms all products in its class in terms of scan speed and total performance impact3

1. 2.

3. Symantec Internet Security Threat Report 2015
AV-Test, Product Review, Corporate Solutions for Windows 7, April 2015 PassMark Software, "Enterprise Endpoint Security Performance Benchmarks", 2014 1 4.C.h
Packet Pg. 927 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) • Optimizes content delivery for faster distribution and lower storage requirements. Virus definition sets require 90% less disk space on Symantec™ Endpoint Protection Manager.
• Supports embedded systems and Virtual Desktop Infrastructures (VDI) with smaller client size for reduced memory footprint Smarter Management
Single management console across physical and virtual platforms with granular policy control • Delivers intelligent security technologies and policy lockdown features in a single high performance agent with a single management console across Windows®, Mac®, Linux®, virtual machines, and embedded systems • Provides granular policy control with the flexibility to customize policies depending on users and their location • Supports remote deployment and client management for both Windows®and Mac®systems making it easier to keep remote endpoints up-to-date
• Expands traditional reporting by incorporating multi-dimensional analysis and robust graphical reporting in an easy-to-use dashboard
• Reduces network overhead and decreases the time it takes to get updates by allowing one client to send updates to another (Group Update Provider). This also facilitates more effective updates in remote locations.

Five Layers of Protection
Symantec™ Endpoint Protection 12.1.6 provides five layers of protection in one high performance agent all managed through a single console.
1) Network: Symantec’s network threat protection technology analyzes incoming data and blocks threats while they travel through the network before hitting endpoints. Rules-based firewall and browser protection are also included to protect against web-based attacks.
2) File: Signature-based antivirus and advanced file heuristics look for and eradicate malware on a system to protect against viruses, worms, Trojans, spyware, bots, adware, and rootkits Data Sheet: Endpoint Security
Symantec™ Endpoint Protection 12.1.6
2 4.C.h
Packet Pg. 928 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 3) Reputation: Symantec’s unique Insight™
correlates tens of billions of linkages between users, files, and websites to detect rapidly mutating threats. By analyzing key file attributes, Insight™can accurately identify whether a file is good or bad and assign a reputation score, effectively protecting against targeted attacks while reducing scan overhead by up to 70 percent. 4) Behavior: SONAR™leverages artificial intelligence to provide zero-day protection. It effectively stops new and unknown threats by monitoring nearly 1,400 file behaviors while they execute in real-time to determine file risk. 5) Repair: Power Eraser™ aggressively scans infected endpoints to locate advanced persistent threats and remove tenacious malware. Remote support enables the administrator to trigger the Power Eraser scan and remedy the infection remotely from the Symantec™ Endpoint Protection management console.

Extended Policy Control Features
In addition to core protection technologies, Symantec™ Endpoint Protection 12.1.6 also provides granular policy controls, including:
1) Application Control: Allows you to control file and registry access and how processes are allowed to run. It also includes advanced system lockdown features, only allowing whitelisted applications (known to be good) to run, or blocking blacklisted applications (known to be bad) from running.
2) External Media Control: Allows you to restrict access to select hardware and control what types of devices can upload or download information. External media control can be combined with application control to offer more flexible control policies. 3) Host Integrity Checking & Policy Enforcement: Ensures endpoints are protected and compliant by enforcing policies, detecting unauthorized changes, and conducting damage assessments with the ability to isolate a managed system that does not meet your requirements
Optimization for Virtual Environments
Symantec™ Endpoint Protection protects your high-density virtual environment while maintaining performance levels superior to agentless solutions and providing end-to-end security visibility. 1) VMware vShield™ Integration: Allows higher virtual machine (VM) density and reduces I/O and CPU usage 2) Virtual Image Exception: Whitelists files from a standard virtual machine image to optimize scanning Data Sheet: Endpoint Security
Symantec™ Endpoint Protection 12.1.6
3 4.C.h
Packet Pg. 929 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 3) Resource Leveling: Randomizes scan and update schedules to prevent resource utilization spikes 4) Shared Insight™ Cache: Scans files once, shares the results between clients, and de-duplicates file scanning to reduce bandwidth and latency
5) Virtual Client Tagging: Automatically detects and reports whether the client is running in a virtual environment, making it easier to set different policies for virtual machines
6) Offline Image Scanning: Finds threats in offline VM images 7) Scan Throttling for Virtualization: Detects disk load and reduces scan speed to prevent utilization spikes Data Sheet: Endpoint Security
Symantec™ Endpoint Protection 12.1.6
4 4.C.h
Packet Pg. 930 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) * For a complete list of system requirements visit our support page **Support added in Symantec™ Endpoint Protection 12.1.6 MP1a Data Sheet: Endpoint Security
Symantec™ Endpoint Protection 12.1.6
5 4.C.h
Packet Pg. 931 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) More Information
Try it now for FREE
Try the leading solution in endpoint protection by downloading a free 60-day trial today:
http://www.symantec.com/endpoint-protection/trialware
Read third party reviews and find out why Gartner has ranked Symantec as a leader in the Endpoint Protection Platform Magic Quadrant:
http://www.symantec.com/endpoint-protection/news-reviews Visit our website
http://enterprise.symantec.com
To speak with a Product Specialist in the U.S.

Call toll-free 1 (800) 745 6054
To speak with a Product Specialist outside the U.S.

For specific country offices and contact numbers, please visit our website.

About Symantec
Symantec Corporation (NASDAQ: SYMC) is an information protection expert that helps people, businesses and governments seeking the freedom to unlock the opportunities technology brings anytime, anywhere. Founded in April 1982, Symantec, a Fortune 500 company, operating one of the largest global data-intelligence networks, has provided leading security, backup and availability solutions for where vital information is stored, accessed and shared. The company's more than 19,000 employees reside in more than 50 countries. Ninety-nine percent of Fortune 500 companies are Symantec customers. In fiscal 2015, it recorded revenues of $6.5 billion. To learn more go towww.symantec.com or connect with Symantec at:
go.symantec.com/socialmedia.

Symantec World Headquarters
350 Ellis St.

Mountain View, CA 94043 USA
+1 (650) 527 8000
1 (800) 721 3934
www.symantec.com
Copyright © 2015 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved. Symantec, the Symantec Logo, and the Checkmark Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Symantec Corporation or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners. 21320633-4 09/15
Data Sheet: Endpoint Security
Symantec™ Endpoint Protection 12.1.6
6 4.C.h
Packet Pg. 932 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) Tomorrow’s benchmark for multi-workload compute
Purpose-built for flexibility, efficiency, and manageability As the world’s best-selling server,1
the HP ProLiant DL380 Server is designed to adapt to
the needs of any environment, from large enterprise to remote office/branch office. With Gen9, the DL380 just got better, offering enhanced reliability, serviceability, and continuous availability, backed by a comprehensive warranty.

With the HP ProLiant DL380 Gen9 Server, you can deploy a single platform to handle a wide variety of enterprise workloads:
•Virtualization—Consolidate your server footprint by running multiple workloads on a single DL380
•Big Data—Manage exponential growth in your data volumes—structured, unstructured, and semi-structured
•Storage-centric applications—Remove bottlenecks and improve performance •Data warehousing/analytics—Find the information you need, when you need it, to enable better business decisions
•Customer relationship management (CRM)—Gain a 360-degree view of your data to improve customer satisfaction and loyalty
•Enterprise resource planning (ERP)—Trust the DL380 Gen9 to help you run your business in near real time
•Virtual desktop infrastructure (VDI)—Deploy remote desktop services to provide your workers with the flexibility they need to work anywhere, at any time, using almost any device •SAP®—Streamline your business processes through consistency and real-time transparency into your end-to-end corporate data
To support your heterogeneous IT environment, the DL380 Gen9 Server supports Microsoft®
Windows® and Linux® operating systems, as well as VMware® and Citrix® virtualization environments.

Future-proof design with flexible options
Choose the features/functions you need now; add
more as necessary as your business needs grow;
the modular chassis, networking, and controller
designs allow for easy upgrades. Pay for what you
need, when you need it.

Industry-leading performance and energy
efficiency
For delivering faster business results and quicker
returns on your investment; Up to 70 percent
performance gain from the Intel®
Haswell
E5-2620 v3 processors2 and ENERGY STAR®
rated systems drive down energy costs
with 94 percent3 efficient power supplies.

Agile infrastructure management
For accelerating IT service delivery; streamline
management with HP OneView4—the
revolutionary converged management platform
that delivers automation simplicity across servers,
storage, and networking.

Data sheet
HP ProLiant DL380 Gen9 Server
The no-compromise data center standard
1 Q114 IDC WW Quarterly Server Tracker, 30th
May 2014.
2 Intel performance testing, comparing
measurements on platform with two E5-2697 v2
(12C, 2.7 GHz), 8x8 GB DDR3-1866, RHEL 6.3 vs.
platform with two E5-2697 v3 (14C, 2.6 GHz,
145 W), 8x8 GB DDR4-2133, RHEL 6.3, April 2014.
3 94 percent efficient (Platinum Plus) HP Flexible
Slot Power Supplies.
4 HP OneView support is available for ProLiant
Gen9 in DL and BL server models only. Expected
availability is December 2014.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 933 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) Share with colleagues Rate this document
Sign up for updates
hp.com/go/getupdated
Data sheet | HP ProLiant DL380 Gen9 Server
HP Services
Let HP help guide you to the New Style of IT. HP Technology Services delivers confidence, reduces risk, and helps you realize greater agility and stability. • Our Consulting services provide advice and guidance to safely move your workloads to newer technologies.
• HP implementation and installation services enable faster, more reliable startup of your new ProLiant Gen9 servers, and our support portfolio allows you to get connected and get back to business fast.
• We recommend HP Proactive Care for ProLiant Gen9 servers to prevent issues and resolve problems quickly and efficiently.
• HP Foundation Care provides a choice of coverage levels and response times for hardware and software support.
• HP Datacenter Care enables you to operate and evolve your IT environment at a lower cost and with more agility, including our Flexible Capacity Service to acquire IT without impacting capital budget.
• Our support technology lets you tap into the knowledge of millions of devices and thousands of experts to stay informed and in control, anywhere, any time.

Learn more at
hp.com/servers/DL380gen9
© Copyright 2014 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.

SAP is a registered trademark of SAP AG in Germany and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. ENERGY STAR is a registered mark owned by the U.S. government. Citrix is a registered trademark of Citrix Systems, Inc. and/or one or more of its subsidiaries, and may be registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. SD and microSD are trademarks or registered trademarks of SD-3C in the United States, other countries or both. 4AA5-4078ENW, September 2014
Technical specifications
In the following table, bold italic text designates a new or improved feature, as compared to the HP ProLiant DL380p Gen8 Server.

Compute Up to two Intel® Xeon® E5-2600 v3 series, 4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18 cores; PCIe 3.0, up to six available slot(s) Memory HP SmartMemory (24) DDR4, up to 2,133 MHz (768 GB max) Storage Standard HP Dynamic Smart Array B140i, choice of HP Flexible Smart Array or HP Smart SAS HBA controllers FBWC 2 GB DDR3-1,866 MHz, 72-bit wide bus at 14.9 GB/s on P440ar Battery HP DL/ML/SL 96 W Smart Storage Battery
HP SmartDrives 24 + 2 SFF/12 + 3 LFF max, HDD/SSD
Networking 4 x 1GbE Embedded + choice of FlexibleLOM + Standup VGA/serial/USB ports/SD Front VGA opt, rear VGA, and serial standard, 6 USB 3.0, microSD GPU support Single-/double-wide and active/passive up to 10.5" (3) On Premise management HP OneView5
and HP iLO Advance
On Cloud management HP Insight Online with enhanced mobile app On System management Changes in HP iLO, HP Smart Update Manager (HP SUM), Intelligent Provisioning and scripting tools; plus the new UEFI and HP RESTful Interface Tool
Power and cooling 94 percent efficient with Flexible Slot FF Hot plug fans with full N + 1 redundancy, optional high performance fans Industry compliance ASHRAE A3 and A4, lower idle power, and ENERGY STAR Power discovery services Supported
Location discovery services Optional
Form factor/Chassis depth Rack (2U), 26.75" (SFF), 28.75" (LFF) Serviceability—easy install rails Standard
Warranty 3/3/3
QuickSpecs:
hp.com/servers/DL380gen9/qs/
5 HP OneView support is available for ProLiant
Gen9 in DL and BL servers expected later in 2014.
hp.com/qref/dl380gen9

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 934 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) Contactless Antenna
BRF210
Overview
Payment Express is the global leader in card acceptance systems for unattended cashless devices with over 30,000 machines connected to its network. Payment Express owns the hardware design, intellectual property and processor platform, ensuring end to end accountability from card swipe to bankcard provider.

The BRF210 is a Payment Express EMV Compliant Contactless Antenna. It is part of a modular unattended payment terminal combined with the SCR200 Secure Card Reader and or the SKP200 Key Pad and Display, to provide an unbeatable unattended solution for Chip and PIN environments.

In addition, you also benefit from our comprehensive fleet and transaction management tools, available in real time via the internet.

US: 310 670 (PAYX) 7299
[email protected]
www.paymentexpress.com
• 32-Bit Cortex M3 120MHz processor
• Contactless card interfaces - ISO14443A/B
• Supports closed loop proprietary payment
cards (e.g MiFare)(with firmare update)
• FeliCa (with firmare update)
• SAMs card interfaced - optional (external)
• 2 RS232 serial ports
• 4 display LEDs - vertical or horizontal
orientation
• DC Input 5Vdc to 40Vdc
• 3W max power consumption
• Size - 95mm (w) x 85mm (h) x 22mm (d)
Certifications:

EMV Contactless L1 & L2
PayPass 2.1/ 3.x
PayWave 2.1

FEATURES & BENEFITS

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 935 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

Web-Based Electronic Validation System
Product Description
© 2015 Parking Research Enterprises, Inc.

e:VAL® Cloud Based Electronic Validation System
e:VAL® Product Description
Parking Research Enterprises
5901 NW 151st ST., Suite 205
Miami Lakes, FL 33014
www.preinc.com
[email protected]

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 936 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

Web-Based Electronic Validation System
Product Description
© 2015 Parking Research Enterprises, Inc.

Introduction
e:VAL is a secure internet application that allows users to validate parking tickets anywhere internet access is available using a standard web browser. Common challenges associated with paper validation tickets or stickers such as; missing or lost validation tickets, theft, and fraud are eliminated with e:VAL.

The e:VAL solution was designed to:
• Allow users to securely validate parking tickets using a standard web browser. • Provide 100% accounting of all validation activity.
• Manage all cash accounting activity related to the validation process. • Provide reporting on all validation and cash accounting activity. • Prevent theft and fraud related to parking validation. • Reduce or eliminate the need for validation stickers and paper validation tickets. • Provide visitor tracking and reporting.
e:VAL also provides reports on all validations, visitors, and cash management activities.

Managers can generate comprehensive reports displaying the cost of validations provided to visitors.

The types of validations that may be applied include:
• Cash Value –A validation that when applied to a ticket deducts a cash value from the fee of the ticket upon departure.
• Time Value –A validation that when applied to a ticket deducts an amount of time from the duration of the ticket resulting in a discounted fee upon departure. • Rate Change – A validation that when applied to a ticket selects a different rate structure to calculate the ticket fee.
• Calculated Time – A validation that when applied to a ticket deducts the current duration of the ticket resulting in a discounted fee upon departure. • Percentage – A validation that when applied to a ticket deducts a percentage of the total fee.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 937 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

Web-Based Electronic Validation System
Product Description
© 2015 Parking Research Enterprises, Inc.

PROCESS DESCRIPTION

1. The customer obtains an entry ticket.

2. The customer visits a validation provider or merchant account.

3. The customer’s ticket is validated using e:VAL.
a. Web Edition
b. Kiosk Edition
c. Mobile Edition

4. The customer receives the discount applied upon departure at the parking structure an exit column or automated payment machine.

Validation accounts may be configured as one of three types:
• Pre-Payment Accounts – Require the validation provider to fund an account prior to allowing validations to be applied.
• Post Payment Accounts – Allow the validation provider to apply validation up to a set credit limit before a payment must be made.
• No Charge Accounts – Allow validations to be applied without restriction.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 938 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

Web-Based Electronic Validation System
Product Description
© 2015 Parking Research Enterprises, Inc.

PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS
All modules described may be used synchronously and are included with a standard e:VAL system.

WEB Edition
e:VAL Web Edition uses a standard web browser to apply parking validations over the internet. Validation providers log into their facility web portal to manage or apply validations anywhere internet access is available.

Optional information including; visitor name, company, or text may be recorded and associated with a validation transaction.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 939 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

Web-Based Electronic Validation System
Product Description
© 2015 Parking Research Enterprises, Inc.

KIOSK Edition
e:VAL Kiosk Edition uses a small internet appliance designed to provide a customer validation with minimal user interaction. This makes the solution ideal for high volume applications or unattended validation points.

The unit may be programed remotely to display a custom message or change the validation type.

The unit may be connected to the internet through a standard network connector or wirelessly.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 940 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

Web-Based Electronic Validation System
Product Description
© 2015 Parking Research Enterprises, Inc.

Badge Mode
e:VAL Kiosk Edition in Badge Mode requires an authorized badge or barcode to be scanned prior to allowing a validation to take place on the unit. Badges can be created using any common barcode software on existing identification such as a time card or membership identification.

Badges may be programmed through the web interface and restricted by kiosk or the entire system.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 941 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

Web-Based Electronic Validation System
Product Description
© 2015 Parking Research Enterprises, Inc.

Event Management
e:VAL Event Management Edition uses either e:VAL Kiosk or Web Edition to apply different validations based on a particular venue or event. Events may be created, tracked, and assigned to an e:VAL Kiosk in real time from anywhere using the online interface. e:VAL Event Management was designed for using in corporate parks, hotels, and other event driven environments.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 942 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

Web-Based Electronic Validation System
Product Description
© 2015 Parking Research Enterprises, Inc.

Residential Management
e:VAL Residential Management adds the ability to apply a validation to a tenant account as well as have a concierge do so on their behalf. Real time reporting of validations is provided for both types of validations.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 943 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

Web-Based Electronic Validation System
Product Description
© 2015 Parking Research Enterprises, Inc.

PRE Mobile Connect
PRE Mobile Connect allows for integration full integration with mobile phone payment services. Parking patrons are able to quickly and easily pay for their parking using their mobile phone.

The solution requires no additional hardware installation at entry or exit

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 944 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

Web-Based Electronic Validation System
Product Description
© 2015 Parking Research Enterprises, Inc.

PRE Web Service API
The e:VAL solution provides the ability to execute parking validations via a standard web browser, an internet enabled kiosk device or mobile device. Additionally we provide a web service programming interface allowing third party applications the ability to look up and execute parking validations transactions.

All traffic uses HTTPS and user based IP Address restriction is supported.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 945 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

Web-Based Electronic Validation System
Product Description
© 2015 Parking Research Enterprises, Inc.
e:VAL DATAFLOW DIAGRAM
The e:VAL system requires a dedicated computer which facilitates communication between the host SKIDATA system and the e:VAL Hosted Servers. Communication is initiated outbound using HTTPS.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 946 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) Factsheet
Picture may vary from actual product
www.skidata.com
Increase occupancy and sales
sweb.Validate lets you sell a variety of kinds and
contingents of validations to business partners and
to settle payment for these in their entirety. In this way, the nearby shops make parking in your garage more
attractive, and as operators you benefit from increased occupancy and profits. Also, sweb.Validate is fully
integrated into all functionalities of the SKIDATA system.

Increase efficiency
You are more efficient in the both the management and
in the application right from the start. The web-based
solution can be used with existing POS systems or
office PCs – meaning you do not need special hardware
or tickets, or the associated extra maintenance. In
addition customer complaints will be reduced and you
relieve your staff as there are no tickets or vouchers
which have to be produced and sent any more.

Full cost control
Your business partners buy credit, either in advance
or by subsequent settlement, and provide exactly
the right discount for each of their visitors – as
a reward for goods purchased in the shopping
center, or as parking authorizations for suppliers or
clients. Thereby, you can identify at all times how
many validations were awarded and by whom.

Easy to use
Customers can collect multiple validations with their
short-term parking ticket. These are then automatically applied during payment, which greatly simplifies the
payment process. Furthermore, sweb.Validate offers a
web-based management portal. Your business partners
award validations via the web application, the self-service terminal or in the future also using the mobile app.

The opportunities and benefits available for the use of validations have never been so diverse:
sweb.Validate – the new web-based service increases your garage utilization and your turnover through the sale and marketing of discounts to nearby business partners. Shops, offices and hotels comfortably and easily grant electronic reductions to their parking customers.

Simple and
effective - success
with validations.

Parking Management POS & Vaildation
Sales.Services
‘sweb.Validate’

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 947 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) Customer Agreement Terms and Conditions

1. Agreement Governs. This agreement governs your purchase and use of the parking control equipment, including (without limitation) the hardware, software, and any documentation, data, and multimedia content (collectively, the "Equipment") manufactured (or otherwise provided) by SKIDATA, Inc. ("SKIDATA"). PROVISIONS OF ANY PURCHASE ORDER OR SIMILAR DOCUMENT YOU SUBMIT SHALL NOT BE BINDING ON ANY PARTY.

2. Software. With respect to the software that is part of the Equipment, you acknowledge and agree that (a) this agreement permits you, the original user, to use the software solely in the device or computer it is embedded-in or installed-in by SKIDATA (b) you may not transfer the software to another device, computer or storage media (c) you may not disassemble, reverse engineer, copy, sublicense, or distribute the software except as allowed in this agreement, (d) you may transfer the software to another person only if you deliver the device or computer it is embedded-in or installed-in along with any documentation to that person without retaining any copies and that person complies with the terms of this agreement, (e) SKIDATA retains ownership of the software, and (f) the software contains confidential, proprietary information that is a valuable trade secret of SKIDATA and is protected by copyright laws and you will keep such information strictly confidential.

3. Limited Warranty. For a period of 1 Year from the date of delivery of the Equipment (the "Warranty Period"), SKIDATA warrants that the Equipment will materially conform with the applicable descriptions and specifications provided at the time of delivery.

4. Limitations. EXCEPT AS STATED ABOVE, ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED

WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES AGAINST

INFRINGEMENT, OF MERCHANTABILITY, OR OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED. Without limiting the foregoing, SKIDATA does not warrant that the operation of the software is not error-free.

5. Remedies and Limitation. During the Warranty Period, SKIDATA shall, at SKIDATA's option, repair, replace, or refund or credit the purchase price of any portion of the Equipment that does not comply with the warranty set forth above. SKIDATA's obligation to repair, replace, or refund or credit the purchase price of any defective Equipment pursuant to this Section shall not apply to any portion of the Equipment that has been subjected to misuse, mishandling, or storage in a manner inconsistent with its labeling, neglect, modification, unusual physical stress after delivery to the shipper, or fluctuations in the power supply or an unstable network system used in connection with the Equipment.

6.Limitation of Remedies and Liability. YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR DEFECTIVE EQUIPMENT SHALL BE AS SET FORTH ABOVE. IN NO EVENT SHALL

SKIDATA BE LIABLE FOR THE COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS, LOSS

OF PROFITS, OR FOR ANY OTHER SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL

DAMAGES, HOWEVER CAUSED, EVEN IF SKIDATA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 948 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, WHETHER SUCH CLAIMS ARE BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, PRODUCT LIABILITY, OR OTHER THEORIES OF LIABILITY. IF THE

FOREGOING LIMITATION SHALL BE FOUND INAPPLICABLE TO ANY CLAIM OF LOSS

FOR ANY REASON, THE LIABILITY UNDER THIS AGREEMENT SHALL NOT EXCEED THE

PRICE PAID FOR THE DEFECTIVE OR OTHERWISE NONCONFORMING EQUIPMENT GIVING RISE TO SUCH CLAIM.

7. Miscellaneous. Any modification or waiver of this agreement must be in writing and signed by the party against whom enforcement is sought. This agreement represents the entire and final agreement between you and SKIDATA regarding its subject matter. SKIDATA shall have no obligations or liabilities to you under this Agreement. However, you agree that SKIDATA is an intended third-party beneficiary under these terms of this Agreement and may enforce its terms against you. In the event any suit or action is brought to enforce or interpret any of the terms of this Agreement, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover from the other party all reasonable attorney fees incurred at trial, on appeal, and on any petition for review, together with such other expenses, costs, and disbursements as may be allowed by law.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 949 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 950 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 951 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 952 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 953 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 954 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 955 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 956 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 957 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

Exhibit F
Parking Access and Revenue Control RFP

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 958 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 1 City of Santa Monica
Parking Operations

REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS

PARKING ACCESS AND REVENUE CONTROL SYSTEM (PARCS)
PROPOSAL DUE DATE:

Thursday November 14, 2013
This Request for Proposals has been developed specifically for the Parking Access and Revenue Control System, and has been edited from its previous form. Although the general scope has not changed, some of the requirements have been altered. All Proposers are urged to review this document in detail before submitting a proposal.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 959 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 2 Table of Contents
Notice Inviting Request for Proposals……………………………………………………..5 Section 1 – Introduction………………………………………………………….………...6
Section 2 – Instructions to Proposers…………………………………………………….. .6 Compliance with the RFP……………………………………………….….6
Due Date……………………………………………………….……………6
RFP Rules…………………………………………………………………...6
Financial Statements………………………………………………………..7
Acknowledgement of Insurance Requirements………………………….…8
Response Format…………………………………………………………...8
Delivery of Proposal…………………………………………………….….8
Communication Restrictions…………………………………………….…9
Questions……………………………………………………………….…..10
RFP Schedule………………………………………………………............10
Evaluation Criteria…………………………………………………………10
Operational Review………………………………………………………...11
Section 3 – RFP Specifications…………………………………………………………….14 Proposal Submittals……………………………………………………..…14
Closeout Submittals…………………………………………………..……17
Delivery, Storage and Handling Requirements…………………………....17 Warranty…………………………………………………………………...18
Add Alternate: Extended Warranty……………………………………….18
System Description………………………………………………………...19
Design Criteria……………………………………………………………..21
Central Management System………………………………………………23
Revenue Control System………………………………………………......27
Access Control System…………………………………………………….29
Entry, Exit and Pay-on-Foot Stations………………………………...……34 Barrier Gates………………………………………………………………..38
Vehicle Detectors………………………………………………….……….39
Intercom System…………………………………………………………....40
Installation Requirements….………………………………….…………....41
Acceptance Testing………………………………………………….……...42

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 960 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 3 Training ……………………………………………………………..…..... 44
Reports ……………………………………………………………………..44
Section 4 – Administrative Information……………………………………………………46 Performance Bond…………………………………………………….…....46
Liquidated Damages……………………………………………………..…46
Hold Harmless………………………………………………………………46
Termination…………………………………………………………………46
Insurance Requirements…………………………………………….………47
Payment Terms………………………………………………………..…….47
Pricing……………………………………………………………….………47
Interpretations and Addendums………………………………………….…48
Ambiguity, Conflict, or Other Errors in the RFP…………………………....48 Information Provided by City…………………………………………….…49
Cancellation/ Modification/ Solicitation/Rejection………………………....49 Acceptance of Proposals…………………………………………….………49
Conducting Investigations/Requesting Supplementary Information……......50 Ownership and Disclosure………………………………………….………..50
Confidentiality………………………………………………….……………50
Validity of Proposals……………………………………………….………...51
Costs and Expenses of Proposers……………………………….……………51
Proposal Protest Procedure…………………………………………………...51
Examination of Documents…………………………………………………...52
Interpretation s/Questions……………………………………………………..52
Right to Reject Proposals………………………………………………….......53
Authorized Signatories………………………………………………….…......53
Public Records Act…………………………………………………………….53
Non Discrimination……………………………………………………….........53
Oaks Initiative………………………………………………………………….53
Living Wage Ordinance………………………………………………………...53
Arizona Disclosure……………………………………………………………...54
Notice of Award……………………………………………………….…..…....54
Other Information for Proposal Submittals………………………….……...…..54

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 961 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 4 Exhibits:

Exhibit A - Insurance Requirement ……………………………………………………..55 Exhibit B – Oaks Initiative Notice ………………………………………………………57 Exhibit C – Living Wage Ordinance ……………………………………………………59 Exhibit D – Arizona Disclosure ………………………………………………………....61 Exhibit E – Locations List ………………………………………………………………63
Exhibit F – Equipment List ……………………………………………………………...64 Exhibit G – Non-Collusion Affidavit and Non-Discrimination Policy………………….65

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 962 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 5 Notice Inviting Request for Proposals
NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN THAT proposals for the installation of a new parking access and revenue control system (“PARCS”) for fourteen parking facilities owned by the City of Santa Monica, including twelve (12) parking structures and two (2) surface lots located throughout the City’s Downtown, as well as at the City’s Main Library, Civic Center and the Municipal Pier (collectively, the “Parking Facilities”). Proposals will be accepted at City of Santa Monica Parking Operations (“Parking Operations”) located at 1717 Fourth Street, Suite 150, Santa Monica, CA 90401. This Request for Proposals (“RFP”) is a competitive process designed to serve the City’s best interests and to provide Vendors a fair opportunity for their services to be considered in compliance with Santa Monica Municipal Code Chapter 2.24.

SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION
The objective of this RFP is to replace the City’s existing PARCS with an all new fully integrated on-line, real-time PARCS, functioning as described herein, at the Parking Facilities as identified in Exhibit A. The information contained in this RFP defines the necessary steps all Proposers must follow. Failure to follow these steps may result in disqualification. The City reserves the right to accept minor irregularities contained in Proposals and the right to reject Proposals not submitted in compliance with this RFP. The City further reserves the right to reject any and all Proposals.

The RFP is open to all qualified firms and manufacturers that are able to deliver all required materials and functions specified in this RFP.

The installation of the PARCS, and ongoing support service, will be awarded to a single Proposer, they will be responsible for all material, labor, equipment, services, installation, testing, training and ongoing support. No part of the currently installed system may be reused in the implementation of the new PARCS. This includes gates, loops, ticket dispensing devices, ticket and card readers, computers, software, etc.; however, Proposer may use existing communication and power. Proposer is responsible for any special connections and or converters for their system.

The installation must be scheduled to allow for continuous, revenue-collecting operations at all the Parking Facilities. Most installation work will need to occur during overnight hours. No installation work may occur during the holiday season between Thanksgiving Day to New Year’s Day, except as necessary in the new Downtown Parking Structure 6, which is not yet open to the public.

A critical objective of this project is the ability of the PARCS to communicate in real time via a Central Management System (CMS) located in City Hall and in the Parking Structure 5 Office.

The City’s parking operator must have complete and remote control of the system.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 963 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 6 SECTION 2 – INSTRUCTIONS TO PROPOSERS
A. COMPLIANCE WITH THE RFP: Proposals must be in strict compliance with this RFP.

Failure to comply with all provisions of the RFP may result in disqualification of a Proposal.

B. DUE DATE: All Proposals for this project are due by 5:00 p.m. on November 14, 2013.

Any offer submitted by a Proposer as part of a Proposal must remain open and irrevocable for a period of 180 days from the deadline for submitting Proposals stated above. All work to be performed under any contract entered into pursuant to this RFP must be authorized in writing by Parking Operations prior to the commencement of such work.

C. RFP RULES

1. The Proposer is solely responsible to seek clarification, if needed, of any portion of the RFP. All requests by Proposers for clarification of the RFP must be in writing, via email by October 21, 2013 5:00pm Pacific Daylight Time. Thereafter, the City will not respond to requests for clarification received after that time. Failure by a Proposer to seek clarification of any portion of the RFP shall not relieve the Proposer from its representations as set forth hereinabove nor serve as the basis for any claim by the Proposer that it was mistaken or misled in connection with the preparation of its Proposal.

2. Interpretations, corrections, and changes by the City of the RFP will be made by RFP Addendums. Interpretations, corrections and changes of the RFP made in any other manner shall not be relied upon and will not be binding. Notice of an RFP Addendum shall be given only to those Proposers who register and download the RFP via the City’s online bidding system available at:
http://www.planetbids.com/portal/portal.cfm?CompanyID=15167#.

3. Notice by the City of a Proposal Addendum shall be by hand delivery, mail, facsimile or e-mail. The City also anticipates (but shall not be obligated for) making RFP Addendums available on the City website. Failure of a Proposer to receive an Addendum shall not entitle the Proposer to an extension of the Proposal due date nor shall it permit the submission of any additional Proposal information after the deadlines set forth in the Proposal due date.

4. All Proposals must be submitted, filed, made, and executed in accordance with applicable Laws, whether such applicable Laws are expressly referred to herein or not.

5. All Proposals may be withdrawn at any time upon written notice to the City at the place for receipt of Proposals prior to the deadline for submittal of Proposals. Proposals withdrawn prior to the deadline may be resubmitted up to the deadline for submission.

6. Proposers have the continuing obligation, commencing upon submission of his/her/its Proposal, to immediately notify the City, in writing, if it learns that any of the following have occurred: (1) any statement made in its Proposal was false or misleading; (2) circumstances have occurred since the Proposer submitted its Proposal that, if they had occurred prior to the date that Proposer submitted its Proposal, would have constituted grounds for the automatic disqualification of the Proposer; or (3) the Proposer has undergone a change in Ownership in which Ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of its stock or assets has changed.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 964 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 7 7. The City reserves the right, in its sole and absolute discretion, but shall not have the obligation, to conduct Proposer interviews or to visit supplier/manufacturer locations or existing projects as part of the review process.

8. The City reserves the right, in its sole and absolute discretion, but shall not have the obligation, to request, receive, evaluate and score as part of its evaluation of a Proposer’s Proposal any additional or supplemental information relevant to the questions in the Proposal that the City may receive from a Proposer or another source, including, without limitation, information received after the deadline. Unless requested by the City in an RFP Addendum or otherwise required by these Instructions, a Proposer shall not have the right after the deadline for submission to submit new or additional information to supplement its Proposal. All proposal information must be submitted to the Finance Department Parking Office. Any submittal of alternate proposals or offers to staff or elected officials not specified in this RFP will result in disqualification.

9. The City reserves the right, but assumes no obligation, to contact and interview any persons or organizations identified in Proposer’s Project References listed in any response to any portion of the Proposal. Proposers assume sole responsibility for any inaccuracies in the contact information provided. Incorrect contact information provided in response to a request anywhere in the Proposal for a Project Reference may, in the sole and absolute discretion of City, result in the Project Reference being stricken.

10. In addition to the City’s contacting the References listed in Proposer’s responses to the Proposal, the City shall have the right, but not the obligation, before or after a Proposer has been prequalified, to investigate the facts or circumstances of any response by a Proposer. The City has no obligation to afford any Proposer the opportunity, as part of the scoring process of a Proposer’s Proposal or otherwise, to respond to any adverse information that may be received as a result of such investigations. In addition to the foregoing, the City shall have the right, but not the obligation, during the selection process to designate auditors to perform audits or reviews of the books or accounts of any Proposer in order to confirm the accuracy and completeness of financial information provided. The Proposer shall make provision for and is responsible to ensure full and prompt cooperation with such audits or review.

11. The City reserves the right to waive clerical or minor irregularities, errors or omissions in the information contained in any Proposal or in regard to any Proposer’s compliance with Proposal process, and to make all final determinations with respect to the information provided in any Proposal.

D. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS: The Proposer must provide copies of audited financial statements for the most recent three (3) fiscal years for the entity that is proposed to sign the Contract. Audited financial statements should include: balance sheet, income statement, footnotes, and subsidiary schedules. In the event that the Proposer does not have audited financial statements, three years of business tax returns with supporting schedules, may be provided on an exception basis. However, tax returns are not an alternative to providing audited financial statements; if the Proposer has audited financial statements, they must be provided.

1. If the entity that will sign the Contract has a parent company or is proposing as a joint venture, the parent company or joint venture companies must also provide audited

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 965 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 8 financial statements for the most recent three fiscal years. The parent company must provide a statement indicating its intent and means to provide financial assurance of performance. Parent company guarantee forms are provided, Form N.1 and Form N.2, for use by the Proposer.

2. If the entity that will sign the Contract has been in existence less than three years, the Proposer must provide sufficient financial data to substantiate, to the satisfaction of the City, the Proposer’s financial capability.

3. In addition to the audited financial statements, the Proposer must provide a statement from the Chief Financial Officer indicating that there has been no material change in the financial circumstances of the proposing entity (or its parent company or City’s if they are providing financial assurance of performance) since the date of the last audited financial statements.

The City will make best efforts, but make no representation that it will be able to maintain total confidentiality of the Proposer’s financial information. At all times, the City will comply with the provisions of the California Public Records Act.

E. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS: By signing its proposal, Proposer acknowledges that it has read and understands the insurance requirements for the proposal as described in Insurance Requirement and Contract section. Proposer also understands that the evidence of required insurance must be submitted within fifteen (15) working days following notification of its offer being accepted; otherwise, the City may rescind its acceptance of the proposal and retain its Performance Bond.

F. RESPONSE FORMAT: The items listed below are the minimum RFP requirements.

Submit in the same order as the Table of Contents for this RFP. Failure by a Proposer to include all listed items may result in the rejection of its Proposal. Each section should be clearly labeled, with pages numbered and separated by tabs. Proposals must include the following sections:

1. Cover Letter.

2. Qualifications and References.

3. Project Manager’s resume listing qualifications and experience.

4. Data sheets for primary equipment in project.

5. Detailed project schedule.

6. Detailed price sheet with itemized costs.

7. Detailed price list for on-going fees or subscription based services.

8. Warranty/Extended Warranty/Service Agreement.

9. Report samples.

10. Sample training program.

11. Sample punch list.

12. List of Sub-Contractors.

13. List manufacturer of each primary component of system.

14. Recommended spare parts list w/pricing.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 966 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 9 G. DELIVERY OF PROPOSAL: All Proposals are to be delivered before 5:00 p.m., Pacific Daylight Time, on the date shown in Notice Inviting of RFP, to:

City of Santa Monica
Parking Operations
Frank Ching, Parking Administrator
1717 Fourth Street, Suite 150
Santa Monica, CA 90401
[email protected]

1. The Proposer assumes full and sole responsibility for timely receipt of the completed Proposal at the above-listed location. Proposals that are received after the deadline specified in this RFP shall be returned unopened; provided, however, that a late Proposal may be considered if it is the only Proposal received.

2. The City, in compliance with its Sustainable City Program, is encouraging the use of recycled and tree-free products. Where possible, products should be duplex copied and printed on 100% recycled or tree-free paper. They shall be submitted in reusable three ring binders and shall not contain plastic bindings, plastic page cover, or laminated pages.

3. Proposer must submit one (1) original and seven (7) hard copies, total of eight (8) hard copies, of its proposal printed double-sided and on recycled paper and proposals must not contain any non-recyclable material. Additionally, one (1) electronic file that is able to be accessed via a Windows-based PC with Office 2010 and / or can be read in Adobe Acrobat (PDF) must be submitted via email to or on a USB flash drive or CD/DVD.

H. COMMUNICATION RESTRICTIONS

1. In order to preserve the fairness to all parties participating in this RFP process, Proposers are not authorized to communicate with any members or potential members of the selection committee or City staff other than the assigned contact regarding the status of this RFP, the City’s decision related to this RFP, or other questions related to the RFP process, other than as may be expressly permitted herein. There shall be no communication regarding this RFP or the Parking Facilities or their operations by any potential Proposer with any City contractor, lessee, or other stakeholders including, but not limited to, City of Santa Monica Councilmembers, Macerich, Central Parking Systems, Walker Parking Consultants, and Downtown Santa Monica, Inc. Violation of this provision will be grounds for disqualification.

2. Interference with the RFP selection process by any Proposer, employee of a Proposer, persons with vested interests, and/or persons with associated interests of a Proposer may result in disqualification.

3. For purposes of this RFP selection process, interference will be described as: “any effort by any person to sway, coerce, influence, or otherwise affect the outcome of the bid process to their advantage by any means other than fulfilling the terms of the Contractual Documents.” This includes, but is not limited to, attempting to provide gifts or meals of any value, and access to or specialized information to any City contractor, lessee, or other stakeholders either directly or indirectly, including extending an invitation for such activities.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 967 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 10 4. All informal communication regarding this RFP must cease from the date of receipt of this RFP by each Proposer, until the later of 1) when a binding contractual agreement exists with the selected Vendor and all other Proposers have been notified, or 2) when Parking Operations rejects all Proposals.

5. Participating in this RFP process does not restrict day-to-day business or operational communication with Parking Operations or Central Parking Systems to facilitate preexisting business matters. Any communications regarding this RFP outside of the approved the bidding process specified in this RFP is not authorized.

Any protest related to this RFP must follow the process described in Section R. Protest filed outside of this process will be cause for disqualification.

I. QUESTIONS

1. All communication and any questions regarding this RFP must be submitted via email to [email protected] no later than 5:00 PM Pacific Standard Time on October 24, 2013.

Questions and answers will be provided to all registered Proposers via Addendum.

2. All communication related to this RFP is subject to public disclosure laws and no information submitted is considered confidential, unless otherwise specified and allowed by applicable law. All communication from the City shall be submitted exclusively via the City’s online bidding system, and all potential Proposers must be registered via Planet Bids (http://www.planetbids.com/portal/portal.cfm?CompanyID=15167#) in order to receive such communications and participate in this RFP process.

3. Oral, telephone, facsimile or telegraphic modifications to a Proposal will not be accepted.

J. RFP SCHEDULE
We will use the following timeline to manage the RFP and installation process:
 October 17, 2013 RFP Issued
 October 24, 2013 Deadline for Questions
 October 31, Answers to Questions Released
 November 14, 2013 Proposals due
 November 18 – December 6 Evaluation Process
 January, 2013 City Council Approval
 January, 2013 Award Contract
 Late February, 2014 First installation online (Parking Structure 6)  May, 2014 Project Completion
There will not be a pre-bid meeting. Proposers are encouraged to visit the Parking Facilities in order to familiarize themselves with the site layout and its related components. It is each Proposer’s responsibility to schedule a visit with City of Santa Monica Parking Operations. All Proposers should contact Frank Ching, City Parking Administrator at (310) 458-8299 to schedule a time to visit the Parking Facilities.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 968 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 11 K. EVALUATION CRITERIA: The City will form a selection committee to evaluate Proposals. The recommendation and award will be based upon factors defined by Santa Monica Municipal Code Section 2.24.072, and on the factors listed below:
1) Price. The total cost to provide, install, operate, and maintain the PARCS. Ongoing cost including, but not limited to, credit card processing, ticket printing, maintenance, and communications cost.
2) The quality of the material or services offered. Service levels and ability to meet the service standards of the maintenance agreement.
3) The ability, capacity and skill of the bidder to perform or provide the material or services. 4) The capacity of the bidder to perform the contract or provide the service promptly, within the time specified, and without delay or interference.
5) The sufficiency of the bidder’s financial resources and inventory support. 6) The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, training, experience and efficiency of the bidder. The qualifications and experience of assigned project manager. 7) The ability of the bidder to provide such future maintenance or service as may be needed.
8) Any other factor which will further the intent set forth in Section 608 of the City Charter.

L. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW: The PARCS equipment will be installed in the fourteen (14) Parking Facilities plus listed in Exhibit E, replacing all existing equipment listed in Exhibit F. In addition, three new facilities are being added to the system as outlined in as below.

New PARCS Equipment Required for Parking Structure 6
 4 Pay on Foot Machines with Cash, Credit Card and Electronic Payment options  2 Entry Stations w/Ticket Spitter, Prox Card Reader, Barcode Reader, Pinhole Camera, Intercom.  3 Exit Stations w/CC Reader, Prox Card Reader, Barcode Reader, Pinhole Camera, Intercom.  5 Barrier Gates w/Ground Loops
 15 Protective Bollards
New PARCS Equipment Required for for Pier Parking Lot
 2 Pay on Foot Machines with Cash, Credit card and Electronic Payment options  1 Outdoor Shelter for Pay on Foot Machine
 1 Entry Station w/Ticket Spitter, Prox Card Reader, Barcode Reader, Pinhole Camera, Intercom.  1 Exit Station w/CC Reader, Prox Card Reader, Barcode Reader, Pinhole Camera, Intercom  2 Barrier Gates w/Ground Loops
 4 Protective Bollards
New PARCS Equipment Required for KEC Parking Structure
 1 Pay on Foot Machine with Cash, Credit card and Electronic Payment options

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 969 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 12  1 Entry Station w/Ticket Spitter, Prox Card Reader, Barcode Reader, Pinhole Camera, Intercom  5 Exit Stations w/CC Reader, Prox Card Reader, Barcode Reader, Pinhole Camera, Intercom  2 Barrier Gates w/Ground Loops
 4 Protective Bollards

1. The PARCS will accommodate over eleven million cars per year. The City’s current system supports 7,000 keycard users and serves an average of 13,000 transient cars per day operating 24 hours a day, 365 days per year, except at the Main Library and Pier Deck. Other features include web-based validations, monthly keycard integration with transit passes, debit card integration with transit debit program, and prepaid event parking.

2. Parking demand is heavily event-driven. As an example, each year the Los Angeles Marathon finish line is in the City, necessitating the parking of over 30,000 cars that day alone in Parking Facilities located in the City’s Downtown and Civic Center. a. Downtown Parking Structures
The City owns and operates seven (7) parking structures that serve the Third Street Promenade and adjacent commercial area (“Downtown Parking Structures”). The Downtown Parking Structures contain a total of 4,891 parking spaces and serve both transient and monthly customers. The structures were built in 1967 and provided free public parking until 1987, when a fee was instituted and parking meters were installed.

In December 1993, the City Council approved the conversion to a “pay at exit” system that included staffed parking booths. By 2010, all Downtown Parking Structures were automated and serviced by pay machines. The Downtown Parking Structures may be remotely operated by the centralized control panel located in the Parking Office.

Recently, Parking Structure 6 was demolished for reconstruction of a new structure to include 725 spaces, which is scheduled to open in late 2013. The new PARCS for Parking Structure 6 must be installed and operational prior to its reopening.

The City’s Downtown including the Third Street Promenade’s restaurant, retail, office, theater, and residential land uses, as well as the surrounding Downtown commercial area, rely on the Downtown Parking Structures to meet their parking needs. In addition, the City hosts the popular Farmers’ Market on Wednesdays and Saturdays at Arizona Avenue and Second Street, causing peak usage of the area structures between 9 a.m. and 3 p.m. on those days. Farmers’ Market merchants and customers depend on the Downtown Parking Structures for parking and restroom facilities. The Downtown Parking Structures average over 80% capacity, seven days a week, over 12 hours each day. During weekends, evenings, Farmers’ Market hours, and peak tourist and retail periods (including summer and fall/winter seasons), some of the Downtown Parking Structures reach or exceed capacity. Because the Downtown Parking Structures often reach or exceed capacity, the ability of the new PARCS to effectively process large volumes of transactions and vehicles is critical.
b. Santa Monica Place Parking Structures

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 970 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 13 The City owns two (2) parking structures attached to the Santa Monica Place mall and operates them via a lease agreement with Macerich Santa Monica Place LLC (the “Santa Monica Place Parking Structures”). Parking Structure 7, located at 1500 4th Street, contains 938 spaces, and Structure 8 located at 1500 2nd Street, contains 1,029 spaces.

Besides providing parking for mall patrons and employees, the Santa Monica Place Parking Structures serve visitors to the Third Street Promenade, Santa Monica Pier, Palisades Park, City Hall, and surrounding retail establishments. c. Main Library Parking Structure
Opened in 2005, the Santa Monica Main Public Library is located at 601 Santa Monica Boulevard. The parking structure that services the Main Library (“Main Library Parking Structure”) has an entrance located on 7th Street, north of Santa Monica Boulevard. With three levels of underground parking and 525 spaces, the Main Library Parking Structure provides parking for library employees, patrons and guests of special events held at the Main Library. The daily operating hours are from 8 a.m. to 11 p.m. d. Civic Center Area Parking
Civic Center Parking Structure
The Civic Parking Structure (“CCPS”) is located at 333 Civic Center Drive and has approximately 744 spaces. It was completed in 2007 and is the world’s first LEED certified parking structure. Located adjacent to Santa Monica’s City Hall, Public Safety Facility, Civic Auditorium and the Los Angeles County Courthouse, the CCPS provides parking for municipal and county employees, litigants, jurors, nearby hotels, downtown workers, as well as Civic Auditorium and Santa Monica High School events.

Civic Auditorium Parking Lot
The Santa Monica Civic Auditorium is located at 1855 Main Street and the Civic Auditorium Parking Lot (CAPL) stretches from Main Street to 4th Street and from Pico Boulevard to Civic Center Drive. The CAPL has entrances and automated booths on both Civic Center Drive and Main Street. In addition to serving the same clientele as the CCPS, the CAPL can be booked in conjunction with Civic Auditorium events, or for large events, such as filming or trade shows, held in the CAPL proper.

The CAPL has 1,009 spaces, including several spaces dedicated for recharging of electric vehicles. The parking lot operates 24 hours per day, seven days a week with automated pay machines. On event days, staff hours reflect the hours of the event and will often require overnight and/or weekend staffing. For event days or evenings, a flat fee is collected upon entry. Depending on the size and type of the event, one or both entrances are used.
e. Pier Deck Parking

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 971 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 14 Approximately three million visitors come to the Santa Monica Pier annually. The Santa Monica Pier has restaurants, street performers, shops and a world-famous amusement park, Pacific Park. The Pier Deck Parking Lot consists of 284 spaces. It operates seven days a week throughout the year from 7:30 am to midnight, with the exception of special events when times may vary. The Pier Deck Parking Lot currently has a cashier on duty at the entrance and exit gates. Installation of the new PARCS will require the installation of one or two pay machine(s) with entrance and exit gates so that the Pier Deck Parking Lot will become an automated and be remotely operated by the Parking Office. f. Ken Edwards Center (KEC)
Ken Edwards Center is located at 1527 4th Street. It was designed specifically for the needs of seniors and people with disabilities. WISE & Healthy Aging, a non-profit agency, is a tenant of the Ken Edwards Center. In March 2013, the City’s Senior Center also relocated to Ken Edwards Center. The parking structure that services the KEC (“KEC Parking Structure”) contains 116 parking spaces, of which 34 are available to the public. The remaining spaces are assigned to building tenants. The KEC Parking Structure will primarily serve the needs of the KEC, with additional public parking available during off peak hours. Similar to the Pier Deck Parking Lot, the City anticipates that the installation of the new PARCS will include installation of one or two pay machines with entrance and exit gates so that the KEC Parking Structure will become an automated facility and be remotely operated by the Parking Office SECTION 3 – RFP SPECIFICATIONS

1. PROPOSAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:

1. Product description for each component including the following:
a. Detail of user interface.
b. Operating temperature and humidity ranges.
c. Housing material and access panel location.
d. Mounting requirements.
e. Electric power requirements

2. Description of the CMS software and hardware including the following:
a. Configuration diagram.
b. Software platforms and programming language.
c. Communication protocol, polling procedures and transaction message flow from peripheral devices to and through CMS.
d. Communication failure/error identification and recovery. e. Fault tolerance.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 972 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 15 f. Back-up procedures.
g. Data storage and retrieval procedures.

3. Photos of actual installations are recommended. No videos will be accepted.

B. RCS Credential: Proposer shall provide rationale for offering one of the following:

1. Magnetic stripe tickets

2. Barcode tickets
C. Detailed description of cloud-based validation system functions and features.

D. Sample reports as defined throughout this document.

E. Name of all manufacturers providing primary components.

F. Manufacturer’s Qualifications:

1. In continuous operations for previous five years.

2. Primary components installed in three or more parking facilities of similar size and complexity. Provide the following for each installation. a. Name of project.
b. Location.
c. Contact name, telephone number and email address.
d. Date of installation.
e. Number of lanes.
f. Description of equipment and quantities.

G. Installer Qualifications:

1. Licensed in California. Submit contractors’ license with Proposal.

2. Continuously worked with equipment manufacturer, including providing installations and maintenance, for minimum of three years.

3. Approved in writing by PARCS manufacturer(s).

4. Documentation of manufacturer’s installation training within previous two years.

5. Proven ability to provide service and support after installation, meeting minimum requirements as specified herein.

6. Manufacturer approved service center located within two hours driving distance of site.

H. References: Provide a minimum of three (3) references of similar size and scope (multiple facilities w/multiple lanes, pay on foot machines in remote locations, etc.).

1. Name of project

2. Location

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 973 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 16 3. Contact information – phone, email, address

4. Month and year of installation

5. Number of lanes

6. Description of project

7. Cost of project
I. Project Manager: Contractor must propose an assigned Project Manager and provide his/her resume. The Project Manager will be the point of contact and oversee the entire project, both operationally and administratively.

J. Organizational Chart of all relevant staff.

K. List of sub-contractors, identifying nature of work.

L. PCI Compliance: Provide proof that the proposed PARCS is compliant with current Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard (PCI DSS) requirements. This pertains to all credit and debit card acceptance hardware, software and other system components as defined by the PCI DSS. Acceptable proof of PCI DSS Compliance is that the equipment manufacturers are listed on Visa and MasterCard web sites as PCI DSS Compliant. It is not acceptable to state that the credit card processor is PCI DSS Compliant or is in the process of becoming compliant and/or receiving validation.

M. Warranty: Submit a copy of Warranty and clear details of procedures in the event of failure and instances that may affect validity or limitations of warranty.

N. Training Plan: Submit a comprehensive training plan.

O. Project Schedule:

1. Submit a detailed project schedule (from signed contract to acceptance testing), identifying milestones along the way, as well as potential challenges to the schedule.

2. Describe how Proposer will maintain the schedule.

3. Describe existing PARCS removal and new PARCS installation will occur without ceasing existing operations.

4. Provide an expedited installation schedule for Structure 6 (first installation).

Time is of the essence.

5. As a separate sub section to the installation schedule, provide a Data Conversion Plan.
a. Plan shall detail how each parking garage or lot will be brought on line with the new PARCS while the “yet to be converted” lots and garages continue operations under the current system.
b. Plan shall discuss how both systems shall run in tandem until such a time that the news PARCS can take full control of all facilities.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 974 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 17 P. List of manufacturer recommended spare parts specific to this installation, including:

1. Part name.

2. Part serial number.

3. Unit price.

4. Recommended quantities.

5. Total cost.

Q. Anti-Tailgating: Tailgating has been a problem proposer shall describe system features that will address this issue.

2. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Within 30 days of award of contract.

1. Equipment finishes and colors (if applicable).

2. RCS ticket or alternate credential.

3. ACS credentials.

4. Other items requiring City selection.

B. Acceptance Testing Plan: Thirty (30) days prior to start of first test C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide operation and maintenance manuals, standard operating procedures and/or guidelines for all components Thirty (30) days prior to start of first test.

3. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS
A. Assume care, custody and control of all PARCS equipment and components.

B. Replace damaged materials at no cost to City.

C. Deliver equipment to site in manufacturer’s original containers to prevent damage and marked for easy identification.

D. Store equipment in original containers in clean, dry location.

E. Remove gate arms and cover lane equipment in areas with active construction to avoid damage. Reinstall prior to lane and system acceptance testing.

F. Spare Parts: Deliver spare parts to be maintained on site complete and ready to use, prior to commencement of SAT. Maintain inventory of spare parts at this level as during warranty period.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 975 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 18 G. Stock Items: Furnish the following stock items prior to commencement of acceptance testing. City must approve color and artwork prior to final order of any item that is custom printed.

1. 10,000 ACS credentials:
a. 3,500 RFID Cards
b. 3,500 HID Proximity
c. 2,000 HID Proximity w/Magnetic Stripe
d. 1,000 Magnetic Stripe CDC

2. Three (3) spare ribbons/toner cartridges, etc. for each printer requiring ribbon, toner, etc. as appropriate.

3. Twelve (12) rolls of receipt paper per POF and EXS.

4. Two (2) lockable coin vaults per POF.

5. Two (2) lockable banknote vaults per POF.

6. Gate Parts
a. 4 spare drive pins (or equivalent, if applicable) per facility. b. 2 complete spare gate arm assemblies per facility.

H. Lock and Key Requirements:

1. Identical locks and keys for all like equipment but unique to this project so that keys from other facilities will not provide access.

2. Provide City or City’s Representative with two sets of keys for each lockable piece of equipment and two sets of master keys.

4. WARRANTY
A. General: Equipment and entire PRACS installation (100% parts and labor) for two (2) years from date of final acceptance by the City. System maintained and serviced against any and all malfunctions due to manufacturing or installation defects at no cost to City during warranty period, including preventative maintenance per manufacturer's recommendations or as necessary to keep equipment in good working order. Software support provided during warranty period to include all software upgrades at no additional cost to City.

1. Maintain a log of all maintenance, preventive maintenance and repair work performed under warranty and provide to City at end of warranty period.

2. Technical Support: Service is required 24 hours per day, seven days per week, and 365 days per year during and after warranty period. Response time from initiation of trouble call to on-site response by qualified service technician cannot exceed four hours with solution. Repair or replace all defective or damaged items under warranty by end of the following calendar day on which notice was given.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 976 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 19 B. Install all commercially-released or proprietary software and operating system updates, patches and upgrades applicable to this system that are released during warranty period and maintenance agreement at no additional cost.

C. Provide all system programming, including rate changes.

D. All Microsoft based software included but not limited to Windows and applications upgrade shall be included for the entire term of the warranty and maintenance contract at the expense of the vendor. This should be inclusive in supporting warranty and maintenance contract.

5. ADD ALTERNATE: EXTENDED WARRANTY AND PREVENTATIVE

MAINTENANCE CONTRACT
A. In Cost Section only, provide annual pricing for extending the warranty and preventative maintenance for up to ten years.

B. The City may, at its own election, extend the warranty and maintenance period up to eight (8) additional years after acceptance of the systems and the initial two year warranty. Pricing for extended maintenance agreement and warranty must be listed as an option, and the pricing guaranteed for up to ten (10) years.

6. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. This is an automated PARCS consisting of Pay-on-Foot revenue control equipment for transient transactions and proximity card, RFID and magnetic stripe access control equipment for monthly patrons. Provide all necessary components and materials for a complete and functioning system.

B. System Design: Gated PARCS with the following subsystems:

1. Central Management System (CMS) consisting of server, task or subsystem computers and workstations providing on-line monitoring and control of all PARCS devices. Through information generated by system reports, a complete CMS capable of:
a. Correlating RCS and ACS entries and exits with vehicles present. b. Reconciling time parked with revenue generated.
c. Providing independent and consolidated occupancy and activity counts for both RCS and ACS systems.

2. Microprocessor controlled, in on-line, virtual real-time communication with CMS.

3. Transactions occurring at equipment report to CMS immediately, with communications hierarchy appropriate to need for action or response from another component, feature or subsystem.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 977 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 20 4. All transaction data is available to CMS workstations within one minute of completing transaction at any device. Delays or functional degradation resulting from data communication between devices over CMS network is not acceptable.

5. Each primary component communicates complete transaction log to CMS. In event of communication failure, devices continue to operate in off-line mode and store a minimum of 2,000 transactions, or have sufficient system redundancy, to insure availability of transaction data upon restoration of CMS. In event of failure during communication, an error-checking and recovery routine is employed to prevent corruption of data files.

6. ACS for regular (‘monthly’) parkers who prearrange parking and utilize RFID or HID proximity card access.

7. RCS for ‘transient’ parkers who pull a ticket to enter and process the ticket to exit, including
a. ENS with ticket dispensers.
b. Pay-on-Foot system consisting of POF machines and Exit Stations. c. Pay-in-Lane system consisting of PIL machines.
d. Cloud-based validation system.

8. Primary Components:
a. RCS consisting of ENS, ticket dispenser, PIL, POF, and Exit Station. b. ACS consisting of antennas, transponders, readers and access credentials. c. Barrier gates.
d. CMS including software, computers with related monitors, data communication equipment, data storage devices and printers. e. Intercom system including master station, call stations and related hardware.

9. Additional components and accessories:
a. Vehicle detectors (loops or sensors) and count system at all entrance and exit lanes.
b. Protective bollards.
c. Electronic signs.

C. Communication Infrastructure
The City of Santa Monica Information Systems Department (“ISD”) uses Hewlett Packard servers and VMWare virtual server infrastructure for City business applications hosted in its primary Data Center in City Hall. It is preferred that the PARCS application support virtual server environments based on VMWare standards used by the City. ISD will provide required virtual servers for the PARCS application based on specs provided by the selected Vendor. In addition, it is preferred that all HUB computers be commodity hardware such as a standard PC. The City selected Hewlett

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 978 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 21 Packard E series Desktop Computers through a competitive process as a standard platform for all its client computing needs.

ISD operates an Enterprise Network using Cisco Layer 2, 3 switches and routers. All City related facilities including Parking Structures and some Parking Lots are connected via fiber-optic communications network to one of five hub sites located throughout the City. The City uses MRV multiplexers and SFP’s for its Metropolitan Area Network (MAN). The Network core and edge devices are based on Cisco commodity hardware.

ISD will work with the selected Vendor to make necessary improvements, upgrades and to interconnect the new PARCS system VLAN to the City Network. Proposers are encouraged to inspect the current communication infrastructures and provide required specifications needs to support the new PARCS equipment as part of any Proposal.

D. Power Requirements:

1. Provide and install all necessary device control wiring, communications wiring and additional power wiring required by system. Include special electrical power and grounding. Proposer can evaluate the current wiring and reuse if reliable and reusable but will be liable for any failures or performance issues.

2. Provide and install any power conditioning that is required for the operation of the system. Power provided for this Project is 120 VAC +/- 10% and 60 Hz from circuits dedicated to PARCS.

3. Provide and install all electronics and communications equipment for communication network. Terminate and connect all communications cabling.

4. Provide and install 30-minute battery back-up power for servers, task computers, work stations, entry and exit stations, barrier gates and POFs. Provide unit pricing for each component.

5. Proposer must perform their own site evaluation to ascertain whether existing communications and power conduits are sized correctly and are good and useable for new communications cable, new vehicle detection loops and all necessary power terminations. If any existing conduits and/or cables are found to be noncompliant with local codes or should the system proposed require additional conduit and/or cables, the Proposer must specify location(s) and include the cost of same in proposal. All new electrical conduit and power wiring shall be in compliance with local codes and manufacturer requirements.

6. The City has the desire to enhance communication speed and reliability. City of Santa Monica ISD will coordinate with the selected Proposer with respect to specifications and an upgrade schedule.

7. DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Accuracy: Provide the following minimum accuracy levels. Calculate accuracy by dividing the accurate counts/calculations by all counts/calculation.

1. Ticket reading: 99%

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 979 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 22 2. Fee calculation: 99%

3. Transaction counts: 99%

4. Exception counts: 99%

5. Revenue amounts: 99%

6. Data received and accepted by computer system as valid: 100%

7. Data transmission: Less than one message re-transmission per hour.

B. Equipment Construction: Design and construct all components and equipment with the following:

1. Perform in and withstand the climate conditions of the City of Santa Monica, including wind and sand in beach areas.

2. Ability to add future hardware devices without a major upgrade to the hardware or software within seven (7) years from the date of acceptance of the PARCS. If Proposer anticipates a necessary major upgrade during the next seven (7)-year period, Proposer must specify pricing.

3. Islands at gated lanes must not be poured until stub ups and anchor bolts are properly placed and any conflicts with installation at particular lane location are resolved

4. Durable vandal and weather resistant cabinets, which are able to maintain finish, look, integrity and functionality in the environment in which installed for a period of ten years.
a. Mounting holes accessible only from inside of cabinets. b. Hinged cabinet doors that swing clear of bollards, walls, columns and any other obstructions.

5. Modular internal components, to extent practical, for easy maintenance and replacement.

6. Corrosion resistant connection boxes for all wiring connections.

7. Control logic and communication capability as necessary and required herein.

8. Compatible communication ports for all communications and connections.

9. Crystal controlled time clock/calendar that is updated at least once daily by CMS and accurate to one minute per ninety days for all primary components.

C. Fiber Optic (F/O) Cabling: Use fiber optic communications wiring for all Ethernet runs longer than 300 fee in accordance with the following:

1. Provide surge protection devices at both ends of all non-fiber optic communication wiring longer than 25 feet.

2. Include pull boxes as shown on the drawings or per industry standards.

3. Provide and install multimode 62.5 / 125um plenum rated optic cable or of quality required to provide communication and data transfer in underground conduit.

4. Provide a detailed parts list showing number and manufacturer, for all fiber backbone material. (F/O cable, Terminators, Patch Panels, Fiber Duplex Patch Cords, etc.)

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 980 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 23 5. Label all F/O components as per TIA/EIA-606. (Cables, Connectors, Hub facilities, Termination facilities, Conduits, and Pathways). All Drops are to be labeled.

6. Do not exceed minimum bend radius for all F/O cable.

7. Do not exceed allowable tensile rating for F/O cable during installation. If a winch or pulling machine is used, a dynometer must be used to monitor tension.

8. F/O testing and certification of all runs is a requirement, per industry standards.

Written test results of each test must be submitted to City for review. a. End-to-End Attenuation testing.
b. Optic Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) testing.

D. Future Upgrades: The proposed PARCS must have the ability to add hardware devices in the future without a major upgrade to the hardware or software within 7years from the date of acceptance. If Proposer anticipates a major within 7 years, specify pricing in price form.

8. CENTRAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (CMS)
A. User Interface:

1. Capable of operating across City’s Local Area Network (LAN), accessible, with proper user ID and password, to all authorized users’ workstations with installed CMS software modules on City’s LAN.

2. Windows version 7 or later.

3. Provide field programmable functions of each device from CMS (password protected), including rate structures (from CMS only), with any and all programming changes reported in daily log.

4. Maintain a secure connection while active, and automatically log-off after programmable period of inactivity.

5. Remote access to CMS over standard TCP/IP connection (may use web browserbased applications).

6. Browser-based user-interface modules utilize client/server technology or equivalent. The following general requirements apply to all components or modules:
a. Windows-based graphical user interface.
b. Allow for both standard and custom report formats.
c. Adequate security to allow for different classifications of users.

B. Computer System:

1. Provide and install server/host computer in a lockable rack, off the ground and protected from dust and debris.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 981 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 24 2. Provide CMS servers, task computers, workstations and all ancillary equipment with sufficient power, capacity and communication bandwidth to meet functional performance demands of PARCS software without loss of responsiveness to user input or slowing of any end node device or workstation.

3. Provide a minimum of 5 separate workstations with monitor, keyboard, processor and printer.

4. Provide minimum of 5 licenses and software for remote access to CMS on existing computers provided by City.

5. Meet performance recommendations of software vendor and accommodate for growth and expansion as specified herein without any specified function being slowed or delayed by performance of any other function or task.

6. System back up in less than three hours.

7. Report generation at a minimum of 35 pages per minute.

C. Data Storage:

1. Reside and operate on an ANSI SQL-compliant relational database server product.

2. Incorporate integrity controls to enforce three types of integrity:
a. Entity integrity ensures no duplicate keys within a table and all non-null tables are populated.
b. Relational integrity ensures no orphan keys, that all transactions properly deleted children entities, and properly modified adult references. c. Domain integrity ensures all attribute value ranges are enforced.

3. All transaction records stored as actual data, not in report format.

4. Data shall be archived in a format readable by report generator.

5. On-line data storage capacity to store a minimum of 24 months of system data.

6. Archive data automatically every six months with first archive after first 18 months, so that server always has most recent 12 months of data. d. Be on industry standard media such as DLTs.
e. Archive or restore transaction database in less than one hour. f. Use redundant on-line storage such as Level 1 RAID Technology.

7. Either periodically or on demand, CMS downloads and sends electronically, revenue reports for integration into City's financial department via TCP/IP connection to designated computer network in Microsoft Excel or approved equivalent.

D. Licensing

1. Supply all required operating system and application software licenses in sufficient quantities to accommodate number of users and equipment in installed system.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 982 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 25 E. Security

1. Utilize protocols and passwords that prevent unauthorized access to software and hardware and manipulation of data and reports, including individual transactions.

2. Include minimum of 4 levels of access authorization to all operational, administrative and reporting functions and provide the following security features:
a. Define individual user and group based security.
b. Ability to assign a unique user ID and password for each person authorized to use system.
c. Ability to establish an expiration period for passwords and periodically change that password for each authorized user ID.
d. Ability to disable a user ID following successive log-on failures exceeding a specific limit.
e. Ability to view and report user and group level security rights and create user-defined fields.
f. Ability to de-activate codes for former users and internal and external customers.

3. Password protected CMS subsystems to restrict access to individual functions of each subsystem:
a. Revenue Control System Monitoring, Control and Reporting. b. Access Control System Monitoring, Control, and Reporting. c. Occupancy Monitoring and Reporting.
d. Equipment Monitoring and Reporting.
e. Ad-Hoc Report Generator.

F. Occupancy Monitoring: Provide the following functions.

1. Every vehicular entry and exit lane serves as a counting location, equipped with vehicle detection devices.
a. Each entering vehicle subtracts a count of one from number of available spaces.
b. Each exiting vehicle adds a count of one to number of available spaces. c. Provide directional logic (e.g. a vehicle entering through an entrance lane or through an exit lane is counted as an inbound vehicle).

2. Track and display the number of available parking spaces on computer monitor(s).

3. Provide anti-coincidence packages to accurately monitor entering and exiting vehicles that occur simultaneously.

4. Provide two programmable thresholds for each parking area:

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 983 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 26 a. One threshold to trigger "full status". When full status is reached count system operates in one of two modes, selectable by user.

I) Mode one signals an alarm and relies on human intervention to activate appropriate dynamic signs and gate status changes.

II) Mode two automatically activates appropriate dynamic signs and gate status changes but allows for manual overriding of "full status". b. Second threshold triggers "open status". The two operating modes described above also apply to “open status” threshold.

5. Ability to automatically disable ticket dispensers when facility is full, but allows for manual override.

6. Ability to activate any and all electronic signs, individually controlling each facility or zone within a facility, including "FULL" signs and lane control lights provided by PARCS Contractor, as well as "FULL" or capacity signs provided by others.

7. Ability to maintain and display separate counts for each facility or zone within a facility, each with total occupancy or spaces available, total RCS and ACS occupancy and total RCS and ACS spaces available.

8. Ability to maintain and report for each entry and exit lane:
a. Non-resettable counters tracking monthly, transient and total parking patron usage.
b. Counts of illegal/opposite direction entry/exit for each lane. c. Vends, vehicle detector and gate counts.

9. Ability to store lane, facility and zone counts at hourly intervals in daily files for specialized reports to analyze lot utilization and activity levels.

10. Transaction Counts: Provide, display and compare separate counts related to each lane:
a. At entry lanes: Ticket dispenser count plus ACS count compares with directional lane count and gate count.
b. At exit lanes: Exit lane transactions plus ACS count compares with directional lane count and gate count.

11. Deliver data to existing signage system.

G. Equipment Monitoring: Provide the following functions.

1. Monitor operational status of all entry and exit lanes and POFs.

2. Warning alarms displayed and tracked through CMS for the following conditions:
a. Lane status; open or closed.
b. Gate failure.
c. Gate up.
d. Low-ticket supply.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 984 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 27 e. Ticket in throat.
f. Illegal entry or exit (reverse direction through lane). g. Back-out ticket.
h. Ticket jam.
i. Vehicle detected in lane for 30 seconds without initiating transaction. j. Count status.
k. Passback violation.
l. POF tampering.
m. POF door status, open or closed.
n. POF receipt paper status.
o. POF note and coin vault status.

3. Visual and audible abnormal status alarms at each computer workstation.

4. When an alarm is turned off, visual and audible signals stop at all workstations.

5. A daily log report identifying all system alarms.

6. Monitor electrical circuits and frequency of operational errors in components to identify maintenance actions to prevent failure of a component.

9. REVENUE CONTROL SYSTEM (RCS):

A. CMS Interface: Provide the following functions in concert with the CMS.

1. Remote programming of POFs.

2. Testing of fee structure against existing facility usage statistics.

3. Uploading and consolidating reports from Exit Stations and POFs.

4. Retrieval and review of all transactions, based on user-defined parameters.

B. Reports: Provide the following reports which can be displayed on a monitor, printed on a printer, converted to an ASCII file and are sortable chronologically and by POF, shift or lane.

1. Daily Event Log - A listing of changes to system and users who made changes, including print communication messages, facility lane equipment alarms, remote gate opening, and system log on/offs.

2. Daily Transaction Report – A daily summary of all transactions processed at each POF and Exit Station, including entry time, exit time, transaction time, payment amount and type.

3. Field sortable entry lane counts (equipment “vend” for ENS, ACS, gate, activation loop, and closing loop counts).

4. Field sortable exit lane count totals (equipment "vend" for Exit Station, ACS, gate, activation loop, and closing loop counts).

5. Revenue Alarms Report – Provide report to include at a minimum remote gate vends and manual gate open counts.

6. Lane Volume Report - Provide entry and exit counts by date. This report is used for management planning and statistical information.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 985 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 28 7. Duration of Stay Report - Provide duration of stay based on patrons' elapsed parking time and patron time of entry. This report is utilized in rate structure and facility usage analysis, management planning, statistical information, rate analysis, and revenue analysis.

8. Ticket Sequence Report – Provide a complete sequence of transactions related to individual tickets (i.e., information about how and when a ticket was issued tied to how and when fee was paid and ticket was processed).

9. Ticket Value Report - Provide ticket stratification based upon value of all transactions processed. Provide breakdowns for each rate structure. This report is used for revenue analysis, rate analysis, management planning, and statistical information.

10. Outstanding Ticket Report – Provide a listing of tickets that have been issued but are not yet processed at an exit. CMS receives data on each ACS transaction from ACS controller, adding it to transaction log and consolidating it into daily activity reports.

11. Back-out/Stolen Ticket List – Provide a chronological list of back-out tickets issued by ticket dispenser for selectable times.

C. Rate Structure:

1. A minimum of twenty completely different fee structures.

2. Each fee structure shall have the ability to program a minimum of forty fee increments.

3. Automatic adjustment for daylight saving time and leap year in fee calculations.

4. User defined maximums (12-hour, 24-hour, etc.)

5. Provide for:
a. Day, evening and night rates.
b. Weekend rates.
c. Flat rates.
d. Event rates.
e. Holiday rates.

6. User defined grace time parameters
a. Exit grace time.
b. Turnaround grace time.
c. Elapsed grace time – to allow for elapsed time from payment at a central location, retrieve vehicle and drive to exit lane.

7. Ability for City Staff to implement permanent or temporary rate changes remotely and independently. Rate changes shall be testable and easily return to base rate structure.

D. Credit and Debit Cards:

1. Accept the following types of card payments:

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 986 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 29 a. VISA.
b. MasterCard.
c. American Express.
d. Discover Card.
e. Bank Debit Cards with Credit Card logo.

2. Utilize credit and debit card acceptance hardware, software, and other system components that are compliant with all PA-DSS, FACTA and PCI rules, regulations and practices (including Visa/MasterCard’s CISP program, Discover’s DISC program, and American Express’s DSOP program). To accomplish this, the following is required:
(NOTE: If the City is the Merchant on Record, it is the City’s responsibility to complete the tasks listed below. In such event, the City, its Parking Operator and the selected Proposer will cooperate to ensure these tasks are completed. If the City is not the Merchant on Record, it is the Proposer’s responsibility) a. Verify the installation of anti-virus software, and malware monitoring tools. b. Install and manage hardware firewall device.
c. Use only approved dual-layer authentication remote management software. d. Configure password encryption and password management on Revenue Control computers. These are windows settings on the back-office Revenue Control host computer to be set up by the installation vendor.

3. Complete development of interface with City’s merchant account provider TransFirst, or third party gateway processor Six Card Solutions. The City prefers a solution that does not require utilizing a third party gateway processor for credit cards.

4. Provide EMV (Europay/MasterCard/VISA) and NFC (Near field Communications) capable credit card processing, so that no devices or software need to be replaced for EMV or NFC acceptance when appropriate/available in this region.

5. Configure system such that information from each credit card transaction is transmitted to a server in direct communication with authorizing clearinghouse via DSL, T1, or similar connection to provide on-line real time approvals for each transaction.

6. Maximum authorization time from patron confirmation to clearinghouse authorization is nine (9) seconds.

7. Confirm and provide record formats required by City’s financial institution.

8. Print receipts with a signature line only when amount is greater than a minimum fee, established by City, or if credit card information was entered manually.

9. If communication is down, process credit cards in batch mode, per PCI guidelines and protocols.

E. Cloud-Based Validation System

1. Ability to validate tickets via any web-enabled device.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 987 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 30 2. Patrons with a validated ticket bypass and insert validated ticket at Exit Station.

3. Allow up to 999 validation accounts to be programed within CMS. Each account to include a unique account number and allow validations based on use, time or dollar value.

4. Allow all validations to be reported and sortable by time, date, origin, and use.

5. Software tracks and stores user ID, ticket number and validation amount for billing purposes.

6. Validation billing software calculates and prepares monthly invoices.

7. Include system pricing and any on-going fees in price proposal. Proposer’s system shall not utilize per-transaction pricing.

10. ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (ACS):

A. CMS Interface:

1. Provide an on-line, computer-based access control system for those authorized by City to have access and egress at parking facilities without being processed through a ticketed system, for example; a “monthly parker”.

2. Distributive, networked or centralized processing may be employed, so long as required multi-lane control features such as anti-passback, occupancy and activity tracking are maintained. Employ RFID readers and Proximity readers as specified herein for access for the following distinct user groups:
a. City or City-authorized vehicles requiring free and fast ingress and egress to parking facilities.
b. Monthly parkers who have a contractual agreement and/or will prepay or prearrange billing for parking on a monthly basis.
c. Frequent parkers, who prepay or prearrange billing and are charged for parking at fees equal to, or discounted from public parking fees. Includes:

I) Smart cards with a prepaid balance that delineates at each use II) Cards that are pre-encoded for a specific number of uses, dates of use or other parameter.

III) Automatic credit card billing after each use.
d. City of Santa Monica transit cards.
e. Big Blue Bus monthly and debit cards.

3. Individually recognize and process up to ten-thousand (10,000) ACS users at all reader locations.

4. Have at least sixteen (16) preprogrammed access levels capable of being changed without reprogramming of ACS.

5. Provide anti-passback control. With this feature, users enter and exit in proper sequence (i.e., entry, exit, entry, exit, etc.).
a. Selectable option to allow either "hard" (out of sequence user is rejected and an alarm is generated at ACS controller and CMS) or "soft" mode (out of sequence user is allowed access but reported.)

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 988 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 31 b. In both hard and soft modes, each out of sequence event is reported as an exception transaction in daily ACS access log.
c. Password protected "resynchronization" of all users to one access before return to anti-passback control.

6. Link users to each other to allow one entity to be identified with and/or pay for a group of users. Provide up to one-hundred (100) such ACS groups.

7. Ability to group ACS cards and limit access to a preset maximum number of cars in facility at any given time, and/or allow and track overages to be invoiced separately.

8. Nesting feature:
a. Ability to require parkers that are assigned to park in a specific level (nest area) to use ACS credential to enter and exit nest area in order to exit facility.
b. Required sequence: In facility, In nest, Out of nest, Out of facility.

9. Central ACS controller requirements:
a. Issue and reprogram ID devices.
b. Allow authorized supervisor to create, store, send and receive user programming from ACS readers. Password protected access to programming, with multiple levels of access, to any and all information regarding specific blocks and/or suites of cards.
c. Provide a data base for ACS management including the following:

I) Provide at least twenty (20) programmable record fields for each person issued an ACS credential and at least twelve (12) programmable record fields for each user’s vehicle(s). .

II) Allow specific parker record files to be retrieved, displayed and/or printed based on selectable criteria, such as current ACS status, access group, access level, and/or ID numbers (except data that is password protected).

III) Allow searching, sorting and printing of database by any field for routine and special forms such as invoices or mass-mailings.

IV) Consolidating and retaining data to allow for report generation. The following are minimum required reports, viewable on a workstation monitor and/or printable on demand:
a) Activity Usage Reports – Provide a chronological list of ACS usage, including date, time, credential, user type and location of entries and exits; capable of being sorted by any field. b) Count Reports – Monitor and report counts of ACS vehicles present on an hourly basis by group, access level.
c) Percentage of Occupancy – For selectable times during 24 hour period for all categories of ACS parkers.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 989 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 32 d) In/Out Status Report: Shows status of all ACS cards at any given time, sortable by name/card #/status.
e) Active User Report – A listing of all active users that have access to the facility.
f) Activity Exceptions Report – A field-sortable listing of all activity exceptions to include at a minimum hard-passback, soft-passback, shared account, debit card, hotel quest pass and nesting violations.
g) User Changes Report – Provide report of changes to user accounts to include at a minimum debit card rate changes and status changes (e.g. card placed in neutral with no charges applied at exit).

V) The monthly software shall provide the operator with the capability, at a minimum, to perform the following on both cards and accounts:
a) Fully modify any field subject to restrictions on duplicate card and account numbers.
b) Copy the data from any field in a previously selected or created record into the same field on the current record with a combination of two keystrokes (limited by restrictions on duplicate entries).
c) Search for any record by criteria for any field, including the use of wild card characters and partial strings.
d) Display, sort and print a pre-formatted report of all accounts, or a group of accounts selected by query criteria entered for up to three (3) fields, with the option to sort data by account number or alphabetically by account name, at the option of the operator.

Report must include the account number, account name, and assigned card numbers, in card number sequence, listed under each account.
e) Display, sort and print a list of all cards in card number sequence and, at the option of the operator, to group those cards by status or account number.
f) Save a copy of the card and account tables as an archived “point in time” reference at any time by authorized manual prompt from an authorized workstation.
d. Capable of reporting the collection of fees from parkers on monthly prepayment, declining, decrementing, end of month billing, and/or credit card basis.
e. Monitor and report revenue associated with ACS system to CMS. Separate revenue by type of payment (prepayment, declining, decrementing, monthly billing and/or type of credit card) and indicate ACS ID device number(s), account number(s), and month(s) for which payment was received.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 990 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 33 f. Provide for posting of payments and automatic lockout of ACS users within programmable grace period after expiration of a prepaid account. g. Invoicing Package
I) Include ACS ID device number(s), account number(s) and monthly rate associated for each ACS ID device being invoiced.

II) Provide a monthly report listing total number of ACS ID device numbers invoiced and total dollar amount invoiced.

III) Provide an “on-file” credit card billing interface to allow automated credit card billing for those electing that payment option.

IV) Provide password protected credit card file in compliance with credit card data security requirements of Payment Card Industry (PCI).

V) Include an Accounts Receivable package for all normal accounting functions associated with ACS revenue:
a) Invoice report.
b) Cash receipts journal.
c) Accounts receivable ledger with supporting subsidiary ledgers for each account.
d) Accounts receivable aging report for selectable time periods. e) Account history reports, indicating invoices and payments by customer.
f) General ledger, adjustment ledgers, general ledger interface for City or City Representative’s mainframe and all invoicing features included in invoicing package within paragraph describing Central ACS Controller.
h. Provide automatic on-line real-time monitoring of ACS usage with DVD/CD-ROM storage of transaction data for audit and analytic purposes. i. Monitor and report all alarm conditions to CMS.
j. Password protection and Daily Log reports for all administrative actions. k. AVI readers continue to track and record data if gates remain ‘up’.

B. CMS Readers and Credentials

1. Housed in a weather proof, harsh environment enclosure rated NEMA-3R or greater.

2. Operational Description
I) ACS reader identifies ACS credential device in lane and searches for authorization through ACS Controller. If authorized, a signal is sent to raise the gate.

II) Where ACS lanes are also equipped with Entry Stations or Exit Stations, activation of reader automatically disables dispenser/verifier.

Likewise, the initiation of a ticket entry/exit transaction automatically disables ACS.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 991 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 34 3. Proximity Card System
a. Passive credential design capable of being read within 6 inches of reader b. Minimum accuracy of card reader: 99%.
c. Read and process credential within one second of presentation to reader. d. In combination with gate and other in-lane equipment, Ability to maintain processing rate of 500 transactions per hour for at least four continuous hours of operation, including normal patron delays.
e. Checking protocol that identifies multiple reads of same card within a few seconds (due to users “waving” card in front of reader), correcting false anti-passback reads.
f. Protection from common and/or local sources of interference - Unaffected by neighboring electronic systems or electronically controlled devices. g. When paired in-lane with any RCS device, card reader mounted to face plate of RCS device (ticket dispenser, exit validator, POF etc.). h. Provide proximity card with magnetic stripe functionality.

11. ENTRY, EXIT AND PAY ON FOOT STATIONS
A. Entry Station

1. Independently and in concert with CMS, issue time and date stamped ticket with:
a. Ticket number.
b. Rate code.
c. Machine/Lane number.
d. Time.
e. Date.
f. Facility/Facility Code.

2. Capable of operating while disconnected from CMS.

3. Color LCD screen.

4. Pinhole video camera.

5. Barcode reader for barcode and QR code validations.

6. Minimum capacity of 5,000 tickets with hands-only (no tools) ticket loading.

7. Independent ticket dispensing mechanism that is removable as a single unit.

8. Easily readable display screen message such as “Please Press Button for Ticket and “Please take ticket”.

9. Capable of maintaining a minimum processing rate, in combination with gate and other in-lane equipment, including typical patron delays, of 400 transactions per hour for push button operation.

10. If a vehicle is detected for longer than 30 seconds without a transaction being initiated, an alarm is issued alerting the operator that a patron may require assistance.

11. Operational Descriptions:

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 992 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 35 a. for Normal RCS Patron Entry
I) Upon vehicle detection, send a signal to the ENS to issue a machine readable time and date encoded ticket automatically or at the push of a button by patron.

II) Upon removal of the ticket from ENS, send a signal to open the gate and send transaction data to CMS.

III) The use or detection of an ACS credential does not allow the above sequence to occur.
b. Back-out Ticket Taken: Ticket is removed from ENS and directional sequence is violated (i.e. vehicle backs out of entrance without entering) I) Sound an audible alarm at the CMS
II) Report ticket issued as an invalid back-out ticket and post to the daily transaction exception log
c. Back-out Ticket Not Taken: Ticket is left in the ENS and directional sequence is violated (i.e. vehicle backs out of entrance without entering) I) Abandoned ticket is ingested back into ENS, rendered invalid, and discarded into dedicated holding bin.

II) Event posted to daily transaction exception log.
d. Full Status
I) RCS manually or automatically disables ticket dispenser and CC reader at all Entry Stations when count system considers facility to be full.

II) Easily readable display screen and audio message such as “Sorry, the garage is full”.

III) RCS reactivates ticket dispenser when count drops below a programmable threshold.

IV) ACS patrons are allowed access even when ticket dispenser is disabled.

B. Exit Station

1. Independently and in concert with CMS, read ticket data to determine ticket validity, payment due and any encoded validation.

2. Color LCD screen.

3. Pinhole video camera.

4. Barcode reader for barcode and QR code validations.

5. Minimum capacity of 5,000 receipt tickets.

6. Provide audible instructions to patron during transaction process.

7. Include the following integrated components:

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 993 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 36 a. Processed ticket vault.
b. Easily readable display screen and audio message such as “Please Insert Ticket”.
c. Audio and visual instructions displayed to patrons.
d. Integrated intercom
e. Integrated credit card reader.
f. Integrated proximity card reader

8. Capable of maintaining a minimum processing rate, including typical patron delays and in combination with gate and other in-lane equipment, of 400 transactions per hour.

9. Maximum elapsed time from insertion of validated ticket until gate opens is three seconds.

10. If a vehicle is detected for longer than 30 seconds without a transaction being initiated, an alarm is issued alerting the operator that a patron may require assistance.

11. Operational Description
a. Upon detection of a vehicle, the display screen audibly and visually prompts patron to insert ticket into Exit Station.
b. For fully paid or validated tickets, send signal to open gate and send data to CMS. Retract ticket into Exit Station and retain for audit purposes. c. For tickets that are not fully paid/validated or if grace period has expired, prompt patron to pay remaining fee via credit card, or park and proceed to a POF to pay with cash, or contact staff via intercom.
d. Offer receipt for payment with:

I) Transaction number.

II) Rate code.

III) Machine/Lane number.

IV) Entry time and date.

V) Time and date of payment.

VI) Parking fee.

VII) Amount paid, separating tax.

VIII) How paid (cash, CC or validation)
IX) Facility /Facility Code
e. Send signal to close gate after vehicle has passed closing vehicle sensor.

12. Send alarm to CMS if vehicle backs off sensor without completing transaction.

13. Information printed on processed tickets:
a. Entry time and date.
b. Exit time and date.
c. Parking fee.
d. Amount paid.
e. Transaction number.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 994 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 37 f. Machine/Lane number.

C. Pay-on-Foot Stations (POF)

1. Independently and in concert with CMS, read ticket data to determine ticket validity, payment due and any encoded validation.

2. Upon receipt of payment, issue machine encoded ticket, with programmable grace period.

3. Provide concise instruction with pictograms where appropriate for user-friendly operation.

4. Provide clear, audible instructions to patron throughout transaction process.

5. Include high security lock system with appropriate alarm contacts for tampering.

6. Capable of maintaining a minimum processing rate, including typical patron delays, of 60 transactions per hour.

7. Color LCD screen.

8. Pinhole video camera.

9. Barcode reader for barcode and QR code validations.

10. Ability to recycle cash payments to support change fund.

11. Meet the latest ADA requirements without modification, including but not limited to reach ranges, visibility of display screens, clear floor or ground space, and operable parts.

12. Operational Description
a. Patron inserts ticket into POF.
b. For valid tickets, fee is displayed. Patron inserts cash or credit card and payment is processed. Change is returned to patron if needed or credit card transaction is processed.
c. Amount paid, transaction number and other data are printed on ticket in readable form and encoded on ticket. All data is sent to CMS. d. Patron is advised audibly and visually to take ticket and proceed to vehicular exit.
e. Receipts are issued only upon patron request for all transactions.

I) Transaction number.

II) Rate code.

III) Machine number.

IV) Entry time and date.

V) Time and date of payment.

VI) Parking fee.

VII) Amount paid, separating tax.

VIII) How paid (cash, CC or validation)
IX) Facility /Facility Code.
f. If POF cannot read ticket or it is otherwise identified as an exception transaction an alarm is sent to CMS, ticket is returned to patron, and a visual and audible message advises patron that transaction cannot be processed and to press intercom for assistance.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 995 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 38 13. Information printed on processed tickets:
a. Entry time and date.
b. Exit time and date.
c. Parking fee.
d. Amount paid.
e. Transaction number.
f. Machine number.

12. BARRIER GATES
A. Provide an effective barrier (up to 15 feet in length) to vehicles entering or exiting facility. Include gate length options with pricing.

B. Raise and lower on a command signal.

C. Standard sized gate arms must open within 1.5 seconds. Oversized gate arms open in less than 5 seconds.

D. Closed gate arm height of approximately three feet.

E. Use articulating gate arms in areas of limited headroom.

F. Employ breakaway design that can be easily replaced when broken away from housing.

G. Provide safety edge and auto-raise upon contact with vehicle or person.

H. Incorporate in one housing all necessary components for functioning of unit.

I. Provide circuit breaker protected gate motor and components designed for heavy-duty use.

J. Provide corrosion resistant parts.

K. Provide gate controller that prevents damage when gate motion is blocked in any position and cannot be raised or lowered by force applied to gate arm.

L. Allow for adjustment of gate arm travel.

M. Provide mechanical counter to record lane travel totals.

N. Gate Controller features:

1. Microprocessor controlled over-the-network activation and communication for gate status and functions from CMS.

2. Separate momentary contact closures for each of the following counts:

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 996 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 39 a. ACS patrons
b. RCS patrons
c. Vehicle entries
d. Vehicle exits.

3. Directional logic with electronic outputs to alarms, counters and to report atypical lane activity to CMS.

4. Ability to store at least three vend inputs and sequentially process each vend.

5. Ability to test gate operability and controller programming on-site without use of special diagnostic equipment.

6. “AUTO-MANUAL” switch, and “ON-OFF” switch for gate.

7. Contains power supplies, dust-proof relays, and other circuit components to barrier gate.

8. Provide remote gate arm activation (with sufficient line of sight or CCTV camera coverage).

O. Barrier Gate Usage Restrictions:

1. Provide signage prohibiting pedestrians and motorcycles from utilizing barrier gate as a means of ingress or egress to facility.

2. Provide along approach route of automated gate and/or affixed to both sides of barrier gate arm.

3. Incorporate both text and graphics to convey hazards of not meeting this restriction.

13. VEHICLE DETECTORS:

A. Tailgating has been a problem. Incorporate/employ anti-tailgating logic, vehicle inductive profiling, and self-tuning technology such as/comparable to Reno DL-ATG series detector.

B. Maintain peak sensitivity regardless of temperature, rain or other environmental conditions.

C. Fit within entry and exit controllers, or gate housings, or in remote lane/ramp controller cabinet.

D. Detect vehicles that back out of lane resulting in a back-out or stolen ticket and report to CMS.

E. Provide indicator light on front panel indicating presence of vehicle.

F. Require no special tools or meters for adjustment following initial installation G. If tied to inductive loops, provide multiple loop tuning to prevent crosstalk or interference between loops in close proximity of each other.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 997 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 40 H. Provide directional logic using “A-B” logic as follows:

1. Sensor “A” activates lane device for RCS or ACS operation.

2. Following RCS or ACS operation, gate raises.

3. Vehicle passes Sensor “B”, sending signal to lower gate. Count increases by one.

4. Sequence of Sensor provides directional logic.

5. Activation of Sensor “A” without Sensor activation at “B” results in an incomplete transaction and lowering of gate.

I. If using Inductive Loops:

1. Cut-into paving surface and filled with manufacturer’s approved sealant (see drawings).

2. Conduct preventative x-ray testing.

3. Be formed by three to four turns of 16-gauge THHN single-conductor wire.

4. No splices are permitted.

5. Contain loop leads:
a. Limited to a length of 100 feet.
b. Have a four-twist minimum per foot and located at a minimum of 18 inches from electrical power lines.
c. Be contained in separate conduit to prevent interference from electrical signals.

14. INTERCOM SYSTEM
A. Fully digital, microprocessor based, modular design utilizing VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol).

B. Programming server for all intercom features performed through networked workstation or from intercom master station.

C. Programmed configuration of intercom stations and system features stored in nonvolatile memory.

D. System includes all software and hardware required for programming system, including:

1. Individually programmable volume control for each intercom station.

2. Substations programmed to call intercom master station.

3. Call forwarding feature for individual stations or all stations to re-direct calls to another designated master station or substation.

4. Allow conferencing for an unlimited number of stations from master station.

5. Include ability to announce up to 50 pre-recorded messages at intercom stations, selectable based on programmed criteria, or manually.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 998 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 41 6. Announced messages and audio input broadcasts may be interrupted only at affected intercom station during intercom calls and return automatically upon completion of call.

7. If master station is busy, system automatically announces pre-recorded message at calling station, when master station disconnects, another pre-recorded message directs station to re-initiate call.

E. Master station desktop model with LCD-Display (8 lines x 14 characters minimum) and gooseneck noise cancelling microphone designed for high-noise environment. Required features:

1. Provide full-duplex hands-free conversation with any other selected individual station or combination of stations in system.

2. Integrated amplifier and loudspeaker.

3. Connector and external noise cancelling headset.

4. Firmware/feature upgrades available via download through intercom server with no local modification on station required.

5. High sensitive microphone to provide clear conversation from a maximum range of at least 20 ft.

6. Minimum audio frequency range for audio components: 200-7000Hz.

7. Intercom station directory panel with direct access, pre-programmable function menus, selectable language, and adjustable display contrast.

8. “Handset function” enabling user to switch from loud-speaking, gooseneck microphone operation to handset mode.

F. Substation requirements:

1. Microphone, loudspeaker and in-use LED, all housed in one unit with configurable front pushbutton control.

2. “Press for Assistance” label.

3. DSP technology to provide full speaker/microphone supervision and fully adjustable (volume/timing threshold programmable via intercom server) audio monitoring.

4. Feature upgrades via download through intercom server with no local modifications required.

5. ADA compliant in regard to distances and volume.

15. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

1. Responsible for final power connections to all equipment and must make all necessary communication connections from the islands and lanes to the central server.

2. Responsible for running all power and communication lines/conduit from identified junction boxes, panels or breaker boxes to all equipment, if needed.

3. Follow all national, state, county, and local regulations, as well as manufacturer’s installation requirements.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 999 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 42 4. Business License: The selected Contractor must obtain a City of Santa Monica Business License prior to the commencement of work.

5. Obtain all required permits.

6. The Contractor must coordinate installation of the PARCS with Parking Operations. a. Weekly meetings with Parking Operations staff and the City’s parking operator will be required in order to review progress of the work as scheduled. b. Schedules of site work must be submitted in advance for approval. c. The Parking Facilities must remain operational at all times during installation. d. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure minimal interference to the general public.

7. Contractor shall coordinate installation and testing of equipment so the City may maintain continuous operation of existing system during installation of new PARCS.

8. Install PARCS in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and approved Shop Drawings.

9. Contractor is responsible for installation of all control and communication wiring, Contractor supplied equipment and its interfacing and interconnection with City supplied equipment. Contractor authorizes and/or accepts responsibility for application of power to equipment and initiation of operation and for running all initial diagnostics and system generation programs necessary to provide complete working system.

10. Contractor is responsible for all software and communications by all computers and peripheral devices.

11. Use fiber optic certified technicians for fiber optic installation and connections.

12. Provide dust and noise protection in strict accordance with equipment manufacturer's recommendations.

13. Remove from site all existing parking equipment not to be reused or relocated, in conjunction with City’s approval.

14. Remove and replace curbs, paving and other construction as required for installation of PARCS.

15. Replace all device control and communications wiring in existing conduit to existing lanes and provide all additional communications wiring required for system architecture and design.

16. Maintain at least one entry lane and one exit lane open to public at all times.

17. Cut and patch concrete for all conduits added to existing islands or paving.

18. Repair damage to any and all surfaces disrupted during installation.

19. A representative from the City may observe installation process at any time.

20. Acceptance of Contractor's work will be determined by the Parking Administrator. a. Work shall be completed in a responsible manner in accordance with the terms of the Contract. Liquidated damages will apply for non-performance. b. All accidents and incidents must be reported to the City on the date of occurrence.

A written or electronic report shall be filed with the City.

16. ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. Develop an Acceptance Testing Plan to demonstrate the functionality of the system.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 1000 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 43 1. Include demonstrations of compliance with specifications, contractual compliance, definitions of all test objectives, participant responsibilities, documentation of tests and procedures for dealing with failures during test.

2. Detail tests for every functional requirement of each entry lane, exit lane and POF. Include checklist for specified supplies, spare parts, training operation and training manuals.

3. Confirm that all specified features are provided and fully operational before Acceptance Testing.

4. Notify City in writing at least one week prior to each official test session. In the event that a test is not successful, correct noted deficiencies and advise City at least two days in advance, that test session is ready to resume.

5. City representative may witness tests.

6. Provide all test and diagnostic equipment including RCS and ACS credentials, currency, credit cards, stock items, and all consumables required for each test.

B. Passing Acceptance testing, even if performed in the presence of the City or City Representative, does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to provide a system in accordance with the Specifications.

C. Promptly correct all problems encountered at no cost to the City.

D. Lane Acceptance Test (LAT): Test all equipment and systems at each location to confirm that the components installed are fully operational as specified.

Substantial completion includes the following.

1. All PARCS equipment included in project or phase passed LAT.

2. All communications from equipment to CMS and workstations passed LAT.

3. All UPSs passed LAT

4. All electronic signage interfaces complete and passed LAT.

E. System Acceptance Test (SAT): Confirm that all the physical, operational and management features and capabilities of the individual lane components are present in the integrated system.

1. Before start of test, verify that:
a. The major subsystems and the entire PARCS are fully operational as an integrated system and operating properly.
b. All spare parts, stock items, and manuals are on site and approved. c. All training is complete to City’s satisfaction.
d. All test checklists and training evaluation forms have been submitted.

2. CMS produced all required reports and passed LAT.

3. Conduct interim SAT at the completion of each phase if phasing of the installation is required.

4. Maintain detailed records and a logbook of all SAT tests, events and issues to be provided to the City upon completion of the SAT.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 1001 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 44 F. Thirty-Day Operational Test and Final Acceptance
a. After Substantial Completion and opening of the facility, the City will conduct an operational test for thirty days.
b. Provide a qualified and experienced technician able to be on-site within one hour during the thirty day test.
c. Performance Standards:

I) All mechanical components are operational without downtime. For each downtime period of four hours, one day will be added to the test duration.

II) All electronic components are operational without downtime or programming problems for the complete monthly reporting cycle. For each down time period of one hour but less than eight hours or programming problems that delay report cycle, two days will be added to the test duration.

III) All reports correlate 100% with cash receipts.

17. TRAINING
A. Develop and implement a comprehensive training program for City personnel, including a minimum of 30 hours of initial training prior to go-live date, and a minimum of 15 hours of refresher training within thirty days after system acceptance.

B. Design the curriculum so that each group is trained in the full repertoire of system commands that they may have to use in course of performing designated functions, such as proper use of all parking system equipment, database management and report generation software, supervisor functions and capabilities, basic maintenance and repair functions, and the use of audit functions.

C. Schedule training no more than two weeks prior to use of equipment.

D. Include lectures, visual presentations, hands-on operation of equipment and any materials necessary to perform job. Provide each trainee with a complete set of training materials and operating manuals during training session, to be kept for use on job at completion of training.

18. REPORTS
Below are the minimum revenue reports required for the new PARCS. The PARCS must be able to generate/query reports which can be set by the parking operator and management users. Please include samples and/or screen shots of all reports in Proposals. All reports must be available upon installation without additional cost to City of Santa Monica as “custom report” creation. The equipment needs to be able to provide a management-user the ability to perform queries generate report within defined time frames, days of week, break down by hour and facility etc…

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 1002 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 45 1. Daily device revenue report

2. Daily lane report

3. Active access card holder report

4. Card transaction report by date

5. Credit card report
 By Credit Card type
 By Lot
 By Device

6. Validation report

7. Non resettable totals
 Cash report
 Transaction report
 Validation report

8. Count statistics report

9. Duration of stay report with ability to breakdown by 30-minute increments

10. Entry/exit report by facility and parker type

11. Parking Fee Report

12. Average Occupancy Report , break down by hour

13. Number of Vehicles Parked, break down by hour

14. Average Length of Stay (tickets elapsed time average) Report

15. General Totals Report

16. Daily Revenue Report

17. Transaction Report

18. Revenue Alarm Report

19. Outstanding Ticket Report

20. Detailed activity reports on sales inventory, and statistical data by parker type

21. Rate stratification report

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 1003 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 46 SECTION 4 - ADMINISTRATIVE INFORMATION
A. Performance Bond: After the contract award to the Proposer, a $750,000 performance bond will be required as a security to the project completion and the performance of the service contract.

B. Liquidated Damages: Non-performance by the Contractor will cause damage to the City by undermining the City’s ability to manage its parking resources and generate revenue for the City’s General Fund. For the purpose of computing damages under the provisions of the Contract, City shall assess and /or deduct from payment due, or to become due, the following amounts as liquidated damages:

1. Failure to respond within four (4) hours for any service or software programming calls: Reimbursement of average revenue loss (based on hourly rate value of the tickets) for the period of time beyond four hours, plus $500 per occurrence.

2. Failure to submit complete, accurate reports and invoices in the specified format:

Non-payment of invoice until submission of an accurate and appropriately formatted invoice is received.

3. Failure to provide required parts, software, supplies or other components within five (5) business days: $500 per day, per occurrence.

4. If, during the performance of their duties, any employee of the Contractor is found to possess or be under the influence of alcohol or illegal drugs or to be under the influence of any prescription drug which could impair the employee’s ability: $500 per employee, per occurrence.

C. Hold Harmless
To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Proposer agrees to indemnify, defend and hold harmless, the City, its board and council members, officers, employees, agents and volunteers (“Indemnitees”), through legal counsel reasonable acceptable to City, from any and all Losses arising out of or relating to any of the following: (i) performance or nonperformance of the Contract by Contractor or its Contractors of any tier; (ii) activities of the Contractor or its Contractors, of any tier; (iii) the payment or nonpayment by the Contractor or any of its Contractors, of any tier; and (iv) any personal injury, property damage or economic loss to third persons associated with the performance or nonperformance by the Contractor or its Contractors, of any tier.

However, nothing contained in this provision shall be construed as obligating the Contractor to indemnify any Indemnitee for Losses resulting from the Indemnitee’s sole or active negligence or wrongful misconduct. Contractor shall take steps to assure that a right indemnification is included in all subcontracting agreements.

D. Termination

1. Termination for Cause: The City may terminate the Contract in whole or in part, and from time to time, whenever the City determines that the Contractor is;

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 1004 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 47 a. Defaulting in performance or is not complying with any provision of the Contract;
b. Endangering the performance of the Contract;
c. Failing to make satisfactory progress in the prosecution of the Contract; d. Persistent and repeated failure by Contractor regarding any obligation under terms of the Contract.

Prior to a termination for cause, the City shall send the Contractor written notice specifying the cause. The notice will give the Contractor at least thirty (30) days from the date the notice is issued to cure the default or make progress satisfactory to the City in curing the default, unless a different time is given in the notice. If the City determines that default contributes to the curtailment of an essential service or poses an immediate threat to life, health or property, the City may terminate the Contract immediately upon issuing oral or written notice to the Contractor without any prior notice or opportunity to cure. In addition to any other remedies provided by law or the Contract, the Contractor must compensate the City for additional costs that would be incurred by the City, whether the costs are actually incurred or not, to obtain substitute performance.

Any termination for cause must be considered a termination for convenience as of the date the Contractor was advised of the termination for cause, if it is determined that there was no cause.

2. Termination for Convenience
The City may terminate the Contract, in whole or in part, for convenience upon written notice to the Contractor. The termination is effective thirty (30) days after the notice is issued, unless a different time is given in the notice. The City is liable only for payment for acceptable performance and all reasonable costs of installation of the PARCS prior to the effective date of the termination and for all reasonable costs resulting from said Termination for Convenience as set forth in the Contract. Payment, to the extent of cost substantiation and schedule, shall be set forth in the Contract.

E. Insurance Requirements:

Please see Exhibit A for Insurance Requirements
F. Payment Terms
Proposers must specify the first ninety percent (90%) of the payment terms in proposal.

The City will withhold payment of the final ten (10%) until all functions have been performed without problems or glitches for a continuous period of ninety (90) days prior to release of the final payment. If there are any problems, operational dissatisfaction, and/or glitches before the completion of the ninety (90) - day period, the count of days will restart with day one (1) until a full ninety (90)-day cycle is completed without problems in order to release the final payment.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 1005 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 48 G. Pricing

1. Proposers must provide purchase and installation price breakdown by each unit and each location in a spreadsheet, with pricing summary. Pricing shall include all hardware, software, servers, computers, Cloud Based Validations, training, and all other contents listed in this RFP.

2. ISD may supply servers and/or computers. Accordingly, please provide the savings/deduction amount from the overall purchase pricing for consideration.

This does not preclude Proposer from factoring in the price of loading proprietary equipment.

3. All pricing in Proposals will be used to set the beginning point of negotiation. All final negotiated prices will be stated in the executed purchase agreement upon City of Santa Monica City Council approval.

4. All prices included in a Proposal shall be filled in ink or typed and must give actual cost of each product in line item price; lump sum discounts will not be accepted. Proposals that are incomplete, conditional, or unclear may be rejected as incomplete

5. Include 9.5% state sales tax in price proposal.

6. Pricing will be in effect for a period of two years.

7. Proposals must consist of itemized pricing for each piece of equipment and software module, as well as shipping, installation, training, and any other services being proposed. In addition, proposals must include the cost to remove equipment currently in place at the Parking Facilities.

8. The cost of upgrades to correct problems or deficiencies is the responsibility of the Proposer.

H. Interpretations and Addendums
Nothing stated or discussed orally during any Q&A, interview or other session shall alter, modify, or change the requirements of the RFP. Only interpretations, explanations, or clarifications of this RFP that are incorporated into a written Addendum to this RFP issued by City should be considered by Proposers. All Addendums will be distributed to each person that requests a copy of all Addendums to this RFP, but it shall be the responsibility of the Proposers to make inquiries as to the Addendums issued. All such Addendums shall become a part of this RFP, and all Proposers shall be bound by such Addendums. Each Addendum issued will be on file in the City of Santa Monica, Parking Operations. Each Proposer must acknowledge its receipt of all Addendums by submitting an acknowledgement letter with its Proposal.

I. Ambiguity, Conflict, or Other Errors in the RFP

1. If a Proposer discovers any ambiguity, conflict, discrepancy, omission, or other error in this RFP, it shall immediately notify the City of such error in writing and request modification or clarification of the document. The City will make modifications by issuing a written Addendum.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 1006 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 49 2. Proposers are responsible for clarifying any ambiguity, conflict, discrepancy, omission, or other error in this RFP prior to submitting a Proposal, or any such request shall not be accepted.

3. The terms selected vendor, proposer or contractor may be used interchangeably in this RFP.

4. Implied Requirements: Products and services that are not specifically requested in this RFP, but which are necessary to provide the functional capabilities proposed by the Proposer, shall be included in the proposal.

J. Information Provided by City
Information included in or provided with this RFP is provided solely for the convenience of the Proposers. NO REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND IS MADE BY THE CITY AS TO THE ACCURACY OR COMPLETENESS OF THE INFORMATION INCLUDED IN OR PROVIDED WITH THIS RFP.

Proposers are solely responsible for conducting such independent due diligence investigations as may be necessary for the proper preparation of Proposal. The City and its employees, agents and advisors are not responsible for the completeness or accuracy of any information distributed or made available, orally or in writing, during this RFP process.

K. Cancellation or Modification of Solicitation and Rejection of Any and All Proposals

1. The City reserves the right to withdraw this RFP at any time and for any reason and to issue such clarifications, modifications, and/or Addendums, as it may deem appropriate. If there is any disagreement or discrepancy between this RFP and any supplement or Addendum, the most recent supplement or Addendum shall govern. The City reserves the right to waive minor irregularities in proposals, provided that such action is in the best interest of City. Any such waiver shall not modify any remaining RFP requirements or excuse the Proposer from full compliance with the RFP specifications and other contract requirements if the Proposer is awarded the Contract.

2. The City reserves the right, after reviewing the Proposals, to reject any and all Proposals, to waive any informality in the Proposals, and to invite those qualified for further negotiation in the second phase of the selection process. The City shall reject the proposal of any Proposer that is determined to be non-responsive.

However, the City reserves the right to request clarifications or corrections to proposals. The unreasonable failure of a Proposer to promptly supply information in connection with such a request may be grounds for a determination of nonresponsibility.

3. Receipt of a Proposal by the City or submission of a Proposal to the City confers no rights upon the Proposer, nor does it obligate the City in any manner. The City reserves at its sole discretion, the right to determine which Proposers are qualified to submit Proposals.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 1007 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 50 L. Acceptance of Proposals
The City shall review all proposals that are submitted properly. However, the City reserves the right to request clarifications or corrections to proposals. For Proposals to be reviewed, the submitting firm must be in good financial standing with the City and be current on all licenses and contractual requirements, if any, with the City.

M. Conducting Investigations/Requesting Supplementary Information The City reserves the right to conduct investigations with respect to the qualifications, experience and representations of the Proposer and Proposer associates and to require Proposers to supplement, clarify, or provide additional information in order for City to evaluate the Proposal submitted. Each Proposer team member, through its request for and receipt of this RFP and participation in this RFP, consents to such investigations.

N. Ownership and Disclosure

1. Proposals received in response to this RFP will be maintained by the, Parking Operations and, by California State Law, are matters of public record and subject to public inspection except for the time reserved for review by the Parking Operations and its evaluation committee. To the extent allowed by applicable law, the City will not disclose Proposal contents during the period falling between the Proposal Submission and the date of the Notice of Intent to Award the project.

However, all information, except noted as confidential, submitted by Proposers becomes a matter of public record upon Notice of Intent to Award the project and as required by Applicable Law.

2. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Proposers recognize and agree that neither the City nor its staff, agents, employees, representatives, nor its advisors shall be responsible or liable in any manner for any losses that a Proposer or any of its agents, employees, or representatives may suffer from the disclosure of information or materials to third parties or any other claims or damages resulting from this RFP process.

3. All Proposals (other than portions thereof subject to confidentiality, patent or copyright protection) will become the property of the City to the fullest extent permissible under applicable law upon submission. Regardless of the outcome of this RFP process, the City, in accordance with all applicable laws, reserves the right to use all information, documents, data, concepts, and other items contained therein, for its own purposes in any manner it elects to do so without further cost to the City.

O. Confidentiality
Information submitted to the City by Proposers is subject to possible compulsory disclosure by the City upon request from a member of the public, under the California Public Records Act, Government Code Section 6250, and et seq. The City recognizes some information required by the RFP process may be considered confidential by the

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 1008 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 51 Proposer. The City will protect the confidentiality of materials submitted to it to the extent permitted by applicable law. Materials which Proposers wish to be treated as confidential must be clearly marked as “CONFIDENTIAL”. The City will not voluntarily disclose material so marked to persons other than those involved in the evaluation process.

P. Validity of Proposals
All Proposals shall be valid for a period of 180 days from the date the Proposals are due. If Contractors so wish, their Proposal may remain valid for the term of any resulting Contract to allow any agency or department of City or the State of California to negotiate Contracts for services. Contractors should state how many days or months Proposals would remain valid beyond the 180 days minimum.

Q. Costs and Expenses of Proposers
The City accepts no liability under any circumstances for any costs or expenses incurred by Proposers in acquiring, clarifying, or responding to any condition, request, or standard contained in this RFP. Each Proposer that participates in this RFP process does so at its own expense and risk and agrees that City shall not reimburse any costs incurred during this process. Further, each Proposer shall indemnify and hold harmless City from and against any claims for such reimbursement (including any costs and/or attorney’s fees) made, directly or indirectly, by or on behalf of such Proposer. Costs for developing any Proposal shall be the sole responsibility and shall be incurred at the sole risk of the Proposer, whether or not any award results from this solicitation. The City will not be responsible for any such costs or expenses incurred by Proposers under any circumstances.

R. Proposal Protest Procedure
Any objection by a Proposer to the procedures or processes in relation to this RFP process shall be submitted to the City, in writing, not more than seven (7) days prior to the Proposal due date for receipt of Proposals. Failure by a Proposer to so object shall constitute a final and conclusive waiver by the Proposer of its right to thereafter assert such objection at any other time or for any purpose.

Subject to the paragraph above, any Proposer may dispute the City’s determinations made as part of the prequalification process by filing a protest provided that each and all of the following are complied with the City’s bid protest procedures:

Protestant may file a written protest with the City’s Purchasing Services Manager no more than five (5) calendar days following the posting of award recommendation on the City’s online portal website. The written protest must set forth, in detail, all grounds for the protest, including without limitation all facts, supporting documentation, legal authorities and arguments in support of the grounds for the protest. All factual contentions must be supported by competent, admissible and credible evidence. Any

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 1009 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 52 matters not set forth in the written protest shall be deemed waived. Any protest not conforming to this procedure shall be rejected as invalid. The protest must include the name, address, and telephone number of the person representing the protesting party.

The Purchasing Services Manager shall review the merits and timeliness of the protest and issue a written decision to the Protestant within seven (7) calendar days of receipt of the protest. The decision of the Purchasing Services Manager may be appealed to the City Finance Director.

The Protestant may appeal the decision of the Purchasing Services Manager to the City Finance Director by filing a letter of appeal within ten (10) calendar days of the date of the Purchasing Services Manager’s decision. The letter of appeal should be addressed to the City Finance Director and shall set forth, in detail, all grounds for the appeal, including without limitation all facts, supporting documentation, legal authorities and arguments in support of the grounds for the appeal. All factual contentions must be supported by competent, admissible and credible evidence. Any matters not set forth in the letter of appeal shall be deemed waived. Any letter of appeal not conforming to this procedure shall be rejected as invalid.

The City Finance Director shall review the merits and timeliness of the letter of appeal and issue a written decision to the Protestant within seven (7) calendar days of receipt of the letter of appeal. The decision of the City Finance Director is final. If he or she determines the protest is frivolous, the party originating the protest may be determined to be ineligible for future purchase orders/contracts.

The Finance Director shall have final authority to settle and resolve a protest. The procedure and time limits set forth herein are mandatory and are the protestant’s sole and exclusive remedy in the event of a protest. Failure by a party originating the protest to comply with these procedures shall constitute a waiver of any right to further pursue the protest, including filing a Government Claim or legal proceeding.

S. Examination of Documents
By submitting a Proposal, Proposer represents that it has thoroughly examined and become familiar with the work, products and content required by this RFP and that it is capable of performing quality work to achieve the City’s requirements.

T. Interpretations/Questions
Any person is in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications, or finds discrepancies or omissions, may submit to the City a written request for interpretation.

The requesting party is responsible for prompt delivery of any requests. When the City considers interpretations necessary, interpretations will be in the form of a written document and will be distributed to all parties recorded by the City as having received proposal documents. Written questions must be submitted by

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 1010 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 53 U. Right to Reject Proposals
The City reserves the right to reject any and all Proposals, to waive any non-material irregularities or informalities in any Proposal, and to accept or reject any item or combination of items. The City reserves the right to withdraw this RFP at any time without prior notice, and the City makes no representations that any contract will be awarded to any proposer responding to this RFP.

V. Authorized Signatories
Persons signing any documentation in response to this RFP on behalf of a Proposer must be authorized signers with the requisite authority to represent their firm and to enter into binding contracts with clients.

W. Public Records Act
All statements of qualifications/proposals will be public records subject to disclosure under the California Public Records Act after the selection process is completed.

X. Non Discrimination
The firm represents and agrees that it does not and will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, medical condition, sex, sexual orientation and/or gender identity, national origin, political affiliation or opinion, or pregnancy or pregnancy-related condition and will comply with City’s Non Discrimination Policy. Proposer must review and fully comply with the policy. A NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT is also required. See Exhibit G Y. Oaks Initiative
Under the provisions of the City of Santa Monica Taxpayer Protection Amendment of 2000 ("Taxpayer Protection Act"), the selected Vendor will be considered a "recipient of a public benefit." Under the Taxpayer Protection Act, City public officials who approve this Contract are prohibited from receiving gifts, campaign contributions or employment from Vendor for a specified time. This prohibition extends to individuals and entities that are specified and identified in the Taxpayer Protection Act and includes Vendor and its trustees, directors, partners, corporate officers and those with more than a 10% equity, participation, or revenue interest in Vendor. Vendor understands and agrees that: (A) Vendor is aware of the Taxpayer Protection Act; (B) If selected, Vendor will complete and return the forms shown in Exhibit C in order to identify all of the recipients of a public benefit specified in the Taxpayer Protection Act; and (C) Vendor will not make any prohibited gift, campaign contribution or offer of employment to any public official who approved this Contract. See Exhibit B

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 1011 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 54 Z. Living Wage Ordinance
The City has adopted a Living Wage Ordinance, which requires the payment of a specified minimum wage for work done pursuant to certain services contracts with the City. If selected, Vendor will complete and return the forms in order to verify Vendor’s business practices conform to the terms of this Living Wage Ordinance. See Exhibit C AA. Arizona Disclosure
The City has adopted a policy that requires a review of all current and likely future agreements and contracts with Arizona-based businesses to examine the feasibility of acquiring such products and services elsewhere while the Arizona law remains in effect.

See Exhibit D
BB. Notice of Award
The City will inform all Proposers of its intent to award a Contract to the selected Proposer in writing upon City Council approval.

CC. Other Information for Proposal Submittals: Proposers are welcome to submit any additional information, functions and/or attachments with their Proposal. It will enhance the competitiveness of the proposer in the RFP process. All information must relate to and benefit the project and/or its ongoing operations.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 1012 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 55 Exhibit A: Insurance Requirements
Contractor shall procure and maintain for the duration of the Agreement insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damages to property that may arise from or in connection with the performance of the work hereunder and the results of that work by the Contractor, its agents, representatives, employees or subcontractors.

Minimum Scope/Limits of Insurance

1. Commercial General Liability (CGL): Insurance Services Office Form CG 00 01 covering GCL on an “occurrence” basis, including products-completed operations and personal & advertising injury, with limits of no less than $1,000,000 per occurrence. If a general aggregate limit applies, either the general aggregate limit shall apply separately to this project/location or the general aggregate limit shall be twice the required occurrence limit.

2. Automobile Liability: Insurance Services Office Form CA 00 01 covering Code 1 (any auto), or if the Contractor has no owned autos, Code 8 (hired) and Code 9 (non-owned), with limits of no less than $1,000,000 per accident for bodily injury and property damage.

3. Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s Liability Insurance: Workers’ Compensation insurance as required by the State of California and Employer’s Liability Insurance with limits of no less than $1,000,000 per accident for bodily injury or disease.

If the Contractor maintains higher limits than the minimums shown above, the City of Santa Monica requires and shall be entitled to coverage for the higher limits maintained by the Contractor.

Other Insurance Provisions

1. The insurance policies are to contain, or be endorsed to contain, the following provisions:
a. Additional Insured Status (CGL policy): The City of Santa Monica, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers are to be covered as additional insured on the CGL policy with respect to liability arising out of work or operations performed by or on behalf of Contractor including materials, parts or equipment furnished in connection with such work or operations. The additional insured status can be provided in the form of an endorsement at least as broad as Insurance Services Office Form CG 20 10, 11 85 or both CG 20 10 and CG 20 37. b. Primary Coverage (all policies): For any claims related to this contract, the Contractor’s insurance shall be primary as respects the City of Santa Monica, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers. Any insurance or self-insurance maintained by the City of Santa Monica, its officers, officials, employees or volunteers shall be in excess of the Contractor’s insurance and shall not contribute with it.
c. Notice of Cancellation (all policies): Each insurance policy required herein shall state that coverage shall not be cancelled except after notice has been given to the City of Santa Monica. d. Waiver of Subrogation (all policies): Contractor hereby grants to the City of Santa Monica a waiver of any right of subrogation which any insurer of said Contractor may acquire against the City of Santa Monica by virtue of payment of any loss. Contractor agrees to obtain any endorsement that may be necessary to effect this waiver of subrogation, but this provision applies

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 1013 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 56 regardless of whether or not the City of Santa Monica has received the a waiver of subrogation endorsement from the insurer.

The Workers’ Compensation policy shall be endorsed with a waiver of subrogation in favor of the City of Santa Monica for all work performed by the Contractor, his employees, agents and subcontractors.

Deductibles and Self-Insured Retentions
Any deductibles or self-insured retentions must be declared to and approved by the City of Santa Monica.

The City of Santa Monica may require the Contractor to reduce or eliminate the deductible or retention applicable to the contracted work or provide satisfactory proof of ability to pay losses and related investigations, claim administration, and defense expenses within the retention.

Acceptability of Insurers
Insurance is to be placed with insurers with a current a current A.M. Best rating of no less than A:VII, unless otherwise acceptable to the City of Santa Monica.

Verification of Coverage
Contractor shall furnish the City of Santa Monica with original certificates and amendatory endorsements or copies of the applicable policy language providing the insurance coverage required herein. All certificates and endorsements are to be received and approved by the City of Santa Monica before work commences. However, failure to obtain required documents prior to the work beginning shall not waive the Contractor’s obligation to provide them. The City of Santa Monica reserves the right to require complete, certified copies of all required insurance policies, including the endorsements required herein, at any time.

Failure to Maintain Insurance Coverage
If Contractor, for any reason, fails to maintain insurance coverage which is required pursuant to this Agreement, the same shall be deemed a material breach of contract. The City of Santa Monica, at its sole option, may terminate this Agreement and obtain damages from the Contractor resulting from said breach.

Alternatively, City of Santa Monica may purchase such coverage (but has no special obligation to do so), and without further notice to the Contractor, the City may deduct from sums due to the Contractor any premium costs advanced by the City for such insurance.

Subcontractors
Contractor shall require and verify that all subcontractors maintain insurance meeting all the requirements stated herein.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 1014 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 57 Exhibit B: Oaks Initiative Notice

CITY OF SANTA MONICA

NOTICE TO APPLICANTS, BIDDERS, PROPOSERS

AND OTHERS SEEKING DISCRETIONARY PERMITS, CONTRACTS, OR OTHER

BENEFITS FROM THE CITY OF SANTA MONICA
Santa Monica’s voters adopted a City Charter Amendment commonly known as the Oaks Initiative. It prohibits a public official from receiving specified personal benefits from a person or entity after the official votes, or otherwise takes official action, to award a “public benefit” to that person or entity. Examples of a “public benefit” include public contracts to provide goods or services worth more than $25,000 or a land use approval worth more than $25,000.

The Oaks Initiative requires the City to provide this note and information about the Initiative’s requirements. An information sheet on the Oaks Initiative is attached. You may obtain a full copy of the Initiative’s text from the City Clerk.

In order to facilitate compliance with the requirements of the Oaks Initiative, the City compiles and maintains certain information. That information includes the name of any person who is seeking a “public benefit.” If the “public benefit” is sought by an entity, rather than an individual person, the information includes the name of every: (a) trustee, (b) director, (c) partner, (d) officers, or (e) ten percent interest in the entity. Therefore, if you are seeking a “public benefit” covered by the Oaks Initiative, you must supply that information on the attached form (Attachment A).

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 1015 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 58 City of Santa Monica
Oaks Initiative Disclosure Form
All persons or entities receiving public benefits defined below from the City of Santa Monica shall provide the names of trustees, directors, partners and officers and names of those with more than a 10% equity, participation or revenue interest. This information is required by City Charter Article XXII— Taxpayer Protection.

Name of Entity: ____________________________________________ NAME(S) OF PERSONS OR ENTITIES RECEIVING PUBLIC BENEFIT:

NAME(S) OF TRUSTEES, DIRECTORS, PARTNERS, AND OFFICERS:

NAME(S) OF THOSE WITH MORE THAN A 10% EQUITY, PARTICIPATION OR REVENUE INTEREST:

Public benefits include:

1. Personal services contracts in excess of $25,000 over any 12-month period;

2. Sale of material, equipment or supplies to the City in excess of $25,000 over a 12-month period;

3. Purchase, sale or lease of real property to or from the City in excess of $25,000 over a 12-month period;

4. Non-competitive franchise awards with gross revenue of $50,000 or more in any 12-month period;

5. Land use variance, special use permit, or other exception to an established land use plan, where the decision has a value in excess of $25,000;

6. Tax “abatement, exception, or benefit” of a value in excess of $5,000 in any 12-month period; or

7. Payment of “cash or specie” of a net value to the recipient of $10,000 in any 12-month period.

Prepared by: ________________________ Signature: _____________________ Date: ________________________ Title: _____________________ FOR CITY USE ONLY:

Bid/PO/Contract # _________________________ Permit # ___________________________ (1/06)

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 1016 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 59 Exhibit C - Living Wage Ordinance

CITY OF SANTA MONICA
Living Wage Ordinance
Certification for Providers of Services to the
City of Santa Monica
(Fiscal Year 13/14 – July 1, 2013 through June 30, 2014)

TO BE COMPLETED BY ALL CONTRACTORS PROVIDING SERVICES TO THE CITY OF SANTA MONICA IN EXCESS OF $54,200
The City of Santa Monica Municipal Code Chapter 4.65, Living Wage Ordinance (LWO) establishes a Minimum Wage of $14.08 per hour1for certain employees of contractors providing services to the City where services exceed $54,200 and requires that contractors also provide the same health care and other benefits to employees’ same sex spouses and domestic partners as are provided to other employees’ spouses.

An employee covered by the LWO is any person who does not actually work as a manager, supervisor, or confidential employee, and who is not required to possess an occupational license.

Contractors with collective bargaining agreements covering those employees assigned to contract are exempt from the wage requirements of the Living Wage Ordinance only if the waiver is explicitly set forth in such agreement in clear and unambiguous terms.

Please prepare the following certification if you are a contractor engaging in a contract for services with the City of Santa Monica in excess of $54,200.

Your signature on this certification grants the City permission to review any and all payroll books and records and any company documents pertaining to the benefits offered to employees to assure your compliance with the LWO during the term of the contract.

Please direct any questions and send the completed, signed Certification to:

City of Santa Monica Finance Department
Attention: Living Wage Compliance Section
1717 4th Street, Suite 250
Santa Monica, CA 90401
You can also contact staff regarding living wage ordinance questions by e-mail at [email protected] or by phone 310-458-8281.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 1017 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 60 CITY OF SANTA MONICA
Living Wage Ordinance Certification
July 1, 2013 through June 30, 2014

TO BE COMPLETED BY ALL CONTRACTORS PROVIDING SERVICES TO THE CITY OF SANTA MONICA IN EXCESS OF $54,200
MINIMUM WAGE - $14.08 per hour
Please read, complete, and sign the following:

THIS CONTRACT IS SUBJECT TO THE LIVING WAGE ORDINANCE.

THIS CONTRACT IS NOT SUBJECT TO THE LIVING WAGE ORDINANCE.

If this contract is not subject to the Living Wage Ordinance requirements, please note reason below and attach supporting documentation for exemption. For example, in order to be exempt pursuant to a collective bargaining agreement, a signed collective bargaining agreement must be attached. (a) ________ contractor is a government agency and is exempt (b) ________ contractor is a City grantee and is exempt (c) ________ contractor is a non-profit corporation and is exempt (d) ________ contractor is an employer whose employees are covered by a bona fide collective bargaining agreement where the waiver is explicitly set forth in an agreement in clear and unambiguous terms
(e) ________ contractor is a corporation providing banking services The undersigned, on behalf of himself or herself individually and on behalf of his or her business or organization, hereby certifies that he or she is fully aware of Santa Monica’s Living Wage Ordinance (LWO), and the applicability of the LWO, and the applicability of the subject contract, as determined herein. The undersigned further agrees to be bound by all of the terms of the LWO, as mandated in all sections of Santa Monica Municipal Code, Chapter 4.65. If, at any time during the term of the contract, the answers to the questions posed herein change so that Contractor would be subject to the LWO, Contractor will promptly notify the Director of Finance in writing.

Contractor further understands and agrees that the failure to comply with the LWO, this certification, or the terms of the Contract as it applies to the LWO shall constitute a default of the Contract, which shall be grounds for termination. City shall have the right to examine all books and records of the contractor as they relate to compliance with the LWO. Payroll records shall at a minimum include full name of each employee performing labor or providing services under the contract, job classification and rate of pay.

These statements are made under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California.

Printed Name: Title:

Signature: Date:

Contractor:

Bid Number:

Service Description:

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 1018 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 61 Exhibit D - Arizona Disclosure
NOTICE:

City Policy on Doing Business with Arizona Firms

CITY OF SANTA MONICA

NOTICE TO APPLICANTS, BIDDERS, PROPOSERS AND OTHERS SEEKING TO DO

BUSINESS WITH THE CITY OF SANTA MONICA
The City Council of the City of Santa Monica adopted Resolution No. 10479 (CCS) on May 25, 2010, which requires a review of all current and likely future agreements and contracts with Arizona-based businesses to examine the feasibility of acquiring such products and services elsewhere while the Arizona law remains in effect.

Additionally, vendors offering goods or services to the City of Santa Monica must complete and sign the attached disclosure form; this applies to all solicitations, including but not limited to, bids and proposals. Please review, sign and submit the form with your bid packet prior to the closing date of bid.

Contractors that do not have headquarters in the State of Arizona and those that will not be working with Arizona-headquartered subcontractors to provide goods and/or services as specified in this solicitation will take priority in the bidding process.

NOTE: Headquarter location or residency may not be considered as a factor if prohibited by applicable law.

Failure to return this form or inability to certify as to its provisions will render your bid or proposal non-responsive.

State of Arizona Disclosure Form - see next page.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 1019 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 62 City of Santa Monica
State of Arizona Disclosure Form

TO BE COMPLETED BY ALL VENDORS PROVIDING GOODS AND SERVICES TO THE CITY

OF SANTA MONICA
Headquarter location or residency may not be considered as a factor if prohibited by applicable law.

Please check the appropriate boxes below.

Our company’s headquarters are located in the State of Arizona.

Yes No
Goods or services pertaining to this solicitation will be provided by a subcontractor whose business is headquartered in the State of Arizona.

Yes No
If the response to the statement above was “yes”, please list any and all subcontractors headquartered in the State of Arizona that may be providing goods or services (pertaining to this solicitation) to the City of Santa Monica.

If more than one, attach a list of additional subcontractors, including the physical address of each location.

Name of Subcontractor:

Street Address:

City: State: Zip Code:
*** PORTION BELOW TO BE COMPLETED BY ALL VENDORS ***
***************************************************************************************** I declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing is true and correct.

Signed: Date:

Printed name: Title:

Name of Company:

Street Address of Headquarters:

City: State: Zip Code:

Telephone # (including area code): Email:

FOR CITY USE ONLY:

Bid/PO/Contract # _________________________ Permit # ____________

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 1020 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 63 Exhibit E – Locations List

CITY OF SANTA MONICA PARCS LOCATIONS
Facility Name Street Address Spaces
Lanes
In
Lanes
Out POFs
Downtown Parking Structure 1 1234 4th Street 338 1 2 3
Downtown Parking Structure 2 1235 2nd Street 647 1 2 3
Downtown Parking Structure 3 1320 4th Street 339 1 2 4
Downtown Parking Structure 4 1321 2nd Street 652 1 2 4
Downtown Parking Structure 5 1431 4th Street 665 1 2 4
Downtown Parking Structure 6 1431 2nd Street 775 2 3 4
Downtown Parking Structure 7 1526 4th Street 820 1 4 6
Downtown Parking Structure 8 215 Colorado Avenue 1,041 2 4 7 Downtown Parking Structure 9 1136 4th Street 294 1 1 1
Santa Monica Main Public Library
601 Santa Monica
Boulevard 525 2 2 0
Civic Center Parking Structure
(“CCPS”) 333 Civic Center Drive 744 2 2 2
Civic Auditorium Parking Lot (CAPL) 1855 Main Street 1,009 3 2 3 Pier Deck Parking Lot
West End Colorado
Avenue 284 1 1 2
KEC Parking Structure 1527 4th Street 116 1 1 1

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 1021 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 64 Exhibit F – Equipment List
Spare Parts
Each equipment system is unique in design and therefore each will have different internal components.

Proposers must provide itemized pricing for spare parts in the template below. Proposers must determine the type and quantity of spare parts that are essential for maintaining the PARCS and the most common spare parts that are not covered by warranty or a maintenance contract. Specific pricing inquiries are listed below. Spare parts are not part of the initial installation purchase. Pricing is for future parts order and evaluation consideration. Pricing will be hold accountable for minimum of two years. Any anticipation of price adjustment, Proposer must indicate in proposal.

Spare Parts
Description Unit MSRP Unit
Proposal
Cost
Gate Arms
Bracket or bolts component for gate arms
Bills acceptors
Ticket Printer Heads (Pay on Foot machines
or lanes)
Ticket Validator (in addition to Cloud Based
Validation Program)
Color LCD Screen (Pay on Foot machines and
lanes)
Coins Acceptor
RFID keycard
HID Proximity keycard
HID Proximity with magnetic stripe keycard
Magnetic stripe keycard for Cash Debit Card

CITY OF SANTA MONICA PARCS

REQUIRED PARCS EQUIPMENT
TOTAL
QTY
Downtown
Structure 1
Downtown
Structure 2
Downtown
Structure 3
Downtown
Structure 4
Downtown
Structure 5
Downtown
Structure 6
Downtown
Structure 7
Downtown
Structure 8
Downtown
Structure 9
Public
Library
Civic
Parking
Structure
Civic Aud.

Lot
Pier Deck
Lot
KEC
Parking
Structure
Entry Station w/Ticket Spitter, Prox Card Reader, Barcode Reader, Pinhole Camera, Intercom. 18 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 1 1 Exit Station w/CC Reader, Prox Card Reader, Barcode
Reader, Pinhole Camera, Intercom. 28 2 2 2 2 2 3 4 4 1 2 2 2 1 1 POF Station (Cash, Credit Card) w/Barcode Reader,
Pinhole Camera, Intercom 35 2 2 2 2 2 4 6 7 1 0 2 2 2 1 POF Station (Credit Card Only) w/Barcode Reader,
Pinhole Camera, Intercom 9 1 1 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
POF Shelter 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 1 1 0
Barrier Gate w/Ground Loops 48 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 6 2 4 3 4 2 2 Intercom Master Station 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Intercom Sub-Master Station 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 Protective Bollard 148 8 8 8 8 7 15 17 21 6 8 8 24 6 4
Redundant System Server 1
PARCS Software (workstations licenses) 5 5
Credit Card Software and Server 2 2 Validation System 7 ACS Software 1 Complete Workstation (Hardware & Software) 5 0 0 0 0 4 0 1 0 1 0 0 TOTAL 316 17 17 18 18 30 29 34 44 0 18 13 37 13 9

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 1022 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 65 Exhibit G – Non-Collusion Affidavit and Non-Discrimination Policy

NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT TO ACCOMPANY

PROPOSALS OR BIDS
STATE OF CALIFORNIA }
COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES }
, being first duly sworn, deposes, and says: that She/He is:

(Insert “Sole Owner,” “A Partner”, “President,” “Secretary,” or other proper title) of
(Insert name of bidder)
Who submits herewith to the City of Santa Monica the attached proposal; that He, She, It, or They is (are) the person(s) whose name(s) is (are) (strike out words not appropriate) signed to the hereto attached proposal; that said proposal is genuine; that the same is not sham or collusive; that all statements of fact therein are true; that such proposal was not made in the interest or on behalf of any person, partnership, company, association, organization or corporation not therein named or disclosed.

Affiant further deposes and says: that the bidder has not directly or indirectly by agreement, communication or conference with anyone attempted to induce action prejudicial to the interests of the public body which is to award the contract or of any other bidder, or anyone else interested in the proposed contract; that the bidder has not in any manner sought by collusion to secure for himself, herself, itself, or themselves, an advantage over any other bidder.

Affiant further deposes and says that prior to the public opening and reading of bids the said bidder:
(a) Did not, directly or indirectly, induce or solicit anyone else to submit a false or sham bid; (b) Did not, directly or indirectly, collude, conspire, connive or agree with anyone else that said bidder or anyone else would submit a false or sham bid, or that anyone should refrain from bidding or withdraw his bid;
(c) Did not, in any manner, directly or indirectly, seek by agreement, communication or conference with anyone to raise or fix any overhead, profit or cost element of his, her, its, their price, or of that of anyone else; and
(d) Did not, directly or indirectly, submit his, her, its, or their bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulge information or data relative thereto, to any corporation, partnership, company, association, organization, bid, depository, or to any member or agent thereof, or to any individual or group of individuals, except to the awarding authority or to any person or persons who have a partnership or other financial interest with said bidder in his, her, its, or their business. (strike out words not appropriate)
I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct.

____________________________ _____________________________ Signature Name of Bidder

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 1023 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 66 City of Santa Monica
Non Discrimination Policy
A. Discrimination.
(1) Discrimination in the provision of services may include, but not be limited to the following:
(a) Denying any person any service, or benefit or the availability of a facility. (b) Providing any service, or benefit to any person which is not equivalent, or in a non-equivalent manner or at a non-equivalent time, from that provided to others. (c) Subjecting any persons to segregation or separate treatment in any manner related to the receipt of any service.
(d) Restricting any person in any way in the enjoyment of any advantage or privilege enjoyed by others receiving any service or benefit.
(e) Treating any person differently from others in determining admission, enrollment, quota, eligibility, membership, or any other requirement or condition which persons must meet in order to be provided any service or benefit.
(2) Consultant shall take affirmative action to ensure that intended beneficiaries of this Agreement are provided services without regard to race, color, religion, national origin, ancestry, sex, age, sexual orientation, marital status, AIDS or disability.
(3) Consultant shall further establish and maintain written procedures under which any person applying for or receiving services hereunder, may seek resolution from Consultant of a complaint with respect to any alleged discrimination in the provision of services by Consultant's personnel.

At any time any person applies for services under this Agreement, he or she shall be advised by Consultant of these procedures. A copy of these procedures shall be posted by Consultant in a conspicuous place, available and open to the public, in each of Consultant's facilities where services are provided hereunder.

B. Non-discrimination in Employment.
(1) Consultant certifies and agrees that it will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, national origin, ancestry, sex, age, sexual orientation, marital status, AIDS or disability in accordance with the requirements of City, State or Federal law. Consultant shall take affirmative action to ensure that qualified applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to race, color, religion, national origin, ancestry, sex, age, sexual orientation, marital status, AIDS or disability, in accordance with the requirements of City, State and Federal law. Such shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
(a) Employment, upgrading, demotion, transfer, recruitment or recruitment advertising, layoff or termination, rates of pay or other forms of compensation. (b) Selection for training, including apprenticeship.
(2) Consultant agrees to post in conspicuous places in each of Consultant's facilities providing services hereunder, available and open to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the provisions of this non-discrimination policy.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 1024 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 67 (3) Consultant shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of Consultant, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religion, national origin, ancestry, sex, age, sexual orientation, marital status, AIDS or disability, in accordance with the requirements of City, State or Federal law. (4) Consultant shall send to each labor union or representative coworkers with which it has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding a notice advising the labor union or workers' representative of Consultant's commitments under this non-discrimination policy. (5) Consultant certifies and agrees that it will deal with its subconsultants, bidders, or vendors without regard to race, color, religion, national origin, ancestry, sex, age, sexual orientation, marital status, AIDS or disability, in accordance with the requirements of City, State and Federal law. (6) In accordance with applicable State and Federal law, Consultant shall allow duly authorized representatives of the County, State, and Federal government access to its employment records during regular business hours in order to verify compliance with this non-discrimination policy. Consultant shall provide other information and records as the representatives may require in order to verify compliance with this non-discrimination policy.
(7) If City finds that any of the provisions of this non-discrimination policy have been violated, the same shall constitute a material breach of agreement upon which City may determine to cancel, terminate, or suspend this Agreement. While City reserves the right to determine independently that this nondiscrimination policy has been violated, in addition, a determination by the California Fair Employment and Housing Commission or the Federal Equal Employment Opportunity Commission that Consultant has violated State or Federal non-discrimination laws shall constitute a finding by City that Consultant has violated the provisions of this non-discrimination policy. (8) The parties agree that in the event Consultant violates any of the non-discrimination policies set forth herein, City shall be entitled, at its option, to the sum of five hundred dollars ($500) pursuant to Civil Code Section 1671 as liquidated damages in lieu of canceling, terminating or suspending this Agreement. (9) Consultant hereby agrees that it will comply with Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended (29 U.S.C. 794), all requirements imposed by applicable Federal Regulations, and all guidelines and interpretations issued pursuant thereto, to the end that no qualified disabled person shall, on the basis of disability, be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or otherwise be subjected to discrimination under any program or activity of the Consultant receiving Federal Financial Assistance.

4.C.h
Packet Pg. 1025 Attachment: Skidata / Sentry Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 1 FIRST MODIFICATION OF AGREEMENT NO. 10413 (CCS)
This First Modification of Agreement Number 10413 (CCS) (“First Modification”), entered into as of _________________(“Execution Date”), by and between the City of Santa Monica, a municipal corporation (“City”), and SKIDATA, Inc. (f/k/a Sentry Control Systems, Inc.) is made with reference to the following:

RECITALS
A. On or about March 30, 2017, the City and Sentry Control Systems, Inc. (“SENTRY”) entered into Agreement Number 10413 (CCS) for new parking access and revenue control system (“PARCS”), ongoing systems maintenance, and equipment warranty (“Original Agreement”).

B. On or about November 13, 2019, the City consented to an assignment and assumption agreement between SENTRY, and SKIDATA, Inc. (“SKIDATA”). As part of the assignment, SKIDATA assumed all obligations and conditions of the Original Agreement and any subsequent modifications.

C. The City and SKIDATA now desire to modify the Original Agreement to extend the contract term and increase the contract price for a new total amount not to exceed six million four hundred ninety seven thousand ($6,497,000) United States Dollars (“USD”); upgrade the SKIDATA software system to enhance cyber security; ensure ongoing compliance with Payment Card Industry (“PCI”) compliance; and introduce contactless payment options for customers.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS
Now, therefore, the undersigned parties do hereby mutually agree to modify the Original Agreement as follows:

1. Section 2 of the Original Agreement entitled “Term” shall be deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following paragraph:

Term. This Agreement begins on the Execution Date and terminates on November 30, 2025, unless terminated earlier as set forth in the Original Agreement or extended by the parties in writing.

2. Section 7 of the Original Agreement entitled “Compensation” shall be deleted in its entirely and replaced with the following paragraph:

Compensation. The City will compensate SKIDATA for the Services provided under this Agreement. The total contract price for services pursuant to the Original Agreement and this First Modification shall not exceed six million four hundred ninety-seven thousand ($6,497,000) USD, as set forth in Exhibit B-1.

3. Section 9.1 of the Original Agreement shall be deleted in its entirely and replaced with the following:

9.1 All notices, demands, request for approvals to the City:

DocuSign Envelope ID: E00D9003-1534-4F31-B208-8FBB59BC6BB7 6/24/2021

4.C.i
Packet Pg. 1026 Attachment: Skidata First Modification (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 2 Department of Transportation
Parking Operations Division
City of Santa Monica
1444 4th Street
Santa Monica, CA 90401
Attn: Parking Manager
Re: Contract No. 10413
With a copy to:

City Attorney’s Office
City of Santa Monica
1685 Main Street, Third Floor
Santa Monica CA 90401
Attn: City Attorney
Contract No. 10413

4. Section 9.2 of the Agreement shall be deleted in its entirely and replaced with the following:

Section 9.2. All notices, demands, request for approval to SKIDATA:

SKIDATA, Inc.

Attn: Legal Counsel
16600 Sherman Way, Suite 150
Van Nuys, CA 91406
With a copy to:

Nagra-Kudelski Group
Attention: SKIDATA, Inc.
c/o Chief Executive Officer or Legal Counsel
5090 N. 40th Street, Suite 450
Phoenix, Arizona 85108

5. Exhibit A of the Original Agreement entitled “Scope of Services” shall be deleted in its entirely and replaced with A-1, attached hereto and incorporated by reference herein.

6. Exhibit B of the Original Agreement entitled “Budget” shall be deleted in its entirety and replaced with Exhibit B-1, attached hereto and incorporated by reference herein.

DocuSign Envelope ID: E00D9003-1534-4F31-B208-8FBB59BC6BB7

4.C.i
Packet Pg. 1027 Attachment: Skidata First Modification (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) 3 7. Exhibit D of the Original Agreement entitled “Warranty and Service” shall be deleted in its entirety and replaced with Exhibit D-1 entitled “SKIDATA Expert Services – SKIDATA.Care Pack”, attached hereto and incorporated by reference herein.

8. Except as expressly modified by this First Modification, all other terms and conditions of the Original Agreement shall be and remain in full force and effect.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this First Modification as of the date and year first written above.

ATTEST:
______________________________

DENISE ANDERSON-WARREN
City Clerk
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
______________________________

LANE DILG
City Attorney

CITY OF SANTA MONICA,
a municipal corporation
By: ______________________________

RICK COLE
City Manager
ABC Corporation
#VENDOR
By: _______________________________
DocuSign Envelope ID: E00D9003-1534-4F31-B208-8FBB59BC6BB7 6/23/2021
Interim City Attorney
George S. Cardona
President Skidata Inc
Darrell Smithson
6/23/2021
Skidata Inc
Interim City Manager
Lane Dilg
6/24/2021
Denise Anderson-Warren
City Clerk
6/24/2021

4.C.i
Packet Pg. 1028 Attachment: Skidata First Modification (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) Exhibit A-1
Scope of Services
SKIDATA shall install and maintain a new parking access and revenue control system (“PARCS”) for the following parking facilities (collectively, the “Parking Facilities”) owned by the City of Santa Monica:

Location Address
Parking Structure #1 1234 4th Street
Parking Structure #2 1235 2nd Street
Parking Structure #3 ** 1320 4th Street
Parking Structure #4 1321 2nd Street
Parking Structure #5 1440 4th Street
Parking Structure #6 1433 2nd Street
Parking Structure #7 320 Broadway
Parking Structure #8 1571 2nd Street
Parking Structure #9 1136 4th Street
Main Library Parking Garage 601 Santa Monica Blvd.

Ken Edwards Center Parking Garage 1527 4th Street
Civic Center Parking Structure 333 Civic Center Drive
Civic Center Parking Lot * 1855 Main Street
Pier Deck Parking Lot 200 Santa Monica Pier
*SKIDATA PARCS was installed and maintained in the Civic Center Parking Lot through July 30, 2019.

The Civic Center Parking Lot was eventually closed for parking operations effective February 2020. **Parking Structure #3 is tentatively scheduled for demolition sometime during FY 2021-22.

The City and SKIDATA may agree in writing to modify the quantity of equipment, software and services purchased by the City based on operational demands and needs. The City and SKIDATA acknowledge and agree that implementation of any changes to the amount of equipment, software, and services shall be done by Change Order, and shall be within the total not-to-exceed compensation amount of the Agreement.

SKIDATA shall complete all services in accordance with all provisions and Exhibits included in the Agreement.

Exhibit Name
Exhibit A-1 Scope of Services
Exhibit B-1 Budget
Exhibit C Insurance Requirements
Exhibit D-1 SKIDATA Expert Services – SKIDATA.Care Pack Exhibit E Sentry's Statement of Work Proposal Dated July 22, 2016 Exhibit F Parking Access and Revenue Control RFP
DocuSign Envelope ID: E00D9003-1534-4F31-B208-8FBB59BC6BB7

4.C.i
Packet Pg. 1029 Attachment: Skidata First Modification (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) Exhibit B-1
Budget
Equipment
Installation Phase*
Ongoing Service
and Warranty Year
1 Ongoing Service
and Warranty Year
2 Ongoing Service
and Warranty Year
3 Ongoing Service
and Warranty Year
4 Ongoing Service
and Warranty Year
5 Ongoing Service
and Warranty Year
6 Ongoing Service
and Warranty Year
7 Expenditure Category
Mar. 30, 2017 to
Nov. 30, 2018
Dec. 1, 2018 to
Nov 30, 2019
Dec. 1, 2019 to
Nov. 30, 2020
Dec. 1, 2020 to
Nov. 30, 2021
Dec. 1, 2021 to
Nov. 30, 2022
Dec. 1, 2022 to
Nov. 30, 2023
Dec. 1, 2023 to
Nov. 30, 2024
Dec. 1, 2024 to
Nov. 30, 2025
Progress Payment, Equipment (50%) $ 1,137,655 $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - Progress Payment, Equipment (40%) $ 912,847 $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - Progress Payment, Equipment (10%) $ 228,695 $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - Additional Upfront Equipment Purchases $ 685,156 $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - System Maintenance and Service Fees $ - $ 198,430 $ 198,430 $ 198,430 $ 198,430 $ 198,430 $ 198,430 $ 198,430 Extended Warranty Fees - Premium Package $ - Included Included $ 72,156 $ 79,469 $ 86,782 $ 94,096 $ 101,409 Spare Parts.Care Fees* $ - $ - $ - $ 91,133 $ 93,596 $ 96,059 $ 98,522 $ 100,985 Sweb.Validate Web Portal Fees $ - $ - $ 10,000 $ 10,000 $ 10,000 $ 10,000 $ 10,000 $ 10,000 Mobile.Pay Fees $ - $ - $ - $ 31,777 $ 31,777 $ 31,777 $ 31,777 $ 31,777 EPI License Fees $ - $ - $ 31,500 $ 31,500 $ - $ - $ - $ - Protect.Care Fees* $ - $ - $ - $ 700 $ 719 $ 738 $ 757 $ 776 Upgrade.Care Fees* $ - $ - $ - $ 48,000 $ 49,297 $ 50,595 $ 51,892 $ 53,189 Miscellaneous Services, Parts, and Freight* $ - $ - $ - $ 232,881 $ 110,000 $ 113,000 $ 116,000 $ 119,000 TOTAL $ 2,964,354 $ 198,430 $ 239,930 $ 716,577 $ 573,289 $ 587,381 $ 601,474 $ 615,566 GRAND TOTAL, NOT TO EXCEED OVER THE LIFE OF THE AGREEMENT $ 6,497,000 In accordance with Exhibit A-1 entitled Scope of Services, the City and SKIDATA may agree in writing to modify the quantity of equipment, software and services purchased by the City based on operational demands and needs. The City and SKIDATA acknowledge and agree that implementation of any changes to the amount of equipment, software, and services shall be done by Change Order, and shall be within the total not-to-exceed compensation amount of the Agreement.

Skidata Equipment, Installation, Software, Services, and Warranty *Note: On November 20, 2018, the City issued a Notice of Final Acceptance to SKIDATA (formerly known as Sentry) after inspecting and confirming that the Parking Access and Revenue Control Systems equipment was installed in accordance with the Original Agreement. The Notice of Final Acceptance closed out the equipment installation phase and activated the maintenance, service and warranty portion of the agreement to begin December 1, 2018.

DocuSign Envelope ID: E00D9003-1534-4F31-B208-8FBB59BC6BB7

4.C.i
Packet Pg. 1030 Attachment: Skidata First Modification (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and SKIDATA AG © 2018 Version 3.0 Page 1
SKIDATA Expert Services
SKIDATA.Care Pack
Business segment: CA | Country: USA | Sales Manager: Mary Beth McNair CUSTOMER details:

Company: City of Santa Monica
Contact person: Henry Servin Department:

Street, no.: 1444 4th St. E-mail: [email protected] Zip/place: 90401 Phone:

SITE A details (place of operation):

Site name: City of Santa Monica
Site number: 1700624 Contact person: Henry Servin
Street, no.: 1444 4th St. E-mail: [email protected] Zip/place: 90401 Phone:

Installed products: Appendix B: site A details
SKIDATA.CARE PACK MODULES

SERVICE NAME WARRANTY
(First Year)

BASIC EXTENDED PREMIUM PREMIUM
PLUS

REACTIVE
Coverage period MON to FRI
08AM to 5PM
MON to FRI
08AM to 5PM
MON to SUN
08AM to 5PM
MON to
SUN, 24 Hr
MON to SUN,
24 Hr
Time to support remote
[Hr] [Critical, Major,
Moderate, Minor]
8/24/48/48 8/24/48/48 4/8/24/24 2/4/8/8 1/4/8/8
Time to support onsite
[Hr] [Critical, Major,
Moderate, Minor]
24/72/72/72 24/72/72/72 24/48/72/72 8/24/48/48 4/8/24/24 Service labor Not included Not included Incidents Incidents + Requests
Incidents +
Requests +
Third Party

PREVENTIVE
Hardware Maintenance Not included Quarterly Quarterly Quarterly Quarterly Software Maintenance Included Included Included Included Included Training Not included Not included Annual 4 Hr
Annual
Full day
Bi-annual
Full day
Performance Review Call history
export
Call history
export
Quarterly Monthly Monthly
+ TCO Plan
PARTS
Spare Parts,
excl. wear and tear Included Not Included Not Included Not Included Not Included ANNUAL MODULE PRICE Incl. in project $ 115,966 $ 193,276 $ 270,586 $ 347,897

ADDITIONAL OPTIONS

SERVICE NAME ANNUAL OPTION PRICE
Spare Parts.Care $ 91,133
Protect.Care (Anti Virus) $ 819
Upgrade.Care $ 48,000
PCI Support.Care $ 45,567
Exhibit D-1 DocuSign Envelope ID: E00D9003-1534-4F31-B208-8FBB59BC6BB7

4.C.i
Packet Pg. 1031 Attachment: Skidata First Modification (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) SKIDATA AG © 2018 Version 3.0 Page 2
YOUR SKIDATA.CARE PACK
SELECTED SKIDATA.CARE MODULE: PREMIUM
SELECTED SKIDATA.CARE ADDITIONAL OPTIONS:
☒ Spare Parts.Care
☒ Protect.Care (Anti Virus as a Service)
☒ Upgrade.Care
☐ PCI Support.Care
ANNUAL PRICE (MODULE PRICE + OPTIONS): $ 410,538*
The annual price will be adjusted according to the consumer price index.

GENERAL AGREEMENTS
Contract commencing: TBD
Contract Term: Four (4) Years
Contract payment: MONTHLY IN ADVANCE
*Year One to include add’l $16,800 credit for Civic Lot removal for Aug 2019 – Jul 2020. Year Two to include $15,400 credit for Civic Lot removal for Aug 2020 – Jun 2021 (Credit calculated at $1,400/mo.) Additional monthly credit of $1,155 to be applied after removal of PS3 structure effective on/around August 2021.

The accompanying appendices are an integral part of this contract.

Location:

Date:

Customer SKIDATA, Inc.
___________________ ____________________
Signature Signature
___________________ ____________________
Print Print
SKIDATA Legal Entity
SKIDATA, Inc.
120 Albany Street, Tower II, Suite 750
New Jersey 08901
Appendix
Appendix A: Service description
Appendix B: Site details
Appendix C: Service price list
Appendix D: Service Conditions
DocuSign Envelope ID: E00D9003-1534-4F31-B208-8FBB59BC6BB7

4.C.i
Packet Pg. 1032 Attachment: Skidata First Modification (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) SKIDATA AG © 2018 Version 3.0 Page 3
SKIDATA Expert Services
SKIDATA.Care Pack: Appendix A
Service description

SERVICE COVERAGE PERIOD
SKIDATA technicians are available if you need them. Within the agreed coverage period, the customer is able to contact SKIDATA via telephone, e-mail or customer portal to get functional support.
• Each support case will be registered and handled according to standardized processes. • Per support case via Help Desk, a support time of 15 minutes is included. • Additional support will be charged according to the ‘SKIDATA Expert Services Price List’ or is covered by the service agreement.
• Within the defined coverage period of the selected option no supplements (weekend- or nightwork) will be charged.
• Within the defined coverage period of the selected module the agreed ‘time to support remote’ and the ‘time to support on-site’ values are valid. • The Help Desk may only be called by customer employees who have been trained to use SKIDATA systems.

TIME TO SUPPORT ONSITE & TIME TO SUPPORT REMOTE
Within the agreed coverage period, each incident will be prioritized and handled according to the agreed classification. Incidents are classified into four categories. These categories are explained below. The values within the overview grid represent hours.

Example: 8/24/48/48.

The first figure is valid for the classification level ‘Critical’, the second for ‘Major’, the third for ‘Moderate’ and the fourth for ‘Minor’.

Explanation of incident classification
Critical: the contractually agreed use is impossible or unreasonably restricted and the error materially affects the Principal’s business processes.

Major: the contractually agreed use is very restricted and the error materially affects the Principal’s business processes, however, the Principal is still able to continue to work in a restricted manner.

Moderate: the contractually agreed use is slightly restricted and the error slightly affects the Principal’s business processes, however, the Principal is still able to continue to work in a slightly restricted manner.

Minor: Incidents which do not fall into any other category.

The classification of incidents is done by SKIDATA in agreement with the customer.

DocuSign Envelope ID: E00D9003-1534-4F31-B208-8FBB59BC6BB7

4.C.i
Packet Pg. 1033 Attachment: Skidata First Modification (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) SKIDATA AG © 2018 Version 3.0 Page 4
Prioritization times
Time to support remote: Time between the notification of an incident by the customer or the detection of an incident by SKIDATA and the time until SKIDATA starts troubleshooting remote.

Time to support on-site: Time between the notification of an incident by the customer or the detection of an incident by SKIDATA and the arrival at the site where the incident is detected, if it cannot be fixed by means of remote access or telephone support.

The figure below shows the prioritization times:

Figure: visualization of prioritization times

SERVICE LABOR
Within the agreed coverage period, different types of service labor activities can be included.

Service labor activities are divided into three types which are described below.

SKIDATA is committed to the high-quality training and know-how of its service personnel. Each service technician is obliged to complete a three-level training program with a final examination.

Incidents
Incident management is performed by a logical, systematic search for the cause of a problem so that the device or process is ready for operation again after the solution.

Service requests
Service requests are plannable activities to change the behavior and functionality of the access system.
customer notifies /
SKIDATA detects
incident
start remote
support
end
troubleshooting
start on-site
support
optional incident
reclassification
time
time to
support
on-site
time to
support
remote
incident
classification
DocuSign Envelope ID: E00D9003-1534-4F31-B208-8FBB59BC6BB7

4.C.i
Packet Pg. 1034 Attachment: Skidata First Modification (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) SKIDATA AG © 2018 Version 3.0 Page 5
Service on third party equipment
Third party equipment is hardware and software not provided by SKIDATA but related to the functionality of the access system. Third party equipment covered by the agreement must be listed within appendix B.

To provide effective troubleshooting, SKIDATA’s service is organized in local and central service teams. All service engineers are connected with central technical (CTS) support at SKIDATA headquarters and with the world wide acting R&D teams. CTS is based in Europe and in Texas.

Troubleshooting is generally done remotely. If remote troubleshooting is not possible, SKIDATA reserves the right to carry out a service visit on-site to handle the incident.

Excluded labor activities:
• Troubleshooting of issues caused by misconduct of customer employee or operators • Troubleshooting of issues caused by force majeure
Required spare parts will be invoiced if the option ‘Spare Parts.Care’ is not part of this agreement.

HARDWARE MAINTENANCE
Hardware maintenance is a preventive maintenance and includes the inspection, cleaning, and adjustment of hardware components as well as the execution of test runs necessary for proper operation. The costs of labor and travel are included.

Hardware maintenance is classified into Level 1 and Level 2 activities.

Level 1 activities: Cleaning and visual inspection
Level 2 activities: Maintenance according to inspection plan, replacement of wear parts if necessary.

A detailed list of activities is available on request.

Required spare parts will be invoiced if the option ‘Spare Parts.Care’ is not part of this agreement.

SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
Software maintenance is a preventive maintenance and includes selected checks of the SKIDATA software and operating system. The costs of labor and travel are included.

Software maintenance is classified into Level 1 and Level 2 activities.

Level 1 activities: Patching (operating system, SKIDATA software) Level 2 activities: Database maintenance (archiving, indexing, log-file check, maintenance plan), updates within the same SKIDATA software release A detailed list of activities is available on request.

TRAINING
Use your SKIDATA system efficiently! The better you know your SKIDATA system, the more efficiently you can use it! For this reason, we pass on our knowledge to you in structured training sessions at our training locations.

Training is available in three different types which are described below.

DocuSign Envelope ID: E00D9003-1534-4F31-B208-8FBB59BC6BB7

4.C.i
Packet Pg. 1035 Attachment: Skidata First Modification (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) SKIDATA AG © 2018 Version 3.0 Page 6
Annual 4 Hr
The service agreement includes four hours of training per year.

Annual full day
The service agreement includes one full day of training per year.

A full day means from 08 am to 05 pm.

Bi-annual full day
The service agreement includes two full days of training per year.

A full day means from 08 am to 05 pm.

All trainings will be performed at an SKIDATA training location.

The training program will be defined upfront according to the needs of the customer.

If training is part of the service agreement attendance is required by the primary customer team. Otherwise the agreed reaction times cannot be guaranteed.

PERFORMANCE REVIEW
SKIDATA offers different levels of performance reviews to analyze the performance of SKIDATA’s service delivery. Within the Premium Plus module also a total cost of ownership plan is included.

The following performance review types are available.

Call history export
On request a summary of logged service calls will be provided.

The summary is an export of SKIDATA’s service management application.

Quarterly report
SKIDATA provides proactive a summary of logged service calls per quarter.

The summary is an export of SKIDATA’s service management application.

It includes the fulfillment level of the agreed SLAs and shows basic performance statistics.

Monthly report
SKIDATA provides proactive a summary of logged service calls per month.

The summary is an export of SKIDATA’s service management application.

It includes the fulfillment level of the agreed SLAs and shows basic performance statistics.

Monthly report including a TCO plan
In addition to the monthly performance report as described above a TCO (total cost of ownership) plan will be provided by SKIDATA. This plan shows recommended investments in the future to keep the system on the latest technology standard. A TCO plan considers the risk of downtimes and indicates the required budget to maintain the access solution.

SPARE PARTS.CARE
The option ‘SPARE PARTS.CARE’ extends the service agreement with the supply and installation of spare parts.

Spares repaired by SKIDATA are refurbished and fully functional. Excluded from the scope of delivery are spare parts which have been damaged by improper use, vandalism or weather conditions.

Wear and tear parts are excluded from the scope of delivery:
• Thermo printer head
• Sheer bolts
• Barrier arms
• Short term tickets
• Backup batteries for UPS
DocuSign Envelope ID: E00D9003-1534-4F31-B208-8FBB59BC6BB7

4.C.i
Packet Pg. 1036 Attachment: Skidata First Modification (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) SKIDATA AG © 2018 Version 3.0 Page 7
PROTECT.CARE (ANTI VIRUS SERVICE)
The option ‘PROTECT.CARE extends the service agreement with the installation and operation of an SKIDATA qualified anti virus solution.

All SKIDATA products with Microsoft Windows® based operating systems should be equipped with an anti-virus service agent. The agent communicates via the Internet with the central antivirus service to get the latest security updates (patterns). The agent protects against malicious software infection, detects potential threats, and removes them to prevent system downtime.

UPGRADE.CARE
The option ‘UPGRADE.CARE’ extends the service agreement with regular upgrades of the management software of the SKIDATA access solution.

Upgrade means the transition from one major release to the subsequent one. It usually contains some major new features as well as basic enhancements that extend the functionality of software or hardware.

The upgrade includes the required SKIDATA software licenses, the preparation of the upgrade and the installation of upgrade. SKIDATA has a special focus to minimize the downtime of the access solution during the upgrade.

A prerequisite for the ‘Upgrade.Care’ option is an access solution with a supported management software (Parking.Logic, Freemotion.Logic, Handshake.Logic) installed.

PCI SUPPORT.CARE
With the option PCI assistance, SKIDATA offers the support to help achieve and maintain PCI compliance with user accounts, password, encryption and other payment data related information.

As a software vendor, SKIDATA’s responsibility is to be “PA-DSS Validated.” PA-DSS is the standard against which Payment Application has been tested, assessed, and validated. PCI Compliance is to be obtained by the merchant. The PA-DSS Validation is intended to ensure that the Payment Application will help achieve and maintain PCI Compliance with respect to how Payment Application handles user accounts, passwords, encryption, and other payment data related information. The Payment Card Industry (PCI) has developed security standards for handling cardholder information in a published standard called the PCI Data Security Standard (DSS). The security requirements defined in the DSS apply to all members, merchants, and service providers that store, process or transmit cardholder data. The PCI DSS requirements apply to all system components within the payment application environment which is defined as any network device, host, or application included in, or connected to, a network segment where cardholder data is stored, processed or transmitted.

DocuSign Envelope ID: E00D9003-1534-4F31-B208-8FBB59BC6BB7

4.C.i
Packet Pg. 1037 Attachment: Skidata First Modification (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) SKIDATA AG © 2018 Version 3.0 Page 8
SKIDATA Expert Services
SKIDATA Care Pack: Appendix B
Site details
Product: installation date:

SKIDATA hardware:

Power.Gates (entry/exit)
Barrier.Gates
Door Reader.Gates
Easy.Cash POF
Credit.Cash POF
Workstations
Desktop Coders
SKIDATA software:

Parking.Logic
Articles
Data Ex-/Import
Fee Group Analysis
Value Added Tax
Additional Settings
Rate Management
Non-SD Reader Interface
Credit Cards/Debit Cards
Customisable Reports
Online Database Access
Exit Cashiering
Host communication
Advanced Settings
Money

PCI/PA-DSS
Change Log
Settings
Electronic Payment Interface
Customers
Car Parks
Large-Scale Facility
sweb.Validate
sweb.Mobile Pay
Third party products:

EMV/NFC Readers (attended/unattended)
HID Readers
Commend Intercoms/Server
Management Server

DAZ/DAU
Validation kiosks
Firewall
Switches
DocuSign Envelope ID: E00D9003-1534-4F31-B208-8FBB59BC6BB7

4.C.i
Packet Pg. 1038 Attachment: Skidata First Modification (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) SKIDATA AG © 2018 Version 3.0 Page 9
SKIDATA Expert Services
SKIDATA Care Pack: Appendix C
Service price list
Pricebook Customer
Hour rate HW Hour rate SW
Overtime Weekend
and Holiday (08:00 –
17:00)
(08:00 –
17:00)
US – List
Price 1 With contract 195 $ 225 $ +100% 125%
US – List
Price 2
Without
contract 215 $ 245 $ +100% 125%
US – TX, MO,
MN 1 With contract 175 $ 200 $ +100% 125%
US – TX, MO,
MN 2
Without
contract 195 $ 225 $ +100% 125%
US – SF 1 With contract 215 $ 245 $ +100% 125%
US – SF 2 Without
contract 235 $ 280 $ +100% 125%
Dispatch charge: N/A
DocuSign Envelope ID: E00D9003-1534-4F31-B208-8FBB59BC6BB7

4.C.i
Packet Pg. 1039 Attachment: Skidata First Modification (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) SKIDATA AG © 2016 Version 3.3 Page 1
SKIDATA Expert Services
SKIDATA.Care Pack: Appendix D
Service Conditions General - USA
The following Service Conditions govern Principal`s use of SKIDATA Expert Services as described in the SKIDATA.Care Pack Offer (“the Offer”) and service description. These Service Conditions shall apply in addition to SKIDATA’s General Conditions. In case of any conflict between these Service Conditions and the General Conditions, these Service Conditions shall prevail. By signing the Offer Principal agrees to these terms as a whole.

1. Subject Matter of the Contract

1.1. The Principal uses products (hardware and/or software) made by SKIDATA (“SKIDATAproducts”) which the Principal acquires and/or acquired in accordance with separate provisions.

SKIDATA renders services for such products in the scope determined by the Principal and in accordance with these Service Conditions and other provisions contained in this Contract.

1.2. Principal is able to choose between various services which are divided in modules (“Modules”) by checking the appropriate box in the Offer. This decision of Principal is legally valid and binding. SKIDATA pledge to perform the services as described in the Offer and its appendices. This also applies to orders via the SKIDATA Service Portal.

1.3. SKIDATA shall render the services covered by these Service Conditions only for the SKIDATA products stated in this Contract. If agreed also within the service contract, also for third-party products. If the Principal purchases other products from SKIDATA, such other products shall only be included in the services to the extent such inclusion is expressly agreed upon and included in the contract.

1.4. In case of any conflicts between individual parts of this Contract such as offer, annexes etc. concerning the selection of the individual options, their extent, and the required specifications of these Service Conditions, then an offer, individually prepared by SKIDATA and which particularly contains the prices to be paid for the services, shall have priority over any other agreements and specifications.

1.5. Before concluding a service contract for Principal’s system, which contains components not covered by warranty, SKIDATA reserves the right to conduct a fee for the repair of the system.

2. Place of Performance of Services

2.1. SKIDATA shall render its services as required and in accordance with these Service Conditions on site or remote. However, this shall in no event affect the Place of Performance stipulated in the General Conditions.

2.2. Services on site shall be rendered at the address stated in this Contract (place of operation).

In case of any changes of the place of operation without SKIDATA’s express consent, SKIDATA shall be released from the performance obligation, however, the Principal's obligation to pay shall continue to exist.

2.3. In case of any change of the place of operation, SKIDATA reserves the right to adjust the service fee to a reasonable extent, taking into account, among other things, the new travel distances. Alternatively, SKIDATA shall be entitled to terminate this Service Contract with immediate effect.

3. Prices

3.1. The Principal shall pay SKIDATA a non-recurring or a recurring service fee as agreed-upon for the services to be rendered in accordance with these Service Conditions. The price is quoted in the Offer and invoiced in advance in the first quarter of the contractual year. If Principal accepts direct debit by checking the appropriate box in the offer, the price is invoiced in advance in the first quarter of the contractual year by direct debit. In case of doubt an annual service fee payable for one year in advance shall be assumed. The amount and the composition of the DocuSign Envelope ID: E00D9003-1534-4F31-B208-8FBB59BC6BB7

4.C.i
Packet Pg. 1040 Attachment: Skidata First Modification (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) SKIDATA AG © 2016 Version 3.3 Page 2
service fee result from the contractual agreements, especially from the individual Offer prepared by SKIDATA.

3.2. SKIDATA shall be entitled to reasonably adjust the service fee once a year. The service fee is subject to a value guarantee in accordance with the consumer price index or any other comparable index taking its place and the month in which the applicable Agreement was concluded shall be the starting basis. If an alternative index is cited in the offer, this index shall prevail.

3.3. Any rights of set-off shall be excluded, and the service fee will not be reimbursed in part or in full in case of termination.

3.4. If the Principal acquires additional products from SKIDATA to be included in the services, these products shall be included in the service fee on a pro rata basis, and SKIDATA will invoice the difference immediately after the purchase of the products from SKIDATA.

3.5. If the Principal wishes to obtain additional services exceeding the scope of the agreed services or services which are to be invoiced separately in accordance with these Service Conditions, these additional services shall not be covered by the service fee, and SKIDATA will invoice these additional services on a time and material basis in accordance with the applicable prices.

4. Principal’s Obligation to Cooperate

4.1. The Principal undertakes
a) to use its best efforts to support SKIDATA and fulfil the technical requirements necessary to enable SKIDATA to render the requested services; in particular by giving SKIDATA any necessary and requested information and enabling SKIDATA to access any networks, data bases, programmes, devices and services by third parties to the extent they could be useful for the correction of errors;
b) to make available - to the extent necessary - employees who can be of assistance for the services or whom SKIDATA expressly requests. Such employees are to support SKIDATA accordingly;
c) to establish contact with third parties to the extent necessary for the rendering of the services or to the extent as expressly requested by SKIDATA and to affect the necessary communication or support SKIDATA in making the necessary communication; d) to duly and regularly effect the data backups to the extent possible and designated; this obligation refers to a general data backup in the extent usual in the industry as well as to a specific backup of data located on computers or servers before services are rendered, for example before updates are performed;
e) subject to these Service Conditions, to effect maintenance, service, and cleaning of the equipment including the exchange of spare parts, wear and tear parts, and mechanical components; such works are to be effected in accordance with the specifications given by SKIDATA as well as in accordance with training information, manuals, maintenance instructions or similar information, if any, on a regular basis as a precaution measure;
f) to establish and maintain at its own expense the system requirements necessary for the services and/or the required working environment. To the extent the Principal refuses to accept services rendered by SKIDATA for software or hardware, the Principal loses any warranty claims in relation to the respective SKIDATA products; g) to provide keys for equipment, use of power grid, toilets and in general a safe working environment to SKIDATA.

4.2. These obligations to cooperate shall apply in addition to the Principal’s obligations to cooperate to be fulfilled in connection with the individual services, if any.

5. Term of Contract

5.1. Unless otherwise agreed upon the present Contract shall be concluded for a period of one year. It shall be renewed by additional periods of one year each unless either party terminates the Contract in writing observing a notice period of 60 days as of the end of the contractual year.

5.2. In case of any material breach of Contract by either party, the respective other party must request the defaulting party in writing to remedy the breach within a period of 30 (thirty) days, DocuSign Envelope ID: E00D9003-1534-4F31-B208-8FBB59BC6BB7

4.C.i
Packet Pg. 1041 Attachment: Skidata First Modification (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) SKIDATA AG © 2016 Version 3.3 Page 3
whereby the breach of Contract must be specifically described, and if the defaulting party fails to remedy such material breach, the other party shall be entitled to terminate the present Contract with immediate effect in writing (including fax or email).

5.3. If SKIDATA terminates the Contract due to a breach of contract by the Principal or due to a change of the place of operation, SKIDATA shall not be obliged to repay to the Principal any payments already made or to grant the Principal a discount concerning any payments due.

5.4. Upon termination of this Contract, the Principal shall not be entitled to obtain services of any kind.

6. Change of Control of the Principal

6.1. In case of any material change of the distribution of ownership and/or of control of the Principal, SKIDATA shall be entitled to terminate this contract upon 3 (three) months’ notice, such termination to be declared within 3 months from the day it receives knowledge of such change. In any case, such material change shall be fulfilled if at least 50 percent of the ownership, of the shares or of the rights to vote are transferred to one or more new or existent owners, shareholders or beneficiaries. In any case, the whole or partial transmission of this contract to a third party requires SKIDATA’s consent.

6.2. In case SKIDATA declares termination of the contract according to paragraph 6.1, paragraphs 5.3 and 5.4 shall apply correspondingly. Otherwise the contract and its obligations demise upon mutual agreement to the new owner but only when an inventory control is performed by SKIDATA. The new owner shall bear the costs of the inventory control.

7. SPECIAL CONDITIONS: OWNERSHIP
If Principal or its employees or SKIDATA or its employees exchange spare parts or other parts in accordance with these Service Conditions, the removed parts shall become SKIDATA’s property upon removal. The newly built-in parts shall become the property of the owner of the equipment into which they are built in as of the time of payment.

8. SPECIAL CONDITIONS: LIABILITY

8.1. Subject to attributable personal injury and any damage in accordance with the Product Liability Act or the Product Protection Act for whatever legal reason, SKIDATA shall only be liable for any damage caused by SKIDATA’s gross negligence or wilful intent up to the amount of one annual service fee, however, not more than $ 500.000 (in words: five hundred thousand dollars).

8.2. SKIDATA shall not be liable for any failure of or delay in the performance of this Agreement for the period that such failure or delay is due to causes beyond its reasonable control, including but not limited to acts of God, war, strikes or labour disputes, embargoes, government orders or any other force majeure event.

8.3. Except where such limitations would be prohibited, in no event shall SKIDATA Parties be liable for any indirect, special, punitive, exemplary, incidental and/or consequential damages of any kind (including, but not limited to, lost profits) whether based in contract, tort, strict liability or otherwise which arises out of or is any way connected with this Agreement.

9. Individual Services

9.1. Individual services are services not covered by the services detailed in these Service Conditions and which are individually agreed upon between SKIDATA and the Principal in this Contract or otherwise in writing.

9.2. SKIDATA's General Conditions shall be applicable in any case, the Service Conditions contained herein must be applied analogously.

10. Data Protection

10.1. SKIDATA shall be entitled to collect, process, forward and use the Principal’s personal data to the extent necessary for the establishment and fulfilment of the Contract as well as for invoicing and Principal service purposes. SKIDATA shall also be entitled to transfer such data to affiliated companies or third parties commissioned to process data for SKIDATA to the extent such transfer is necessary to enable SKIDATA to perform.

DocuSign Envelope ID: E00D9003-1534-4F31-B208-8FBB59BC6BB7

4.C.i
Packet Pg. 1042 Attachment: Skidata First Modification (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) SKIDATA AG © 2016 Version 3.3 Page 4

10.2. When using SKIDATA’s deliveries and services, the Principal shall be obliged to adhere to any and all applicable legal provisions for data protection. The Principal shall be solely responsible for any notices to be given to public authorities (e.g. data protection committee).

10.3. These obligations shall remain valid for a period of 5 (five) years after termination of the contractual relationship between SKIDATA and the Principal, unless mandatory legal provisions require a longer or an indefinite period of time.

10.4. These provisions shall not affect any Non-Disclosure Agreement between SKIDATA and the Principal.

10.5. The customer is informed and agrees that technical system data (e.g. topology, hardware and software version numbers, device counters, software status, time of installation, serial numbers) are recorded and transmitted to SKIDATA AG by the system to be able to develop preventive maintenance concepts to increase quality and efficiency of customer support.

11. Coverage period

11.1. The coverage period defines the availability of the local hotline service.

11.2. The hotline service established by SKIDATA is only available at the telephone number, customer portal and email address as stated in this Contract. SKIDATA reserves the right, at its discretion, to operate the hotline service itself or have it operated by a third party. Should the Principal contact SKIDATA via other contact means than the ones stated (telephone number, customer portal and email address), then SKIDATA shall not be obliged to fulfil the obligations stated in this agreement. No reaction times shall commence upon such contact. SKIDATA only pledges availability as defined in the service descriptions and according coverage period.

11.3. The hotline must not be used for training purposes.

11.4. Only employees of the Principal trained on the use of SKIDATA Systems shall be allowed to use the hotline.

11.5. Upon SKIDATA’s request, the Principal and/or its employees must state detailed contact data in order to ensure that SKIDATA can reach the Principal respectively its employees if this is necessary for troubleshooting. However, the Principal shall not be entitled to demand a return call from SKIDATA.

11.6. Provided support services as part of the hotline service will be charged according the “Expert Service price list”, unless these costs for troubleshooting are included in the annual flat rate as defined within this Contract.

12. Time to support remote and time to support onsite

12.1. The time to support and the time to support onsite defines times for reactive unplanned services (troubleshooting).

12.2. Prioritisation Times and Error Classes

12.2.1. SKIDATA only pledges to observe periods as defined in the service descriptions.

12.2.2. For the purposes of these provisions,
a) Time to support remote shall be the time between the detection of an error by the Principal or SKIDATA (also remote services) and the time when SKIDATA starts troubleshooting. The Principal should recommend an error classification, Principal acknowledge and agree that the actual classification is made by SKIDATA.

The time of detection of an error shall be deemed to be the time at which the Principal reports such error via the hotline in reasonable detail and in a comprehensible manner as is necessary for Troubleshooting. The reaction time only runs during the committed service times according to the agreed coverage period.
b) Solution time (troubleshooting time) shall be the time between the start of the troubleshooting and the completion of the Troubleshooting work by SKIDATA. SKIDATA shall confirm the completion of the Troubleshooting work. The end of troubleshooting is achieved, when a solution is found, the problem is fixed or the workaround is defined.

SKIDATA preserves the right to determine that. The solution time only runs during the committed service times according to the agreed coverage period. c) Time to support onsite time shall be the time between the detection of an error by the Principal or SKIDATA (also remote services) and the arrival of the service technician on-site.

DocuSign Envelope ID: E00D9003-1534-4F31-B208-8FBB59BC6BB7

4.C.i
Packet Pg. 1043 Attachment: Skidata First Modification (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) SKIDATA AG © 2016 Version 3.3 Page 5
The time of detection of an error shall be deemed to be the time at which the Principal reports such error via the hotline in reasonable detail and in a comprehensible manner as is necessary for Troubleshooting. The on-site time only runs during the committed service times according to the agreed coverage period.

12.2.3. The duration of each prioritisation time shall be defined according to the error classes defined below to which SKIDATA allocates reported problems in accordance with the Principal’s description and according to the times stipulated in this Contract in this respect. a) Critical errors: the contractually agreed use is impossible or unreasonably restricted and the error materially affects the Principal’s business processes. b) Major errors: the contractually agreed use is very restricted and the error materially affects the Principal’s business processes, however, the Principal is still able to continue to work in a restricted manner.
c) Moderate errors: the contractually agreed use is slightly restricted and the error slightly affects the Principal’s business processes, however, the Principal is still able to continue to work in a slightly restricted manner.
d) Minor errors: Incidents which do not fall into any other category.

12.2.4. In the course of reaction and/or Troubleshooting, the error occurred can be allocated by SKIDATA to another, less critical error class if the relevant features are applicable in this case, the longer reaction time and/or Troubleshooting time shall apply respectively.

12.3. Special Obligations to Cooperate
The Principal shall grant SKIDATA the right (and support SKIDATA in this respect) to access the Principal’s equipment online via a remote maintenance tool in order to correct errors and provide support. The connected asset management tool (short CAM) should be installed and activated to simply the service delivery.

13. Service labour

13.1. The agreed ‘service labour’ defines the coverage of troubleshooting costs both through remote maintenance and through on-site support, as well as the associated travel costs at a lump sum.

13.2. In case troubleshooting work is not included in the service fee, the working hours and working costs shall be invoiced on a time and material basis in accordance with SKIDATA's price lists valid at the time.

13.3. SKIDATA reserves the right to perform service activities via remote maintenance, if this is possible.

13.4. The accounting and treatment of required spare and wear parts for troubleshooting is to be made according to the option ‘Spare Parts’.

14. Maintenance

14.1. ‘Maintenance’ defines the scope of services and the interval of preventative performed maintenance.

14.2. General

14.2.1. SKIDATA pledges to perform maintenance as described in the document ‘Service Description’ in the quoted interval.

14.2.2. Principal acknowledges and agrees that Maintenance work shall only carried out during SKIDATA’s normal business hours (“Normal Business Hours”). Principal further acknowledges and agrees that Normal Business Hours do not include any holidays that are recognized by the Federal government and/or SKIDATA, and that SKIDATA’s maintenance services will not be available at those times or any other days or times that are outside of the Normal Business Hours.

14.2.3. Principal acknowledges and agrees that basic in-house maintenance (also called Level 1 maintenance) can only be performed by Principal when Principal participate routinely SKIDATA trainings.

14.2.4. Spare and wear parts are not included in the maintenance fee, therefore accounting and treatment of required spare and wear parts for troubleshooting must be agreed within the Contract (Option ‘Spare Parts’)

14.2.5. These maintenance conditions and the fees to be paid therefore do not include services rendered for troubleshooting purposes.

DocuSign Envelope ID: E00D9003-1534-4F31-B208-8FBB59BC6BB7

4.C.i
Packet Pg. 1044 Attachment: Skidata First Modification (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) SKIDATA AG © 2016 Version 3.3 Page 6

14.3. Hardware

14.3.1. Hardware maintenance is a preventive maintenance and includes the inspection, cleaning, and adjustment of hardware components as well as the execution of test runs necessary for proper operation.

14.3.2. SKIDATA shall render the services included in Hardware Maintenance exclusively for the equipment specified in this Contract and at the location stated in the Contract.

14.3.3. Hardware maintenance shall be effected as agreed in this Contract once or several times per year within the stated periods of time. The Principal and SKIDATA shall agree on the specific date for each hardware maintenance a reasonable period of time in advance, taking into consideration each party’s legitimate interests.

14.3.4. The Principal shall bear the travel expenses for the employees of SKIDATA on an actual cost basis unless a lump sum fee for travel expenses was agreed upon.

14.3.5. If the hardware inspection shows that parts of the hardware must be exchanged, especially wear and tear parts (such as rollers, pressure rollers, and drive belts), spare parts or other parts, such exchange shall be effected immediately by SKIDATA’s employees to the extent such requirements could be foreseen and SKIDATA's employees brought such parts with them. SKIDATA shall invoice the exchanged parts in accordance with the price list valid at the time if spare parts are not part of the Contract. Wear and tear parts are never covered by the service contract.

14.3.6. In particular the following activities are not included in the scope of the preventive hardware maintenance:
a) remedy of errors and malfunctions caused by force majeure; b) remedy of errors and malfunctions caused by any intervention by the Principal, its employees or any third party;
c) delivery and replacement of consumable products;
d) remedy of errors and malfunctions caused by the Principal’s failure to fulfil its obligations, in particular its obligation to cooperate.

14.4. Software

14.4.1. Updates

14.4.1.1. Within the scope of Software Maintenance, the Principal shall receive from SKIDATA current updates for the SKIDATA software included in the scope of services to the extent such updates are generated by SKIDATA. For the purposes of these provisions, updates means service packs within the same release (service packs) and shall include minor changes to existing software with the purpose of removing software bugs and making small improvements.

Any and all updates provided to the Principal shall be subject to the same software and licence conditions applicable to the original software in the respective current version.

14.4.1.2. The installation as well as any other services within the scope of Software Maintenance, if any, shall be rendered by employees of SKIDATA on site. The Principal shall bear the travel expenses for the employees of SKIDATA on an actual cost basis unless a lump sum fee for travel expenses was agreed upon. The Principal and SKIDATA shall agree on the specific date for the provision of services within the scope of Software Maintenance a reasonable period of time in advance, taking into consideration each party’s legitimate interests.

14.4.1.3. Updates will be prepared by SKIDATA on the basis of legal or technical requirements and in its sole discretion. The Principal shall not be entitled to demand that SKIDATA prepares and publishes any updates. SKIDATA reserves the right to freely choose the contents and release time of updates.

14.4.1.4. SKIDATA reserves the right to determine in which environment the updates are to be used and to change the system requirements for updates including hardware and software requirements. As a general rule, changes to the system requirements and/or to the environment of the updates are necessary as an adjustment to advancing technological developments in order to keep the SKIDATA software up-to-date. The Principal shall be liable for the implementation of any system requirements which are necessary for the installation and use of updates. Should the Principal fail to fulfil these requirements, SKIDATA does not assume any warranty for the functionality of the software. The Principal take the responsibility to hold his system network virus free and secure.

DocuSign Envelope ID: E00D9003-1534-4F31-B208-8FBB59BC6BB7

4.C.i
Packet Pg. 1045 Attachment: Skidata First Modification (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) SKIDATA AG © 2016 Version 3.3 Page 7

14.4.1.5. As of the time of discontinuation of a certain SKIDATA-product, updates for such software (Parking.Logic, Freemotion.Logic, Handshake.Logic) shall no longer be prepared and published.

14.4.1.6. Software Maintenance can be carried out for the current and two preceding releases.

14.4.2. Software Configuration
Adjustments and changes on the basis of a list of changes to be submitted by the Principal in writing are made on the basis of an existing configuration of the programs covered by Software Maintenance at least once a year within the time periods stipulated in this Contract. This list of changes, stating in detail the desired changes and adjustments, must be submitted to SKIDATA a reasonable period of time before the date SKIDATA is to render its services. The extent of such changes and adjustments is in any case limited by the maximum number of working hours stated in the Offer. Changes and adjustments shall only cover existing configurations; the compilation of new configurations shall not be included.

15. Spare Parts

15.1. The option ‘Spare Parts’ defines the optional accounting of the costs for spare parts in a lump sum.

15.2. Definitions

15.2.1. Spare part: A spare part is defined as a part that replaces a defective part of a SKIDATA product.

15.2.2. Wear part: A wear part is defined as a spare part that replaces a defective part of a product which is defect because of abrasion. Abrasion is the ongoing loss of material of a solid body caused by mechanical causes (grind, roll, hit, scratch, chemical or thermal stress).

15.2.3. Refurbished part: A refurbished part is defined as a spare part that has been returned by repair to the original functional state. Refurbished parts are available within an exchange process (defective part against refurbished part).

15.3. SKIDATA undertakes to supply and exchange the spare parts for the components contained in the annexed equipment list (site details) and installed at the location stated in this Contract and to effect repair works for electric and mechanical components at SKIDATA's site.

15.4. SKIDATA spare and wear parts must be installed by SKIDATA service engineers. Any other handling must be agreed by SKIDATA.

15.5. For the purpose of these Service Conditions, spare parts are the components contained in SKIDATA's spare parts catalogue. The Principal shall be entitled to receive the latest version of this spare parts catalogue upon request or in the manner stipulated in this Contract.

Consumable products such as ink ribbons or tickets as well as casing parts destroyed by mechanical damage, PCs and related components, palettes, bases and star-type reel stands shall not be covered by these Service Conditions.

15.6. Unless otherwise agreed upon SKIDATA reserves the right to demand a retention for certain spare parts. The Principal shall be informed of the parts for which such retention is demanded and its amount in the spare parts catalogue valid at the time or in another manner as specified in this Contract.

15.7. The spare parts provided by SKIDATA under these Service Conditions must be operative to such extent as is required to fulfil the tasks of the part to be replaced. Such spare parts can either be new or overhauled. However, the Principal shall not be entitled to demand the delivery of brand-new parts.

15.8. SKIDATA shall supply spare parts to the Principal for as long as the required spare parts / components are available on the market. SKIDATA will adjust the service fee accordingly.

15.9. The service fee to be paid includes - taking into consideration the parts excluded by these Service Conditions - the costs for all spare parts unless a pro rata deductible is stipulated in this Contract.

15.10. The supply of spare parts in accordance with these Service Conditions shall be excluded if:
a) the defective and/or not fully functional parts were damaged due to negligent or wilful acts by the Principal or its employees or due to such acts committed by a third party; b) the defect or the impaired functionality of parts is due to improper maintenance, repair, and cleaning of the equipment or to an improper exchange of spare parts by the Principal or its employees;
DocuSign Envelope ID: E00D9003-1534-4F31-B208-8FBB59BC6BB7

4.C.i
Packet Pg. 1046 Attachment: Skidata First Modification (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) SKIDATA AG © 2016 Version 3.3 Page 8
c) parts have to be exchanged due to new legal or technical standards or recommendations;
d) the Principal violates other obligations to cooperate in accordance with these Service Conditions and the General Conditions.

15.11. If a specific spare part is exchanged or ordered and such exchange or order is not covered by or violates these Service Conditions, SKIDATA shall invoice the Principal for any costs incurred.

15.12. Exchange Modalities

15.12.1. SKIDATA will render the services if a malfunction occurs during proper use of the equipment. SKIDATA informs the Principal that each SKIDATA-product is registered at SKIDATA by serial number. The warranty sticker helps to identify the warranty time. If warranty sticker is removed from the SKIDATA-product or the components, SKIDATA cannot acknowledge the warranty.

15.12.2. In order to receive the relevant spare parts after occurrence of a malfunction, the Principal must send the defective components in adequate packaging and at its own risk and expense to SKIDATA, to the return address stipulated for this purpose in this Contract. A description of the malfunction must be included. SKIDATA will use its best efforts to repair the components and send them back to the Principal within the agreed time days upon receipt. In case a repair of the components is not possible, SKIDATA will send another spare part to the Principal within a reasonable period of time.

15.12.3. Unless otherwise agreed upon the spare parts will be installed by the Principal or its employees at the Principal’s risk and expense.

15.13. Replacement in Advance

15.13.1. These provisions shall apply in addition to the previous provisions concerning the exchange modalities. In case of any conflict between these provisions and the previous provisions, these provisions shall prevail.

15.13.2. If replacement in Advance is agreed upon with the option Replacement in Advance, the spare parts will be shipped upon a written order via fax, email or letter before the receipt of the de-installed part.

15.13.3. The ordered spare parts will be shipped within 3 (three) workdays after receipt of the order if they are in stock, otherwise they will be shipped within a reasonable period of time.

SKIDATA’s usual business hours shall be decisive for the point in time the order shall be deemed as received.

15.13.4. Within a period of 10 (ten) days upon receipt of the spare parts, the spare parts delivered to the Principal must be exchanged, and the de-installed spare parts (or, if the exchange is not effected, the unused spare parts) must be sent back to SKIDATA at the Principal’s risk and expense with an accompanying description of the malfunction. If the Principal fails to send back the parts or if the Principal does not send back the parts in time, SKIDATA will invoice the Principal for the spare parts in accordance with the current price list.

In such case, SKIDATA’s conditions for the purchase of hardware shall apply.

15.14. Shipment and Packaging

15.14.1. Spare parts will be shipped and parts will be sent back vial mail at the expense of the person effecting the shipment. If SKIDATA employees effect the installation of the spare parts SKIDATA shall be free to deliver the spare parts in connection with such installation.

15.14.2. Upon the Principal’s written request and in urgent cases, spare parts can also be shipped via rail express or courier service. Any additional costs incurring thereby shall be borne by the Principal.

15.14.3. The shipment of spare parts by SKIDATA and the return shipment of exchanged or unused parts by the Principal shall be effected in original packaging or at least in adequate packaging. In particular, the packaging must be tear-proof and shockproof, and anti-static bags and/or hard foam pieces must be used. Shipping notes and a detailed description of the malfunctions incurred must be included.

15.15. Spare Parts flat

15.15.1. The service Spare Parts flats includes the reparation or the replacement of defective parts. This does not apply when the defect is caused by vandalism, malicious and violent influence or accident.

DocuSign Envelope ID: E00D9003-1534-4F31-B208-8FBB59BC6BB7

4.C.i
Packet Pg. 1047 Attachment: Skidata First Modification (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) SKIDATA AG © 2016 Version 3.3 Page 9

15.15.2. This service requires a maintenance Agreement between Principal and SKIDATA or SKIDATA Partner, if any, and the usage of SKIDATA original tickets and cleaning materials.

16. Anti Virus

16.1. The option ‘Anti Virus’ defines the support and usage of the Anti-Virus Software provided by McAfee (“Anti-Virus Software”).

16.2. End User License Agreement
The McAfee End User License Agreement (the "EULA") for the Anti-Virus Software is binding on the Principal. The Principal is therefore obliged to observe the EULA, which is changed from time to time by McAfee.

16.3. Warranty

16.3.1. SKIDATA only warrants the Anti-Virus Software to the same extent that McAfee warrants. SKIDATA shall not be liable for errors or malfunctions of the Anti-Virus Software resulting from misuse, incorrect installation, mishandling, negligence or accident. SKIDATA does not warrant to the Principal that the Anti-Virus Software protects against all existing security threats (e.g. due to intentional third party damage). Furthermore, SKIDATA does not guarantee that, despite the installation of the Anti-Virus Software, no functional errors can occur due to viruses, computer worms or other malicious code.

16.3.2. If the Principal detects malfunctions or errors of the Anti-Virus Software, he has to inform SKIDATA immediately in writing. Within the framework of the warranty, SKIDATA will make commercially reasonable efforts to correct or have corrected these errors and faults as quickly as possible. However, SKIDATA makes no guarantee that all malfunctions and errors will be remedied.

16.3.3. Use in a High-Risk Environment
The Anti-Virus Software has not been designed for use in a high-risk environment. The use of the Anti-Virus Software in a high-risk environment is therefore at the Principals own risk.

Furthermore, SKIDATA disclaims any warranty for use in a high-risk environment. The Principal waives against SKIDATA and McAfee any claims regarding the use of the anti-virus software in a high-risk environment.

16.4. Limitation of Liability

16.4.1. SKIDATA is only liable for the Anti-Virus Software insofar as McAfee is liable. SKIDATA shall in no event be liable for any indirect or consequential damages, loss of profit, loss of use, loss or damage of data or suspension of business activities, even if SKIDATA has been informed of the possibility of such damages. SKIDATA shall not be liable for statements or guarantees made by the Principal to third parties.

16.4.2. SKIDATA's total liability is limited to the sum of the payments made in the scope of the SKIDATA.Care Pack to SKIDATA within the last 6 (six) months before the claim is made, irrespective of whether it is a contractual or a tortious claim.

16.5. Data Protection

16.5.1. SKIDATA and McAfee are entitled to process and forward personal and technical data of the Principal, as far as this is necessary for the processing of the contract, for billing purposes and for the provision of the contractually agreed software functionalities, support and services as well as updates. SKIDATA and McAfee are entitled to forward such data to affiliates or third parties charged with processing of data from SKIDATA or McAfee, as far as this is necessary for the provision of services.

16.5.2. With using the Anti-Virus Software, the Principal explicitly agrees to the McAfee Privacy Policy. This can be downloaded at the official McAfee website.

16.6. Indemnification
If the Anti-Virus Software violates copyrights, trademark rights or patents of third parties, SKIDATA will make every effort to ensure that McAfee indemnifies the Principal against this.

DocuSign Envelope ID: E00D9003-1534-4F31-B208-8FBB59BC6BB7

4.C.i
Packet Pg. 1048 Attachment: Skidata First Modification (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) SKIDATA AG © 2016 Version 3.3 Page 10
This shall, however, only be conditional on the Principal having informed SKIDATA without undue delay about the violation of the rights of third parties.

The Principal undertakes to indemnify SKIDATA and/or McAfee from any claims of third parties which the Principal is responsible for.

16.7. End-of-Life Process and Supported Versions
The end-of-life process of the Anti-Virus Software is defined by McAfee. SKIDATA reserves the right to transmit these specifications to the Principal one-to-one and the Principal agrees to be bound by these specifications.

17. Installation of software and hardware upgrades

17.1. The option ‘Upgrade’ defines SKIDATA’s services in regards to the installation of upgrades to SKIDATA’s software and hardware. For the purposes of these provisions, upgrade means the transition from one major release to the subsequent one. It usually contains some major new features as well as basic enhancements that extend the functionality of software or hardware.”.

17.2. To ensure proper operation of Principal’s system, SKIDATA will review and test upgrades carefully prior to installation. After installation, SKIDATA will ensure that Principal’s system is in good condition before it is put into operation.

17.3. Software upgrades are delivered or made available in electronic format. The Contract includes an upgrade only for those software functions and modules for which Principal has acquired a software license. Upgrades are installed only at the sites and devices listed in the corresponding table in the document “Service Description”.

17.4. Upgrades may alter the system requirements and it may be necessary for Principal to install the relevant previous updates, upgrades, third-party components and/or additional or modified hardware. The products and services required for this are not included in the service Contract and the respective costs shall be borne by the Principal.

17.5. Spare and wear parts required for the installation of an upgrade are not included in service Contract. The settlement of the required spare and wear parts is based on the option ‘Spare Parts’.

17.6. As of the time of discontinuation of a certain SKIDATA product, SKIDATA is no longer obliged to provide upgrades to the respective product.

18. SKIDATA cleaning material
SKIDATA indicates to use SKIDATA quality assured cleaning material, especially at coding devices. Not recommended cleaning material can lead to break downs and errors.

19. SKIDATA consumable products
SKIDATA indicates to use SKIDATA consumable products, especially certified SKIDATA short term tickets. Not recommended consumable products can lead to break downs and errors.

DocuSign Envelope ID: E00D9003-1534-4F31-B208-8FBB59BC6BB7

4.C.i
Packet Pg. 1049 Attachment: Skidata First Modification (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) Contract No. 4387 (CCS)

CONTRACTUAL SERVICES AGREEMENT
This Contractual Services Agreement ("Contract"), entered into this _j_~~- day of September, 2017 ("Execution Date"), by and between the CITY OF SANTA MONICA, a municipal corporation ("City"), and PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. ("PX"), is made with reference to the following:

RECITALS:

A. The City is a municipal corporation duly organized and validly existing under the laws of the State of California with the power to carry on its business as it is now being conducted under the_ statutes of the State of California and the Charter of the City.

B. PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) is qualified to do business, and is doing business, in the State of California. PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) represents it has the background, knowledge, experience and expertise necessary to provide the services set forth in this Contract.

C. The City and PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) desire to enter into an agreement for PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) to provide contractual services to the City as set forth herein, upon the terms and conditions set forth below.

NOW, THEREFORE, it is mutually agreed by and between the undersigned parties as follows:

TERMS AND CONDITIONS

1. Term. This Agreement begins on the Execution Date and terminates on December 31, 2017, unless sooner terminated in accordance with Section 14.

2. PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) Services. PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) will perform all of the services ("Services") described in Exhibit A, Scope of Services.

PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) will complete the Services in accordance with Exhibit B, Budget.

3. City Services. The City agrees to:

3.1 Make available to PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) any currently existing documents, data or information required for the performance of the Services.

3.2 Designate a representative authorized to act on behalf of City.

3.3 Promptly examine and render findings on all documents submitted for staff review by PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX).

4. Compensation. The City will compensate PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX for the Services performed in an amount not to exceed $20,000, as set forth in Exhibit B.

5. Invoices. PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) will invoice the City for the Services in accordance with Exhibit Band the City will pay any undisputed amount within 30 - 1 - January 2017

4.C.j
Packet Pg. 1050 Attachment: Windcave / Payment Express Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) days of receipt. All invoices must be received by the City of Santa Monica with all applicable back up documentation.

6. Notices. All notices, demands, requests or approvals to be given under this Agreement, must be in writing and will be deemed served when delivered personally, by email, or on the third business day after deposit in the United States mail, postage prepaid, registered or certified, addressed as follows:

6.1 All notices, demands, requests or approvals to the City:

Parking Operations Division
City of Santa Monica
1717 4th Street Suite 150
Santa Monica, California 90401
Attention: Henry Servin, Parking & Traffic Manager
Re: Contract No. 4387
with a copy to:

Santa Monica City Attorney's Office
1685 Main Street, Third Floor
Santa Monica, California 90401
Attention: City Attorney
Re: Contract No. 4387

6.2 All notices, demands, requests or approvals to PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX):

PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX)
8939 S. Sepulveda Blvd, Suite 520
Los Angeles, California 90045
Attention: Latanya Quince
Re: Contract No. 4387

7. Independent Parties. Both parties to this Agreement will be acting in an independent capacity and not as agents, employees, partners, or joint venturers of one another.

Neither the City nor its officers or employees will have any control over the conduct of PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) or any of PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) agents, employees, or subconsultants, except as otherwise provided in this Agreement.

8. Integrated Contract. This Agreement, including the attached Payment Express Terms and Conditions (Exhibit D), represents the full and complete understanding of every kind or nature whatsoever between the parties. Any preliminary negotiations and agreements of any kind or nature are merged into this Agreement. No oral agreement or implied covenant may be held to vary the provisions of this Agreement. This Agreement may be modified only by written agreement signed by City and PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX), and approved as to form by the City Attorney. - 2 - January 2017

4.C.j
Packet Pg. 1051 Attachment: Windcave / Payment Express Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

9. Insurance. Prior to commencing work, PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) must procure, maintain and pay for insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damage to property that may arise from or in connection with the performance of the Services by PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) or PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) agents, representatives, employees or subconsultants for the duration of this Agreement. PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) must obtain insurance that, at a minimum, meets the requirements for insurance set forth in Exhibit C, Insurance Requirements and Verifications.

10. Defense and Indemnification.

10.1 PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) agrees to defend, indemnify, protect, and hold harmless the City, its agents, officers, boards and commissions, and employees (collectively, "City") from and against any and all liability, claims, demands, damages, or costs resulting from a third party claim that PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) violated such third party's intellectual property rights.

City must promptly notify PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) of any claim or potential claim that may be made under Section 10.1 of this Agreement. If City makes a claim for indemnification under this Section 10.1 of this Agreement, PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) will have sole authority to defend and settle such claim with relation to any third party. (collectively, "Losses").

10.2 Enforcement Costs. PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) agrees to pay any and all reasonable costs the City incurs enforcing the indemnity, defense and hold harmless provisions set forth in Section 10.1, subject to the limitations on liability put forth in Exhibit D of this Agreement.

11. Prohibition against Transfers.

11.1 · PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) may assign or transfer this Agreement to an affiliated entity, parent, or successor by merger without the permission of City.

Otherwise, PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) may not assign, hypothecate, or transfer this Agreement or any interest therein directly or indirectly, by operation of law or otherwise without the prior written consent of City, such consent not to be unreasonably withheld. Any attempt to do so without the City's consent will be null and void, and any assignee, hypothecatee or transferee acquires no right or interest by reason of such attempted assignment, hypothecation or transfer.

11.2 The sale, assignment, transfer or other disposition of any of the issued and outstanding capital stock of PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX or of any general partner or joint venturer or syndicate member of PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX, if a partnership or joint venture or syndicate exists, which results in changing the control of PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX), will be construed as an assignment of this Agreement. Control means 50% or more of the voting power of the corporation.
- 3 - January 2017

4.C.j
Packet Pg. 1052 Attachment: Windcave / Payment Express Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

12. Permits and Licenses. PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX), at its sole expense, must obtain and maintain during the term of this Agreement all required business and professional permits, licenses and certificates.

13. Waiver. A waiver of any breach of this Agreement may not be deemed a waiver of any subsequent breach of the same or any other term, covenant, or condition of this Agreement.

14. Default and Termination.

14.1 If PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) fails or refuses to perform any material provisions of this Agreement, and if the default is not cured within a period of five days after the City's written notice of default specifying the nature of the default, City may terminate this Agreement by 30 days' written notice to PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX).

14.2 The City has the option, at its sole discretion and without cause, of terminating this Agreement during any Renewal Term by giving 30 days' written notice to PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX). Upon termination of this Agreement, City will pay PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) any compensation earned and unpaid up to the effective date of termination.

15. Compliance with Law. PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) must comply with all laws of the State of California and the United States, and all ordinances, rules and regulations enacted or issued by City.

16. Discrimination. PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) may not discriminate in the provision of services hereunder because of race, color, religion, national origin, ancestry, sex, age, sexual orientation, marital status, AIDS or disability.

17. Nuisance. PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) may not maintain, commit, or permit the maintenance or commission of any nuisance in connection with the performance of services under this Agreement.

18. Records.

18.1 PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) must maintain complete and accurate records with respect to costs, expenses, receipts and other such information required by the City for any services provided where compensation is on the basis of hourly rates, subconsultant costs, or other direct costs. PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) must keep the records, together with supporting documents, separate from other documents and records and maintain them for a period of three years after receipt of final payment.

18.2 PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) must maintain records in sufficient detail to permit an evaluation of the Services and in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) must clearly identify all records and make them readily accessible to the City. At the City's request, PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) must provide records in an electronic format -4-
January 2017

4.C.j
Packet Pg. 1053 Attachment: Windcave / Payment Express Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) and, if necessary, access to any proprietary software to view such electronic records.

18.3 PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) must allow the City to have reasonable access to PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) books and records and to inspect work, data, documents, proceedings and activities related to this Agreement. The City has the right to examine or audit PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) records, and PAYMENTEXPRESS, INC. (PX) agrees to cooperate with any examination or audit of its records.

19. Work Product; Reports.

19.1 This section intentionally left blank.

19.2 At the City's request, PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) must furnish reports concerning the status of the Services.

20. Standard of Care. PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) agrees to provide all Services, including services performed by any subconsultant, in a manner consistent with the level of care and skill ordinarily exercised by members of PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) profession currently practicing in the same locality under similar conditions.

21. Subconsultants.

21.1 PX may have subcontractor workers perform parts of the Services, provided such subcontractor employees are vetted per PCI DSS standards, which include a background check.

21.2 PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) will be responsible for the quality of any subconsultant's work.

22. Governing Law. The laws of the State of California, without regard to any choice of law provisions, will govern this Agreement.

23. Venue and Jurisdiction. The City and PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) agree that the Services will take place in Los Angeles County. Any litigation arising out of this Agreement may only be brought in either the United States District Court, Central District of California, or the Superior Court of California, County of Los Angeles, as appropriate. The parties agree that venue exists in either court, and each party expressly waives any right to transfer to another venue. The parties further agree that either court will have personal jurisdiction over the parties to this Agreement.

24. Survival of Provisions and Obligations. Any provision of this Agreement, which by its nature must be exercised after termination of this Agreement, will survive termination and remain effective for a reasonable time. Any obligation that accrued prior to termination of this Agreement will survive termination of this Agreement. -5-
January 2017

4.C.j
Packet Pg. 1054 Attachment: Windcave / Payment Express Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

25. Exhibits. The following exhibits are incorporated by reference into this Contract as though fully set forth herein. In the event of any conflict between Exhibit D and another agreement document, Exhibit D will control.

Scope of Services
Budget
Insurance Requirements
Exhibit A
Exhibit B
Exhibit C
Exhibit D Payment Express Terms and Conditions
In witness whereof, the parties have caused this Agreement to be executed the day and year first above written.

ATTEST:
~;v1r111tllltn u~

DENISE ANDERSON-WARREN
City Clerk
APPROVED AS TO FORM:

LANE DILG
City Attorney
-6-

CITY OF SANTA MONICA,
City Manager
PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) By: r ~
Name: {J,t.1;t1r/ /_,,.,,;./p;J
Title: Gc;:rvt~1:'::::: {4V"".:$f; <.....,
January 2017

4.C.j
Packet Pg. 1055 Attachment: Windcave / Payment Express Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) Exhibit A
Scope of Services
A. Payment Express offers an attended and unattended solutions to provide PCI grade security for merchants accepting physical cards and NFC payments at self service outlets like Parking Payment Terminals. Our gateway authorizes payments and encrypt sensitive information, such as credit card numbers, to ensure that information passes securely between the customer and the merchant
B. PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. ("PX") will be the gate way provider for all credit card transactions that emanate for the City of Santa Monica Parking and Revenue Control System (SKIDATA) for the following Parking Facilities:
i. Parking Structure 1-9
ii. Ken Edwards Parking Structure
iii. Civic Lot and Civic Structure Parking Facilities
iv. Pier Deck Parking Lot
v. Main Library Parking Structure
For the New SKIDATA Implementation taking card payments requires 3 parties:

The SKIDATA Parking Logic, Point of Sale software, which is integrated with PX equipment and security software and tells PX gateway what to charge.

The payment gateway (Payment Express): Is a level 1 PCI compliant payment gateway. All of the customer credit card information is on our gateway and fully encrypted. Payment Express is responsible for securely processing a customer's card transaction. Payment Express will send it on to the City of Santa Monica preferred merchant provider or banking institution. The credit card authorization information is sent with each transaction record.

The acquiring bank: Responsible for settling the processed transactions into your chosen business bank account(s). Payment Express will nee~ a Merchant ID from an acquiring bank. PX usually request 2-3 business days to test and activate the account.

Summary of Benefits;
• End to end encryption of all data (EMV).
• Reduces Merchant from PCI scope.
• No single point of failure and almost unlimited layers of redundancy including EOV which enables payments to be taken offline. If the internet is down instead of opening the gate and letting cars just leave without processing payment, you will still have limited capability to process payments, when service is restored the files are then uploaded. The amount and size of transactions may be determined by the processing bank, and we can configure our terminals accordingly.
• Designed to combat skimming attacks

4.C.j
Packet Pg. 1056 Attachment: Windcave / Payment Express Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) • Rapid transaction processing time
• Payment Express has its own configurable EMV kernel ensuring EMV upgrades are able to be achieved easily with a very low cost.
• Software updates and new features are deployed remotely, removing cost and lead time for an onsite technician. This will become more important moving forward as Banks issues a range of Chip cards.

Service access package covers terminal management, support, software updates (delivered over the net), bug fixes, compliance updates, and enhancements, etc. - 8 - January 2017

4.C.j
Packet Pg. 1057 Attachment: Windcave / Payment Express Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) Fees
Exhibit B
Budget
A. Establishment Fee: $100
B. Monthly Fee: plus applicable tax per calendar month:
a. August 1·31, 2017: $2,500
b. September 1-30, 2017: $2,500
c. October 1-31, 2017:$2,500
d. November 1-30, 2017: $3,000
e. December 1-31, 2017: $3,000
C. Additional Fees: Additional users to the payment manager can be set up, but will incur a one-time fee of $30.00 plus tax. If PX needs to configure or change additional electronic merchant number on the Payment Express Host, there is a fee of $100.00 plus tax per merchant account. In addition. $5.00 per calendar month per connected card reader for SCR200 and IPP350 devices
D. Optional Risk Management Fees
a. Implementation of 1 to 5 applied rules will be charged at $100.00 plus applicable taxes per calendar month.
b. Implementation of 6 to 10 applied rules will be charged at $17 5.00 plus applicable taxes per calendar month.

E. Development Fee (if requested by Customer): $125.00 plus applicable tax per hour per person for testing and $17 5.00 plus applicable tax per hour per person for a senior developer.

F. Total fees shall not exceed $20,000.

Payment Terms
• See section 5
-9-
January 2017

4.C.j
Packet Pg. 1058 Attachment: Windcave / Payment Express Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) ExhibitC
Insurance Requirements
Contractual Services Agreement Insurance Requirements and Verifications Contractor shall procure and maintain for the duration of the Agreement insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damages to property that may arise from or in connection with the performance of the work hereunder by the Contractor, its agents, representatives, employees or subcontractors.

Minimum Scope and Limits of Insurance
Coverage shall be at least as broad as:

1. Commercial General Liability (CGL): Insurance Services Office Form CG 00 01 covering CGL on an "occurrence" basis, including products and completed operations, property damage, bodily injury and personal and advertising injury, with limits of no less than $1,000,000 per occurrence.

If a general aggregate limit applies, either the general aggregate limit shall apply separately to this project/location or the general aggregate limit shall be twice the required occurrence limit.

2. Automobile Liability: Insurance Services Office Form CA 00 01 covering Code 1 (any auto), or if Contractor has no owned autos, Code 8 (hired) and Code 9 (non-owned), with limits of no less than $1,000,000 per accident for bodily injury and property damage.

3. Workers' Compensation: Workers' Compensation insurance as required by the State of California, with Statutory Limits and Employers' Liability Insurance with limits of no less than $1,000,000 per accident for bodily injury or disease (see footnote #1).

4. Cyber Liability Insurance, with limits not less than 1,000,000 per occurrence or claim, $2,000,000 aggregate. Coverage shall be sufficiently broad to respond to the duties and obligations as is undertaken by Vendor in this a~eement and shall include, but not be limited to invasion of privacy violations, information theft, damage to or destruction of electronic information, release of private information, alteration of electronic information, extortion and network security. The policy shall provide coverage for breach response costs as well as regulatory fines and penalties as well as credit monitoring expenses with limits sufficient to respond to these obligations.

If the Contractor maintains higher limits than the minimums shown above, the City of Santa Monica requires and shall be entitled to coverage for the higher limits maintained by the Contractor. Any available insurance proceeds in excess of the specified minimum limits of insurance and coverage shall be available to the City of Santa Monica.

Other Insurance Provisions

1. The insurance policies are to contain, or be endorsed to contain, the following provisions:
a. Additional Insured Status (CGL): The City of Santa Monica, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers are to be covered as additional insureds on the CGL policy with respect to liability arising out of work or operations performed by or on behalf of Contractor including - 10 - January 2017

4.C.j
Packet Pg. 1059 Attachment: Windcave / Payment Express Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) materials, parts or equipment furnished in connection with such work or operations. General liability coverage can be provided in the form of an endorsement to the Contractor's insurance at least as broad as Insurance Services Office Form CG 20 10 11 85. b. Primary Coverage (CGL and Auto): For any claims related to this Agreement, the Contractor's insurance shall be primary as respects the City of Santa Monica, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers. Any insurance or self-insurance maintained by the City of Santa Monica, its officers, officials, employees or volunteers shall be in excess of the Contractor's insurance and shall not contribute with it. c. Notice of Cancellation (all policies): Each insurance policy required herein shall state that coverage shall not be cancelled except after notice has been given to the City of Santa Monica. d. Waiver of Subrogation (all policies): Contractor hereby grants to the City of Santa Monica a waiver of any right of subrogation which any insurer of said Contractor may acquire against the City of Santa Monica by virtue of payment of any loss. Contractor agrees to obtain any endorsement that may be necessary to affect this waiver of subrogation, but this provision applies regardless of whether or not the City of Santa Monica has received a waiver of subrogation endorsement from the insurer.

The Workers' Compensation policy shall be endorsed with a waiver of subrogation in favor of the City of Santa Monica for all work performed by the Contractor, its employees, agents and subcontractors.

Deductibles and Self-Insured Retentions
Any deductibles or self-insured retentions must be declared to and approved by the City of Santa Monica. The City of Santa Monica may require the Contractor to purchase coverage with a lower deductible or retention or provide satisfactory proof of ability to pay losses and related investigations, claim administration, and defense expenses within the retention.

Acceptability of Insurers
Insurance is to be placed with insurers with a current a current A.M. Best rating of no less than A:VII, unless otherwise acceptable to the City of Santa Monica.

Verification of Coverage
Contractor shall furnish the City of Santa Monica with original certificates and amendatory endorsements or copies of the applicable policy language providing the insurance coverage required herein. All certificates and endorsements are to be received and approved by the City of Santa Monica before work commences. However, failure to obtain required documents prior to the work beginning shall not waive the Contractor's obligation to provide them. The City of Santa Monica reserves the right to require complete, certified copies of all required insurance policies, including the endorsements required herein, at any time.

4.C.j
Packet Pg. 1060 Attachment: Windcave / Payment Express Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) its sole option, may terminate this Agreement and obtain damages from the Contractor resulting from said breach. Alternatively, the City of Santa Monica may purchase such coverage (but has no special obligation to do so), and without further notice to the Contractor, the City may deduct from sums due to the Contractor any premium costs advanced by the City for such insurance.

Subcontractors
Contractor shall require and verify that all subcontractors maintain insurance meeting all the requirements stated herein. All exceptions must be approved in writing by the Risk Manager.

Footnotes
# 1: Workers' Compensation insurance coverage is not required if the Contractor does not have employees. The Contractor must, however, execute the City's Workers' Compensation Coverage Exemption Declaration Form.
- 12 - January 2017

4.C.j
Packet Pg. 1061 Attachment: Windcave / Payment Express Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) ExhibitD
Payment Express Terms and Conditions - 13 - January 2017

4.C.j
Packet Pg. 1062 Attachment: Windcave / Payment Express Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

1. Definitions and Interpretation (Not all defined terms are applicable to all goods and services provided under the Agreement)

1.1 Definitions: In this Agreement, unless the context indicates otherwise:

Acquirer means a bank or any financial institution or a card issuer of financial or non-financial transactions which receives and transmits Transactions via Payment Express;
Agreement means this Agreement, including the Application Form, each of Part A and its Schedule(s) and Part B, and any attachments that may be agreed between the parties, as each may be amended in writing from time to time. For the avoidance of doubt, this Agreement is a fully incorporated part of the Contractual Services Agreement between the City of Santa Monica, a municipal corporation, and Payment Express Inc., a California corporation, and is incorporated therein as Exhibit D of the aforementioned Contractual Services Agreement; Application Form means Customer's on line Payment Express application form submitted to PX via the PX Website. Where no separate Part A is entered into, the Application Form will constitute Part A of this Agreement for the purposes of this Part B; Business Day means any day of the week except Saturday, Sunday or a day on which banks are authorized or required to be closed in California;
Chargeback means the procedure by which a sales record or other indicia of a card transaction (or disputed portion thereof) is denied or returned to Bank or the card issuer after It was entered into the appropriate settlement network for payment, in accordance with the rules of Visa, MasterCard or a similar card association ("Rules'), for failing to comply with the Rules, including, without limitation by reason of card holder disputes, the liability for which is Customer's responsibility and Customer agrees to pay.

Commencement Date means the commencement date recorded in Part A in one or more Schedules; Such Commencement Date may be postponed in writing, at PX's sole discretion, until the date PX receives a copy of the Agreement countersigned by Customer.

Confidential Information means, in relation to either party, any information:
(a) relating to the terms of this Agreement;
(b) relating directly or indirectly to research-or development by, accounting for, or the marketing of, the business of that party or its suppliers or customers;
(c) disclosed by that party to the other party on the express basis that such information is confidential; or (b) which might reasonably be expected by the other party to be confidential in nature; Customer means the customer specified in this Agreement and where applicable includes its employees, contractors and agents.

Default Interest Rate means interest at the rate of 2% above the base lending rate charged by PX's bankers to PX from time to time; Delivery takes place when the Customer receives the Goods from PX, or, in the case of returns, when the Goods arrive at PX's premises; Documentation means any user, training or system manuals for Payment Express (whether in printed or electronic form) which describes and provides guidance on the use of Payment Express (or any aspect of Payment Express); Emergency Support Services means telephone support that PX may provide (but is not obligated to provide unless it agrees to do so in a separate written agreement) for emergency breakdowns resulting in repeated failures in the transmission of Transactions and is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week by calling 310 670 7299 outside of Support Hours. If applicable, PX will use reasonable efforts to respond to any emergency phone call within 30 minutes of receiving the support request; Fees means and includes each of the fees detailed in the Schedule(s) contained in Part A; Goods means the Goods and/or Devices (if any) recorded in Part A in one or more Schedules; Intellectual Property means registered and unregistered trade marks (including logos and trade files), domain names, copyright, patents, petty patents, utility models, registered and unregistered designs, circuit layouts, rights in computer software, databases and lists, Confidential Information, software (whether in object code or source code), and all other rights anywhere in the world resulting from intellectual activity; Payment Express means the Payment Express solution provided by PX for the transmission of data relating to Payment Express Supported Transactions between a Customer and an Acquirer, incorporating the Software and including access (via the internet) to the Payment Express Host and the Support Services;
Payment Express Host means the PX host server known as Payment Express Host to which Customer may be connected using the Software and which is in tum linked to an Acquirer to enable Payment Express Supported Transactions to be processed in real time; Payment Express Supported Transactions means transactions from Customers:
(a) accepting. payment for goods and services by means of credit card, debit card, prepaid card, gift card or any other means of payment which PX agrees to support through Payment Express from time to time; (b) accepting loyalty cards, rewards cards, points cards, discount cards or club cards; or (c) providing services in relation to the sale and use of any of the cards referred to in paragraphs (a) and (b) above including the issue of such cards and the crediting or debiting of value to such cards; Payment Manager means Payment Express Merchant Portal which Customer is able to access by logging onto the PX Website with an assigned usemame and password;
PCI Standards means the Payment Card Industry standards, requirements and guidelines issued by the Payment Card Industry Data Security Council from time to time including the Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard PIN Entry Device requirements and guidelines, and the Payment Application Data Security Standard;
Permitted Use means the transmission to, and receipt from, an Acquirer of data relating to Payment Express Supported Transactions and expressly excludes, without limitation, use for the processing of transactions of, or for the benefit of, any person other than Customer; PX means Payment Express, Inc., a California corporation with offices in Los Angeles, California; PX Logo.means the PX logo supplied (in electronic format) by PX to Customer (as may be updated from time to time by PX); PX Website means the website maintained by PX and accessible by Customer for viewing transactions, data entry, refunding, report generating and other features related to Transactions;
Security Standards means each of:
(a) any data protection or data security standards issued by an Acquirer which receives and accepts Payment Express Supported Transactions from Customer; and
(b) the PCI Standards;
Special Conditions means the special conditions (if any) recorded in Part A in one or more Schedules; Software means the software and other related PX products which:
• form part of Payment Express; and

4.C.j
Packet Pg. 1063 Attachment: Windcave / Payment Express Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) • is owned or licensed by or developed by, or on behalf of, PX and supplied to Customer, including all upgrades, updates, alterations and modifications and other changes to such software by or on behalf of PX from time to time, but excluding any third party software and firmware forming part of, or supplied with, the Payment Express solution; Support Services means and includes:
(a) Online Help: from time to time PX may display Frequently Asked Questions and Answers on the PX Website; (b) General Support: enquiries may be sent to: [email protected] or made by telephone to 310 670 7299. PX will respond to such enquiries during Support Hours;
Support Hours means the period from 8am to 9pm (PST) on any Business Day and 9am to 5pm (PST) on non-Business Days; Term means the Initial Term recorded in Part A in one or more Schedules and includes any Renewal Terms as recorded in Part A in one or more Schedules and defined in clause 2;
Transaction means a message pair consisting of a message relating to a Payment Express Supported Transaction transmitted by Customer to an Acquirer through Payment Express and a response to that message from the Acquirer to Customer through Payment Express; Tokenized Data means data for which PX has substituted a sensitive data element.with a non-sensitive equivalent that has no extrinsic or exploitable meaning or value.

1.2 Interpretation: In this Agreement, unless the context indicates otherwise:
(a) the singular includes the plural and vice versa;
(b) clause and other headings are for ease of reference only and will not affect this Agreement's interpretation; (c) the term Includes or including (or any similar expression) is deemed to be fallowed by the words without limitation; (d) references to a person include an individual, company, corporation, partnership, firm, joint venture, association, trust, unincorporated body of persons, governmental or other regulatory body, authority or entity, in each case whether or not having a separate legal identity;
(e) any obligation not to do anything includes an obligation not to suffer, permit or cause that thing to be done; and (0 all monetary amounts are stated exclusive of applicable taxes if any and in US dollars (g) in the event of any inconsistency between the terms of any of the following, they will have precedence in the descending order of priority set out below:

2. Term
(i) Part A-Specific Terms and Schedules;
(ii) Part B- General Terms and Conditions;
(iii) The Application Form.

2.1 Section left intentionally blank.

3. Payment

3.1 Fees: Section left intentionally blank.

3.2 Taxes: Customer is responsible for all applicable taxes, duties and levies on the rental, loan or purchase or sale of goods and services (other than PX's income tax) assessed in connection with its use of Payment Express and the provision of services under this Agreement.

To the extent that any Fees paid by Customer under this Agreement exclude any taxes or duties payable in respect of the Goods or Services provided under this Agreement in the jurisdiction where the payment is either made or received, where any such taxes or duties are payable by PX, Customer agrees to pay to PX the amount of such taxes or duties in addition to any Fees owed under this Agreement.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, you may have obtained an exemption from relevant taxes or duties as of the time such taxes or duties are levied or assessed. In that case, you will have the right to provide to PX with evidence of any such exemption inflirmation, in which case PX will use reasonable efforts to provide such invoicing documents as may enable you to obtain a refund or credit for the amount so paid from any relevant revenue authority if such a refund or credit is available.

3.3 Default Interest for Late Payment: Subject to Part B, clause 3.4(c)(ii), Customer must pay PX interest at the Default Interest Rate on any overdue amounts under this Agreement that are undisputed, calculated daily from the due date until the actual date of payment.

Customer will pay PX all costs and reasonable attorney's fees that PX incurs in attempting to recover or recovering any such overdue amounts, whether or not suit is filed.

3.4 Disputed Invoices: Where Customer has reasonable grounds to dispute any portion of any amount invoiced by PX to Customer under this Agreement (disputed portion):
(a) Customer will notify PX of such dispute and the grounds for such dispute within 14 Business Days of receiving the invoice; (b) any undisputed portion of the invoice will remain payable on the due date for payment; (c) provided that Customer has complied with clause 3.4(a), Customer will not be required to pay:
(i) the disputed portion until the parties' dispute has been resolved by agreement between the parties or in accordance with Part B, clause 19.2; or
(ii) any interest under clause 3.3 on the disputed portion unless the dispute is resolved with the effect that Customer is required to pay all (or part) of the disputed portion, in which case Customer will pay the interest on the disputed portion (or that part of that disputed portion) in accordance with clause 3.3. Interest will be payable from the date that payment would have been due under clause 3.1 but for the dispute until the date that disputed portion is paid to PX in full.

4. Mutual Responsibilities
Each party represents and agrees:

4.1 Power and Authority: that ii has full power and authority necessary to validly enter into and perform all its obligations under this Agreement; and

4.2 Requirements: to comply with the other party's reasonable security, confidentiality and operational requirements of which It has been given reasonable notice. ·

5. Customer Responsibilities
Customer represents and agrees that it

5.1 Suitability: has made, and will continue to make, its own assessment of the suitability, adequacy, compatibility and appropriateness of Payment Express for its purposes;

5.2 Comply with Instructions: will comply with PX's restrictions, instructions and Documentation in relation to the use of Payment Express, including those set out in this Agreement;

4.C.j
Packet Pg. 1064 Attachment: Windcave / Payment Express Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

5.3 Use by Others: will ensure that only authorized persons use Payment Express and that Payment Express is used only for the Permitted Use and as expressly authorized under this Agreement;

5.4 Responsibility for Use: will accept all responsibility for the reliance on and use of Payment Express by Customer and its employees, contractors and agents;

5.5 Obtain Equipment etc.: will obtain and maintain all equipment, software and services needed to enable it to receive and use Payment Express;

5.6 Accurate Customer Information: warrants that all information provided by Customer to PX in the Application Form is accurate and correct, and that Customer will notify PX in writing if such information changes or ceases to be accurate in any way;

5.7 Provide Sufficient Information: will ensure that sufficient information is given to PX to enable PX to comply with its obligations under this Agreement and that such information is timely, complete and accurate;

5.8 Personal Information: acknowledges that any personal information concerning Customer or its personnel which is provided to PX by or on behalf of Customer may be:
(a) used by PX for the purpose of providing Payment Express, the Support Services and any other services to Customer; and (b) disclosed by PX to its affiliates and other services providers to enable PX to provide Payment Express, the Support Services and any other services to Customer;

5.9 Notify of Third Party Infringement: will immediately notify PX upon becoming aware of any third party infringing PX's Intellectual Property rights in any manner; ·

5.10 Responsible for Connecting to Payment Express Host: is responsible for all charges and costs associated with connecting to the Payment Express Host to operate Payment Express. PX will provide Customer with reasonable technical information and Software necessary to enable Customer to connect to the Payment Express Host;

5.11 Requisite Review of Payline Portal: will review Customer's payline portal, established by PX, with due care on a daily basis for transaction errors. If an error is discovered by Customer, Customer will notify PX in writing within fourteen (14) Business Days of the date such error occurs; provided that PX will have no liability or obligations of any kind with respect to errors that are not reported to PX within fourteen (14) Business Days. period. In addition, Customer shall be required to review with due care its bank settlement files on a daily basis to ensure deposits occur without error. If an error is discovered by Customer in the course of such review, Customer will notify PX in writing within fourteen (14) Business Days of the dale of such error occurring; provided that PX will have no liability or obligations of any kind with respect to errors that are not reported to PX within fourteen (14) Business Days. PX's liability under this Section 5.11 (Requisite Review of Payline Portal) of the Agreement is governed by, and fully subject to, the terms of Section 10 of this Agreement.

5.12 Comply with Law Generally: will comply with all relevant laws in its use of Payment Express and carrying out its obligations under this Agreement.

5.13 Improperly Deposited Funds: will return funds that PX deposits in Customer's bank account(s) that do not rightfully belong to Customer ("Improperly Deposited Funds') without offset or delay. Customer will return all Improperly Deposited Funds to PX within thirty (30) calendar days of a written request to do so by PX. If Customer fails to comply with the terms of this Section, PX may immediately suspend services to Customer until Customer returns the lmproper1y Deposited Funds. Customer will be liable to PX for the Improperly Deposited Funds, and all costs (including legal costs on an attorney-client basis) incurred by PX in recovering th~lmproper1y Deposited Funds.

6. PX's General Responsibilities
PX agrees that it will:

6.1 Care and skill: Per section 20 of the Agreement beiween the Parties; and

6.2 Good faith: comply with all relevant laws and co-operate with Customer (and Customer's service providers) in connection with Payment Express.

6.3 No Requirement to Decrypt Tokenized Data: Unless expressly required to do so by law, PX will be under no obligation to decrypt and transmit Tokenized Data to Customer or any third party.

7. PX Warranties

7.1 Security Standards: PX confirms that PX will throughout the term of this Agreement comply with the requirements of the Security Standards.

7.2 Limitations on Warranties: To the fullest extent permitted by law, except as expressly set out in this Agreement, PX disclaims and excludes all warranties, conditions, terms, representations or undertakings, whether express, implied, statutory or otherwise, including any condition or warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. PX does not warrant that:
(a) Payment Express, the Goods, the Software or the Documentation will meet Customer's requirements; or (b) Payment Express the Goods, the Software and the Documentation will be uninterrupted or error free, or that all errors will be corrected; or
(c) that the Goods will be free of defects in design, materials or workmanship or will comply with any applicable equipment manufacturer's or software developer's specifications.

Customer understands and acknowledges that an authorization obtained through Payment Express only confirms the availability of the cardholder's credit at the time of the authorization. It does not warrant that the person presenting the card is the rightful cardholder, nor is It an unconditional promise, guarantee or representation by Bank, processor or PX that a transaction is or will be deemed valid and not subject to dispute, debit or chargeback. PX understands and acknowledges that nothing in this Exhibit D shall be interpreted to require Customer to pay for services that do not strictly satisfy the representations, requirements and benefits set forth in the Scope of Services (Exhibit A).

7.3 Supply Warranty: PX warrants that the Goods to be deliv.ered under this Agreement will be free from defects in workmanship (labour and parts included, but transport excluded) during a warranty period commencing on the Commencement Date and conduding twelve (12) calendar months later. As to repaired or exchanged Goods, during the original warranty period here above mentioned, the warranty period on the exchanged or repaired Goods shall expire three (3) months after the date of repair or exchange of such Goods or upon the expiration of the warranty period applicable to the original Goods set forth in this Section. With respect to PX's supply warranty:
(a) Any defective Goods, under warranty, shall be replaced or repaired, free of charge, at PX's discretion (to the exdusion of compensation for any other damage), and the work shall be carried out at PX or its partner's or subcontractor's premises. Customer will pay the costs of transport of the Goods (including insurance) to PX. (b) PX has the choice to repair the Goods with spare parts or new parts. The defective elements, repaired, will become the property of PX.

4.C.j
Packet Pg. 1065 Attachment: Windcave / Payment Express Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) (c) The lime when the Goods are repaired or unavailable during the warranty period will not give rise to an extension of the warranty period as set forth in this Section, subject to legal mandatory provisions. 7 .4 Exclusions to Supply Warranty: PX will have no liability under the Supply Warranty described in Section 7 .3 in respect of:
(a) Defects, breakdowns, or malfunctions due to failure to properly follow the installation process and instructions for use or an external cause to the Goods (including, but not limited to, shock, lightning fire, vandalism, malicious action, contacts with various liquids or vermin or water damage of any nature, and inappropriate electric voltage); or modifications to the Goods made without the written approval of PX; or a lack of every day maintenance (as described in the Documentation); or a lack of supervision or care; or improper storage or poor environmental conditions, particularly those related to temperature and hygrometry effects of variations of electric voltage from the electric network; or from the earth or repair work; or maintenance of the Goods by persons not authorized by PX;
(b) Damage due to insufficient or bad packaging of the Goods when returned to PX; (c) Wear and tear from normal use of the Goods and accessories; (d) Communication problems related to an unsuitable environment including problems accessing the Internet, transmission faults, local network faults, and modification of the parameters of the relevant cellular network after sale of the Goods. (e) Supply of new versions of Software; ·· (n Malfunction due to the use of products or accessories that are noncompatible with the Goods; (g) Goods returned to PX without PX's prior consent.

8. Intellectual Property

8.1 All Intellectual Property rights in Payment Express, the Goods, the Software, the Documentation and any work or thing developed or created by or on behalf of PX under or in connection with this Agreement (such work or thing being Developed Works), are exclusively owned by PX (or PX's licensors or suppliers). Customer acknowledges that there is no transfer of title, Intellectual Property rights or ownership of:
(a) Payment Express, the Goods, the Software, and the Documentation or any part thereof; or (b) any Developed Works; to Customer under this Agreement and Customer will not dispute PX's (or PX's licensors or suppliers) ownership of the property referred to in this clause 8.

9. Indemnity
This section left intentionally blank.

10. Liability
To the fullest extent permitted by applicable law:

10.1 Remedy: Subject to clauses 10 .2 and 10.3, Custome(s sole and exclusive remedy for breach of any warranty or of any of PX's obligations under this Agreement is (at PX's option) the supply or re-supply of Payment Express, the Goods, the Software, or the Documentation or the refund or waiver of Fees for the relevant part of Payment Express the Goods, the Software, or the Documentation which is the subject matter of, or directly related to, the breach.

10.2 Limitation: In no event will PX's total liability to Customer under this Agreement for any one or more defaults as described in clause 10.1 exceed the amount paid by Customer to PX under this Agreement in the 3 months following execution of this Agreement.

10.3 Exclusion: In no event shall Customer and PX be liable to each other whether in contract, tort (including negligence) or otherwise in respect of any: ·
(a) punitive, incidental, indirect or consequential damages, damages for loss of profits, business interruption, loss of data, loss of goodwill, arising out of, or in connection with, this Agreement, in each case even if such party has been advised of the possibility of such damages; ·
(b) loss, damage, cost or expense suffered or incurred by Customer or PX, to the extent this results from any act or omission by Customer or PX; or
(c) any event described in Part B, clause 14 (Force Majeure). (d) Notwithstanding the terms of this Clause 10.3, nothing herein shall be deemed as a limitation of rights or remedies regarding Customer's liability for violations of PX's Intellectual Property Rights or rights to its Confidential Information.

11. Commercial Purpose
It is expressly acknowledged and agreed by Customer that Payment Express, the Goods, the Software and the Documentation are supplied to Customer for business and commercial purposes ..

12. Termination

12.1 Termination Upon Notice:
(a) PX may terminate this Agreement at any time on not less than 3 months' prior written notice to Customer.

12.2 Termination for Cause: Either party (the First Party) may terminate this Agreement at any time and with immediate effect by written notice to the other party (Second Party) if the Second Party:
(a) is in material breach of any of its obligations under this Agreement, and has failed to remedy the breach within 5 Business Days excluding Customer's -public adopted holidays of receiving written notice from the First Party to remedy the breach; or (b) goes into voluntary or involuntary bankruptcy or liquidation or has a receiver appointed; or (c) is unable to pay its debts as they fall due.

12.3 Breach of License Terms: Without limiting clause 12.2, any use of Payment Express, the Goods, the Software, or the Documentation by Customer for any purpose other than the Permitted Use, or any breach by Customer of the provisions of Part B, clause 16 will be deemed to be a material breach of this Agreement which is not reasonably capable of remedy.

12.4 Consequences: ·
(a) Amounts owing at termination: If this Agreement is terminated by PX for cause prior to the expiry of the Term, Customer must pay the unpaid balance of the Fees due under this Agreement and the cost of PX's reasonable expenses resulting from Customer's breach of this Agreement.

4.C.j
Packet Pg. 1066 Attachment: Windcave / Payment Express Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) (b) Expiry or termination of this Agreement will not affect the rights or obligations of the parties which have accrued prior to or accrue on termination or which by their nature are intended to survive termination (including Part B, clauses 3, 5(h), 7, 8, 9, 10, this 12.4, 13, 16, 17 and 19, together with those clauses which are incidental to, and required in order to give effect to, those clauses).

13. Confidentiality

13.1 Confidential Information: Each party will maintain as confidential at all times, and will not at any time, directly or indirectly:
132
(a) disclose or permit to be disclosed to any person;
(b) use for itself or to the detriment of the other party; any Confidential Information of the other party except as, and then only to the extent:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
required by law;
that the information is already or becomes public knowledge, otherwise than as a result of a breach, by the receiving party, of any provision of this Agreement;
that the information is disclosed to the receiving party, without restriction, by a third party and without any breach of confidentiality by the third party;
that the information is developed independenfly by the receiving party without reliance on any of the Confidential Information of the other party;
authorized in writing by the other party; or
reasonably required by this Agreement (and, without limiting the effect of this clause, a party may disclose Confidential Information of the other party only to those of its officers, employees or professional advisers on a "need to know' basis, as is reasonably required for the implementation of this Agreement).

PX's Intellectual Property: Customer acknowledges and agrees that the computer programs, computer software, specifications, data, images, designs, codes, and configurations, ("Software") contained in or utilized by the Equipment and PX's network are proprietary and confidential to PX and protected under United States copyright law. Customer shall not copy, modify, adopt, translate, merge, reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble, the equipment or Software, or create any derivative works based on the Equipment, PX network or Software. Without limiting the effect of clause 13.1 , Customer will treat information about PX's Intellectual Property as the Confidential Information of PX.

14. Force Majeure

14.1 142

14.3 Customer acknowledges that PX relies on third-party providers in the delivery of its services, including, but not limited to, wireless data network providers, cellular radio service provided by third parties that is available only when within the operating range of cellular systems, and cellular service is subject to transmissions limitations and dropped or interrupted transmissions. Cellular service may be temporarily refused, limited, interrupted, or curtailed because of government regulations or orders, atmospheric and/or topographical conditions, and cellular system modifications, repairs, and upgrades. Customer agrees that PX shall not be liable for, and to hold PX harmless for any losses, damages, or business interruptions sustained as a result of interruptions caused by its wireless data network providers or any other third-party provider.

Neither party (the • Affected Party") shall be liable for any default or delay in the performance of its obligations under this Agreement if and to the extent such default or delay is caused, directly or indirectly, by (a) fire, flood, elements of nature or other acts of God; (b) any outbreak or escalation of hostilities, war, riots or civil disorders in any country; (c) any act or omission of the other party or any government authority; (d) any labor disputes (whether or not employees' demands are reasonable or within the party's power to satisfy); or (e) the nonperformance by a third party for any similar cause beyond the reasonable control of such party, including without !imitation, failures or fluctuations in telecommunications or other equipment such as described in clause.

In any such event, the Affected Party shall be excused from any further performance and observance of the obligations so affected only for as long as such circumstances prevail and sucti party continues to use commercially reasonable efforts to recommence performance or observance as soon as practicable, provided that:
(a) Notice: whenever the Affected Party becomes aware that such a result has occurred or is likely to occur, the Affected Party will, as soon as practicable, notify the other party by written notice accordingly; (b) Continued Performance: each party will continue to use commercially reasonable efforts to perform its obligations as required under this Agreement; and
(c) No Deemed Acceptance of Extra Costs: neither party will be deemed to have accepted any liability to pay or share any extra costs which may be incurred by the other party in complying with this clause or otherwise resulting from such act, omission or failure; arid
(d) Charges: this clause 14 will not apply in respect of Custome(s obligation to pay any charges or Fees payable urlder this Agreement.

15. License

15.1 15.2
Grant of License: PX grants to Customer a non-exclusive, non-transferable license to use Payment Express, the Goods, the Software and the Documentation for the Term of this Agreement solely for the Permitted Use. Any other use or dealings with Payment Express, the Goods, the Software or the Documentation without the prior written consent of PX will be a material breach of this Agreement. Except to the extent specifically authorized under this Agreement, Customer must not sub-license, transfer, assign, rent or sell any of Payment Express, the Goods, the Software or the Documentation or the right to use Payment Express, the Goods, the Software or the Documentation.

PX Warranty: PX warrants that PX has the right and authority to grant to Customer the license set out at clause 15.1, in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

16. Terms of Use

16.1 Adequacy: Customer must satisfy itself as to the adequacy, appropriateness and compatibility of Payment Express and/or the Goods for its requirements. Without limiting the foregoing, Customer acknowledges that it has not relied on any statements or representations on .the part of PX as to performance or functionality, verbal or otherwise, except as expressly recorded in this Agreement.

16.2 PX Logo: If Customer uses a capture method for credit or debit card processing using a system which is not hosted by PX, Customer agrees to display the PX Logo in a readily visible position on the user interface of Customer's system where the credit or debit card data is captured. The PX Logo must not be altered or used for any other purpose without the prior written consent of PX.

4.C.j
Packet Pg. 1067 Attachment: Windcave / Payment Express Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave))

16.3 Compliance: If Customer is not compliant with one or more of the Security Standards, Customer must not capture or store any credit or debit card number or expiry date locally on Customer's or a non-compliant third party's system.

16.4 No Right to Copy, Alter or Modify: Customer may make a reasonable number of copies of the Software for backup and disaster recovery purposes only. Except for such back-up copies, Customer must not, and must not permit any other person to, copy, reproduce, translate, adapt, vary, repair or modify all or any part of Payment Express, the Goods, the Software or the Documentation by any means or in any form without PX's prior written consent.

16.5 Permitted Use: Customer may not:
(a) use Payment Express, the Goods, the Software or the Documentation for any purpose other than the Permitted Use; or (b) use the Software independently of the other components of Payment Express unless PX has given prior written consent to do so.

If this Agreement is terminated, Customer's right to use Payment Express, the Software and the Documentation will automatically terminate and Customer must immediately remove all copies of the Software from its system(s) and return Payment Express, the Goods, the Software and the Documentation to PX

16.6 Reverse Engineering: Customer must not and must not permit any other person to, reverse assemble or decompile the whole or any part of the Software.

16.7 No Third Party Use: Except as expressly provided for in this Agreement, the Customer must not provide, or otherwise make available, Payment Express the Goods, the Software or the Documentation or any component thereof in any form to any person (a 'Third Party") withoutthe prior written consent of PX. If PX grants such consent, Customer must ensure thatthe Third Party complies with the provisions of clauses 8, 13, 15 and 16 (so far as those provisions relate to Customer) as if the Third Party were a party to this Agreement. Customer will be liable to PX for all acts or omissions of any Third Party in contravention of the provisions of clauses 8, 13, 15 and 16.

16.8 Installation: Customer will be responsible for, and all bear all costs associated with, the installation, operation, maintenance and support of the Goods.

16.9 PX Testing Prior to Launch: Prior to any permitted use of PX products and/or Software by Customer or any third party, PX shall be entitled to test all PX products and Software that Customer purchases, rents, or intends to use for at least seven (7) Business Days ("Prelaunch Testing'). Such Pre-launch Testing shall also entitle PX to at least three (3) Business Days to test transaction processing and settlement

16.10 Labels: Customer will not remove or deface any labels affixed by PX to the Goods. Customer will not affix any label to the Goods.

17. Rental/Loan of Goods

17.1 Where Customer agrees to rent or borrow Goods from PX, the following terms and conditions apply:
(a) Ownership: Legal and beneficial ownership of, and title to, Payment Express, the Goods, the Software and the Documentation remains at all times with PX;
(b) Risk: Customer will bear the risk of, and be responsible for, all loss (including theft) of or damage to, the G_oods from the time that they are first delivered to Customer until the time that they are delivered back to PX; (c) Maintain Goods: Customer must ta_ke reasonable steps to avoid exposure of the Goods to excessive heat, dust and moisture, liquids and electrical and physical shock;
(d) License Terms: Customer must comply with all manufacturer's license terms applicable to the Goods (as supplied with the Goods or otherwise notified by PX to Customer from time to time); (e) Theft, Seizure, Loss, Damage, Repairs: If for any reason the Goods are stolen, seized, lost, damaged or require repairs, Customer must immediately advise PX of the theft, seizure, loss, damage or repairs required. Customer must pay all costs and comply with PX's directions in connection with replacing or recovering the Goods, repairing any damage or the replacing of any parts (fair wear and tear excepted). Customer must continue to pay the Fees while the Goods are being replaced or repaired or, in the event of theft, seizure or loss, while the Goods are missing. PX will not be liable for any loss or damage in relation to the unavailability of the Goods; (n No Dealing or Modifying or Security Interests: Customer must not sell, lend, lease, transfer, modify or otherwise deal with the Goods without first obtaining PX's written consent. Customer must not create, or allow to be created, a security interest over the Goods; ·
(g) Inspection: Customer must allow PX to inspect the Goods at any time during normal business hours, provided that PX first gives Customer not less than 2 Business Days' notice;
(h) Return of Goods: When this Agreement ends (either by completion of the Term or by way of termination), Customer will, at Customer's expense, return the Goods, in good working order and undamaged condition (fair wear and tear excepted) to PX's place.of business. If the Customer fails to return the Goods within 14 Business Days of the end of the Agreement, Customer will pay PX the fair value of the Goods as at the completion of the Term; (i) Repossession: If Customer does not return the Goods when required hereunder, PX may (subject to compliance with applicable law) enter any premises where PX reasonably believes that the Goods may be located and Customer will provide all reasonable authority and assistance to enable recovery of those Goods by PX. Customer will be liable to PX for all costs (including reasonable attorney's fees) incurred by PX in recovering the Goods; and 0) Further supply: The rental of Goods by PX to Customer does not guarantee Customer that PX will supply Goods beyond the Initial Term

18. Payment Express Support Services

18.1 Support: PX will provide the Support Services to Customer.

18.2 Emergency Support Services and Other Services: PX may make available the Emergency Support Services. If Customer requires Emergency Support Services and/or services additional to the Support Services PX may, if it agrees to provide those services to Customer, charge Customer for those services on a time and materials basis and on such other terms and conditions as may be agreed between the parties.

18.3 Alterations to Software: PX may, at its sole discretion, alter, upgrade, update or change Payment Express at any time during the Term of this Agreement. Where PX believes that such alteration, upgrade, update or change will, or is likely to, materially affect Customers use of Payment Express, PX will endeavor to notify Customer of this in advance. Customer acknowledges and agrees that, if Customer fails to promptly install all updates to any software forming part of Payment Express supplied by PX in connection with this Agreement Customer may be unable to process Transactions and that:
(a) PX will not be liable to Customer under this Agreement in respect of such inability; and

4.C.j
Packet Pg. 1068 Attachment: Windcave / Payment Express Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) (b) PX will be released from any obligation to supply the Support Services during any period which Customer has failed to install any such update.

18.4 PX Website: Customer acknowledges and agrees that PX may, at its sole discretion, determine what information, data, features and functionality is made available to Customer via the PX Website. Customer agrees to comply with any terms that PX may specify in relation to Customer's use of the PX Website. In the event of any inconsistency between the terms and conditions of this Agreement and those on the PX Website, the terms and conditions of this Agreement will apply to the extent of that inconsistency. PX will supply user names and passwords to enable authorized users of Customer to access the PX Website. Customer must keep such user names and passwords secure and made known only to authorized users and will be responsible for all use of the PX Website through use of Customer's user names and passwords. If Customer breaches any term of this Agreement or the terms of use of the PX Website, PX may disable Customer's user names and passwords.

18.5 Offline Mode: Customer authorizes PX to enable processing of credit cards offline in the event of an internet or connection failure ("Offline Mode"). Additionally, Customer authorizes PX to enact service in Offline Mode until internet service is restored for a maximum of 4 hours per event. Transactions in Offline Mode are capped at fifty (50) dollars maximum per transaction per card, and a maximum of five-hundred (500) transactions processed per device per Offline Mode event and a maximum of one-thousand (1000) dollars total per device per Offline Mode event Customer and PX agree and acknowledge that PX is not liable for unsuccessful transactions that are a result of Offline Mode transaction processing.'Customer is responsible with acquiring approval from its banking partner for operation of Offline Mode. PX is not liable if the terms of Clause 18.5 or the operation of Offline Mode causes Customer's account to be downgraded, shut down, disrupted, or otherwise adversely impacted.

19. General

19.1 Entire Agreement: This Agreement including all schedules hereto records the entire arrangement between the parties relating to all matters dealt with in this Agreement and supersedes all previous arrangements, whether written, oral or both, relating to such matters.

This Agreement expressly supersedes any and all terms and conditions stated in any purchase order or other form related to this Agreement, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by PX's General Counsel.

19.2 Disputes: Section left intentionally blank. This section left Intentionally blank.

19.3 Waiver: No waiver of any breach, or failure to enforce any provision, of this Agreement at any time by either party shall in any way limit or waive the right of such party to subsequently enforce and compel strict compliance with the provisions of this Agreement. 19A Severance: Any provision in this Agreement which is or becomes unenforceable, illegal or invalid for any reason shall be severed and shall not affect the enforceability, legality, validity or application of any other provision which shall remain in full force and effect.

19.5 Assignment: Section left Intentionally blank. ·

19.6 Amendment: Except as expressly provided for in this Agreement, no amendment to this Agreement will be valid unless recorded in writing and signed by a duly authorized senior representative of each party.

19.7 Goveming Law and Jurisdiction: This section left intentionally blank.

19.8 Remedies: The rights, powers and remedies provided in this Agreement are not exclusive of any rights, powers or remedies provided bylaw.

19.9 Subcontracting: PX may appoint subcontractors to perform any of its obligations under this Agreement.

19.10 Counterparts and copies: This Agreement may be signed in any number of counterpart copies which, read together, will constitute one and the same document. Any facsimile copy of this agreement or copy of this agreement sent via email in PDF format (induding any facsimile copy or copy sent via email in PDF format, of any document evidencing either party's signature of this agreement) may be relied upon by the other party as if it were an original copy. This Agreement may be entered into on the basis of an exchange of such facsimile or PDF copies.

19.11 Notices: Any notice or other communication to be given under this Agreement must be in writing and must be served by one of the following This section left intentionally blank.

19.12 Conflicts: In the event of any conflict or inconsistency between this Agreement and the terms of a purchase order made by Customer to PX, this Agreement shall govern and control.

4.C.j
Packet Pg. 1069 Attachment: Windcave / Payment Express Original Contract (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) Contract No. 10599 (CCS)

FIRST MODIFICATION TO CONTRACTUALSERVICES AGREEMENT
This First Modification to Contractual Services Agreement ("First Modification"), en:
tered into as of k cuvd:x,r 2, I _, 20 / 1-, by and between the City of Santa Monica, a municipal corporation ("City") (Customer ID: 57111), and PAYMENT EXPRESS INC. (PX) is made with reference to the following:

RECITALS
A. On or about September 13, 2017, the City and PAYMENT EXPRESS INC. (PX) entered into Contractual Services Agreement, Contract Number 4387, for credit card processing services within the Parking Access and Revenue Control System in the City of Santa Monica ("Original Agreement").

B. The City and PAYMENT EXPRESS INC. (PX) desire to modify the Original Agreement to extend the contract term; include additional services to be performed by PAYMENT EXPRESS INC. (PX); and to increase the contract price to pay for those additional services.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS
Now, therefore, the undersigned parties do hereby mutually agree to modify the Original Agreement as follows:

1. Section 1 of the Original Agreement entitled "Term" shall be deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following paragraph:

Term. This Agreement begins on the Execution Date and terminates on December 31, 2023, unless terminated earlier as set forth in the Original Agreement or extended by the parties in writing.

I.I Two (2) Additional One-Year Options. The City in its sole and absolute discretion has the right and option to extend the Agreement for two (2) additional one-year options under the same terms and conditions as set forth herein. The City shall notify PAYMENT EXPRESS INC. (PX) of its intention to exercise each of the one-year options ("Option Notice") at least 90 days prior to the expiration of this Agreement and at least 90 days prior to the expiration of the first option year, assuming that first option is exercised. Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing herein shall limit the ability of either party to terminate this Agreement pursuant to Section 14 of this Agreement.

2. Section 2 of the Original Agreement shall be deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following paragraph:
1 December 2017

4.C.k
Packet Pg. 1070 Attachment: Windcave / Payment Express First Modification (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) will perform all of the services ("Services") described in Exhibit Al, Scope of Services. PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) will complete the Services in accordance with Exhibit B, Budget, through December 31, 2017. After December 31, 2017, PAYMENT EXPRESS, INC. (PX) will complete the Services in accordance with Exhibit B-1, Budget.

3. Section 4 of the Original Agreement entitled "Compensation" shall be modified by adding the following paragraph:

Compensation. The City will compensate PAYMENT EXPRESS INC. (PX) for the Additional Services described in Exhibit A 1 in an amount not to exceed ONE MILLION AND FIFTY THOUSAND DOLIARS
AND NO CENTS ($1,050,000), as set forth in Exhibit B-1. The total contract price for services pursuant to the Original Agreement and this First Modification shall not exceed ONE MILLION AND SEVENTY THOUSAND DOLLARS AND NO CENTS ($1,070,000).

4. The following Section 26 entitled "Compliance with Data Security Requirements" shall be added to the Original Agreement, as follows:

26.1. Requirements. Without limiting or reducing the scope of PAYMENT EXPRESS INC. (PX) warranty obligations to the City pursuant to Section 7 .1 of Exhibit D of the Original Agreement, PAYMENT EXPRESS INC. (PX) warrants and represents that the Services, as delivered by PAYMENT EXPRESS INC. (PX) to the City, shall comply with all applicable (i) Laws regarding consumer protection and security of personally identifiable information (collectively, the "Data Security Laws") including, without limitation, the Fair and Accurate Credit Transactions Act of 2003 ("FACT A"), and (ii) standards regarding the storing, processing and/ or transmitting of payment and cardholder data, or impacting the security of the cardholder data environment (collectively, the 'Data Security Standards") including, without limitation, mandatory standards such as the Data Security Standard (the "PCI-DSS"), the PIN Transaction Security (the "PCI-PTS") requirements and the Point-to-Point Encryption ("PCI-P2PE") solutions. The Data Security Laws and Data Security Standards are collectively referred to as the "Data Security Requirements" as they currently exist or may be updated from time to time during the term of this Agreement. PAYMENT EXPRESS INC. (PX) shall upon written request provide applicable PCI compliance certifications, the current expiration date for the Solution. PAYMENT EXPRESS INC. (PX) shall use reasonable endeavors to com2 December 2017

4.C.k
Packet Pg. 1071 Attachment: Windcave / Payment Express First Modification (7191 : Parking Contract Extensions (SP Plus, Skidata, and Windcave)) ply with the Data Security Requirements in effect as of the date that the Equipment and Software are delivered to the City and provide a secure environment for all data in its possession or processed by the Solution.

Santa Monica City CouncilSeptember 30, 2025

Santa Monica City Council
September 30, 2025